Download: DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30 Consists of XV-THA30, SP-XA30, SP-XSA30 and SP-WA30
DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30 Consists of XV-THA30, SP-XA30, SP-XSA30 and SP-WA30 STANDBY/ON AUDIO TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME VCR DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF VCR CHANNEL TUNING B.SEARCH F.SEARCH ENTER VOLUME TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING STANDBY AUDIO/FM MODE STANDBY/ON DSP VOLUME SOURCE DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30DIGITALRM-STHA30U DVD CINEMA SYSTEM INSTRUCTIONS For Customer Use: Enter below the Model No. and Serial No. which are located either on the rear, bottom or side of the cabinet. Retain this informat...
Author:
Aurora Ness Shared: 7/30/19
Downloads: 36 Views: 2242
Content
DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30 Consists of XV-THA30, SP-XA30, SP-XSA30 and SP-WA30
STANDBY/ONAUDIO
TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUMEVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCHENTER VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGSTANDBY
AUDIO/FM MODE STANDBY/ON DSP VOLUME SOURCE DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30DIGITALRM-STHA30U DVD CINEMA SYSTEMINSTRUCTIONS
For Customer Use: Enter below the Model No. and Serial No. which are located either on the rear, bottom or side of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference. Model No. Serial No.LVT0945-005A
[US, UB] TH-A30[US,UB]cover.pm6 1 02.7.31, 11:22 AM,Warnings, Cautions and Others /
Caution –– STANDBY/ON switch! STANDBY/ON Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely. The STANDBY/ON STANDBY/ON switch in any position does not disconnect the mains line. The power can be remote controlled.CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.: 1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet. 2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.CAUTION
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes. (If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.) • Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted candles, on the apparatus. • When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be considered and local rules or laws governing the disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly. • Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus. Caution: Proper Ventilation To avoid risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from damage. Locate the apparatus as follows: Front: No obstructions open spacing. Sides: No obstructions in 10 cm from the sides. Top: No obstructions in 10 cm from the top. Back: No obstructions in 15 cm from the back Bottom: No obstructions, place on the level surface. In addition, maintain the best possible air circulation as illustrated. Spacing 15 cm or more XV-THA30 Wall or obstructions Front Stand height 15 cm or more FloorG-1
TH-A30[US,UB]safety.pm6 1 02.7.31, 1:07 PM,IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS /
REPRODUCTION OF LABELS / 1 CLASSIFICATION LABEL, PLACED ON EXTERIOR 2 WARNING LABEL, PLACED INSIDE THE UNITSURFACE
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASER LAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1 1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT 2. CAUTION: Invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam. 3. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.G-2
TH-A30[US,UB]safety.pm6 2 02.7.31, 1:07 PM,Table of Contents
Parts Identification ... 2 DVD Playback ... 29 Center Unit ... 2 Showing the On-Screen Bar ... 29 Remote Control ... 3 Selecting the Subtitles ... 30 Getting Started... 5 Selecting the Audio Languages ... 30 Selecting the Multi-Angle Views ... 30 Before Installation ... 5 Checking the Remaining Time ... 31 Checking the Supplied Accessories ... 5 Disc Menu-Driven Playback ... 31 Adjusting the Voltage Selector ... 5 Moving to a Particular Portion Directly ... 32 Putting Batteries in the Remote Control ... 5 Searching for a Particular Point ... 32 Connecting the FM and AM Antennas ... 6 Repeating Playback ... 33 Speaker Layout Diagram ... 7 7 Repeat Play ... 33 Connecting the Speakers ... 8 7 A–B Repeat ... 33 Connecting Audio/Video Component ... 9 Programming the Playing Order of the Chapters Basic DVD Operations ... 11 —Program Play ... 34 1 Turn On the Power ... 11 DVD Special Effect Playback ... 36 2 Select the source ... 11 7 Still Picture/Frame-by-Frame Playback ... 36 3 Load a DVD ... 11 7 Slow Motion Playback ... 36 4 Start Playback ... 11 7 Zoom ... 36 5 Adjust the Volume ... 11 VCD/CD Playback... 37 6 Select an Appropriate Progressive Mode ... 12 Showing the On-Screen Bar ... 37 7 Activate Surround or DSP Mode ... 12 Checking the Remaining Time ... 37 8 Stop Playback ... 12 Disc Menu-Driven Playback (Only for VCD) ... 38 Basic VCD/CD Operations ... 13 Moving to a Particular Portion Directly ... 38 Searching for a Particular Point ... 38 1 Turn On the Power ... 13 Repeating Playback ... 39 2 Select the source ... 13 7 Repeat Play ... 39 3 Load a VCD/CD ... 13 7 A–B Repeat ... 39 4 Start Playback ... 13 Programming the Playing Order of the Tracks 5 Adjust the Volume ... 14 —Program Play ... 40 6 Activate DSP Mode ... 14 Selecting Playback Channel ... 41 7 Stop Playback ... 14 VCD Special Effect Playback ... 42 Basic Tuner Operations ... 15 7 Still Picture/Frame-by-Frame Playback ... 42 1 Turn On the Power ... 15 7 Slow Motion Playback ... 42 2 Select the Band ... 15 7 Zoom ... 42 3 Adjust the Volume ... 15 MP3 Introduction ... 43 4 Tune in to a Station ... 15 MP3 Playback ... 44 Other Basic Operations ... 16 Starting Playback ... 44 Enjoying Sounds from the External Component ... 16 Operations Using the On-Screen Display ... 45 Selecting an Appropriate Progressive Mode ... 16 Moving to a Particular Track Directly ... 46 Turning Off the Power with the Timer ... 16 Repeating Playback ... 46 TV Settings... 17 Tuner Operations ... 47 Changing the Color System ... 17 Setting the AM Tuner Interval Spacing ... 47 Changing the Scanning Mode ... 17 Tuning in Stations ... 47 Using Preset Tuning ... 48 Speaker Settings... 18 Selecting the FM Reception Mode ... 48 Setting the Delay Time ... 18 Setting up the DVD Preferences ... 49 Creating Realistic Sound Fields ... 20 Setting the Initial Languages ... 49 7 Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround... 20 Introducing the DVD Preference (System) ... 50 7 Dolby Surround ... 20 Setting the Parental (Rating) Level ... 52 7 DSP (Digital Signal Processor) Modes ... 21 Adjusting Stereo Sound ... 22 Operating JVC’s Components ... 54 Adjusting Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround ... 23 Operating Other Manufacturers’ TV ... 55 Activating Dynamic Range Compression ... 24 Maintenance ... 56 Adjusting Dolby Surround ... 24 Adjusting DSP Modes ... 25 Troubleshooting ... 57 Disc Introduction—DVD/VCD/CD ... 27 Specifications... 58 Basic Disc Operations ... 28 EN01-10TH-A30[U].pm6 1 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,Parts Identification Center Unit Front Panel
12345678STANDBY
AUDIO/FM MODE STANDBY/ON DSP VOLUME SOURCE DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30DIGITAL9pqwSee pages in the parentheses for details.Front Panel
1 STANDBY/ON button and STANDBY lamp (11 – 15) 7 Remote sensor 2 AUDIO/FM MODE button (30, 41, 48) 8 3/8 (play/pause) button (11 – 14, 28, 44) 3 Multi operation buttons • Pressing this button also turns on the power and • 4, ¢, and 7 changes the source to the DVD player. 4 Disc tray (11, 13) 9 DSP button (12, 14, 22, 25) 5 0 (open/close) button (11 – 14, 35, 40, 44) p VOLUME + and – buttons (11, 14, 15) • Pressing this button also turns on the power and q SOURCE button (15, 16, 47, 48) changes the source to the DVD player. w Illumination lamp (11 – 15) 6 Display windowDisplay Window
1234567TUNED ST PROGRAM PBC MHz TITLE DSP kHz LINEAR PCMLCRLFE
LS S RS89See pages in the parentheses for details.Display Window
1 Sound signal indicators (12, 14, 16, 20) 5 DSP indicator (21, 25) • PRO LOGIC, DOLBY DIGITAL, DTS, 6 PBC (Play Back Control) indicator (37) and LINEAR PCM 7 Frequency unit indicators 2 TITLE indicator (28) • MHz (for FM station) and kHz (for AM station) 3 Tuner mode indicators (15, 47, 48) 8 Audio channel indicators • TUNED and ST (stereo) • Indicates audio channels currently being played back. 4 PROGRAM indicator (34, 40, 48) 9 Main display EN01-10TH-A30[U].pm6 2 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,Parts Identification Remote Control
See pages in the parentheses for details.Remote Cotrol Remote Control
1 STANDBY/ON AUDIO button (11 – 15) 2 VCR button (54) 3 TV button (11, 13, 54, 55) STANDBY/ON 4 STEP button (36, 42, 54) 1 AUDIO 5 DISPLAY button (29, 37) 6 AUDIO/FM MODE button (30, 41, 48) 2t7SUBTITLE button (30) TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE3y8Source selecting buttons (11, 13, 15, 16, 24, 47) • DVD, FM/AM, AUX 4 DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL u • Pressing one of these buttons also turns on the power. 5 AUDIO/ 9 4, 7, 3/8, and ¢ buttons FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME6iTUNER PRESET UP and DOWN buttons (48) 7 VCR FF (Fast-forward) and REW (Rewind) buttonsDVD FM/AM AUX CONTROLopVCR CHANNEL + and – buttons (54)8 TUNING + and – buttons (15, 47) TUNER PRESET DOWN UP ¡ F. (Forward) SEARCH and 1 B. (Back) SEARCH 9 buttonsREW FF q Menu operation buttons VCR CHANNELTUNING
p • 3, 2, 5, and ∞ buttons • ENTER button B.SEARCH F.SEARCH w VOLUME + and – buttons (11, 14, 15) e TOP MENU button (31) r MENU button (31, 38) q ENTER t TV/VIDEO button (11, 13, 54, 55) y PROGRESSIVE button (12, 16, 17) u TV CHANNEL + and – buttons (54, 55) i TV VOLUME + and – buttons (54, 55) w VOLUME o VCR CONTROL button (54) TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING e ; IMPORTANT: If you press VCR CONTROL , this remote control will workraONLY for the JVC’s VCR. When you want to operate the system again, press DVD or FM/AM. ; MUTING button (11, 14) a RETURN button (38, 50, 51) RM-STHA30U DVD CINEMA SYSTEM EN01-10TH-A30[U].pm6 3 02.7.31, 11:11 AM, nInside the Cover Inside the Cover
1 Number buttons (32, 38, 46, 54, 55) 2 SLOW button (36, 42) TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING 3 ZOOM button (36, 42) 4 ANGLE button (30) 5 REPEAT button (33, 39, 46) SOUND 6 A–B REPEAT button (33, 39) 12397CLEAR button (32, 38, 41) SETTING 8 SEARCH button (32, 38, 46) 1456p9SOUND button (22 – 26) PRO LOGIC p SETTING button (18, 19) 789qqPRO LOGIC button (16, 19, 22, 24) 2 SLOW SETUP TESTwwSETUP button (50 – 53) 0e3eTEST button (21)ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODErrD.R.C button (24) 4ttDSP MODE button (12, 14, 22, 25) REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM5yPROGRAM button (34, 35, 40, 48)y6uSLEEP button (16)CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEPuiREMAIN button (31, 37) 8 iTo open the cover of the remote control, push here then
slide downward. VOLUMEDEFM/A TM V VOLUME T AU UX TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING NERCOVP CR NTRRESE OT L B.SE VA CR RCH T CU HN AIN NG NEL ENT F.E SR EARCH TOP MENU M VOE LN UU MERETURN
1 MUTING42753SLO SW86OUND ANG SEL +E 10 9 TTING RE NTS SE PP Z RE O OAT OM C/PTUAL PLOGIC
CL TE AA < REP D E–> E IGA ES
S TRBTTTONE G PRO DO TO GS
R PA MM ODE REM EA FI FN ECTSLEEP
D RV MD -C SIN TE HM AA3S0Y USTEM RM-STHA30U DVD CINEMA SYSTEM EN01-10TH-A30[U].pm6 4 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,Getting Started Before Installation Putting Batteries in the Remote Control
General Precautions Before using the remote control, put two supplied batteries first. • DO NOT insert any metal object into the center unit. • When using the remote control, aim the remote control directly at • DO NOT disassemble the center unit or remove screws, covers, or the remote sensor on the center unit. cabinet. • DO NOT expose the center unit to rain or moisture. 1. On the back of the remote control, remove the battery cover. Locations • Install the center unit in a location that is level and protected from moisture. • The temperature around the center unit must be between 5˚C and 35˚C. • Make sure there is good ventilation around the center unit. Poor ventilation could cause overheating and damage the center unit. Handling the center unit • DO NOT touch the power cord with wet hands. 2. Insert batteries. Make sure to match the polarity: • DO NOT pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When (+) to (+) and (–) to (–). unplugging the cord, always grasp the plug so as not to damage the cord. • Keep the power cord away from the connecting cords and the antenna. The power cord may cause noise or screen interference. It is recommended to use a coaxial cable for antenna connection, since it is well-shielded against interference. • When a power failure occurs, or when you unplug the power cord, the preset settings such as preset FM/AM channels and sound adjustments may be erased in a few days. 3. Replace the cover.Checking the Supplied Accessories
Check to be sure you have all of the following supplied accessories. The number in the parentheses indicates the quantity of the pieces supplied. • Remote Control (1) • Batteries (2) • AM loop antenna (1) If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases, replace • FM antenna (1) the batteries. Use two UM-4“AAA”/IEC “R03” type dry-cell • AC Plug Adaptor (1) (not supplied for Hong Kong) batteries. • Video cord (1) CAUTION: If anything is missing, contact your dealer immediately. Follow these precautions to avoid leaking or cracking cells: • Place batteries in the remote control so they match the polarity: (+) to (+) and (–) to (–).Adjusting the Voltage Selector • Use the correct type of batteries. Batteries that look similar may
differ in voltage. • Always replace both batteries at the same time. Before connections, always do the following first if necessary. • Do not expose batteries to heat or flame. Set the correct voltage for your area with the voltage selector switch on the rear panel. Slide the voltage selector using a screw driver, so the voltage number the voltage mark is set at is the same as the voltage where you are plugging in the system. EN01-10TH-A30[U].pm6 5 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,Connecting the FM and AM Antennas
If AM reception is poor, connect single vinyl-covered wire (not supplied). 123AM loop antenna (supplied) If FM reception is poor, connect outdoor FM antenna (not supplied). Snap the tabs on the loop into FM antenna (supplied) the slots of the base to assemble the AM loop antenna. COMPONENT OUT PR PB Y MIN MIN4 MIN MIN Center unit Cooling fan (See “About the cooling fan” below.) FM antenna connection AM antenna connection Connect the supplied FM antenna to the FM 75 Ω COAXIAL Connect the supplied AM loop antenna to the AM and H terminals. terminal as temporary measure. Turn the loop until you have the best reception. Extend the supplied FM antenna horizontally. • If reception is poor, connect an outdoor single vinyl-covered wire • If reception is poor, connect an outdoor antenna. Before attaching to the AM terminal. (Keep the AM loop antenna connected.) a 75 Ω coaxial cable (with a standard type connector), disconnect the supplied FM antenna. Note: If the AM loop antenna wire is covered with vinyl, remove the vinyl by twisting it as shown in the diagram. About the cooling fan A cooling fan is mounted on the rear panel of the center unit to For safety, observe the following carefully. prevent abnormal temperature inside the center unit, thus assuring • Make sure there is good ventilation around the center unit. Poor normal operation of the unit. The cooling fan automatically starts ventilation could overheat and damage the center unit. rotating to supply external cool air to the inside of the center unit • DO NOT block the cooling fan and the ventilation openings or when the internal temperature goes up. holes. (If they are blocked by a newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.) • DO NOT touch the speaker cords to the cooling fan. EN01-10TH-A30[U].pm6 6 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,Getting Started Speaker Layout Diagram Center unit STANDBY
AUDIO/FM MODE STANDBY/ONDIGITALDSP VOLUME SOURCESURROUNDDVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30DIGITALRight front Subwoofer
speakerLeft front
speakerCenter speaker Left rear Right rear
speaker speaker COMPONENT OUT PR PB Y MIN MIN 4 MIN MINTo right rear To center speaker To left front speaker
speakerTo left rear To subwoofer To right front speaker
speaker EN01-10TH-A30[U].pm6 7 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,Connecting the Speakers When setting the speakers
To obtain the best possible sound from this system, you need to Connect the satellite speakers and subwoofer to the terminals on the place all the speakers except the subwoofer at the same distance rear panel using speaker cords supplied. from the listening position with each front faced toward the listener. Labels are attached to the speaker cords to indicate the terminals to Since bass sound is non-directional, you can place a subwoofer be connected. wherever you like. Normally place it in front of you. • Connect the red cord to the red (+) terminal, and the black cord to Left front Center speaker Right front speaker speaker the black (–) terminal respectively. CAUTION: Subwoofer Use speakers with the SPEAKER IMPEDANCE indicated by the speaker terminals.Connecting speaker cords to the terminals
123Left rear Right rear speaker speaker If your speakers cannot be placed at the same distance from the listening position You can adjust the delay time of the center speaker and rear speakers. For in-depth information about adjusting the delay time, see “Setting the Delay Time” on page 18 and 19. 1 Press and hold the terminal clamp. Note: 2 Insert the speaker cord. You can change the phase of subwoofer sounds by connecting the speaker cords to the terminals inversely—the red cord to the black 3 Release the finger from the clamp. terminal, and the black cord to the red terminal. You may get the more effective bass sounds by changing the phase. Notes: • If the speaker cord is covered with vinyl, remove the CAUTION: vinyl by twisting it as shown in the diagram. • Make sure the core wire of speaker cords do not expose • When attaching the satellite speakers on the wall, have them to out of the terminals.This could cause short-circuit. attached to the wall by a qualified person. DO NOT attach the satellite speakers on the wall by yourself to avoid an unexpected damage of their falling from the wall, caused by incorrect attachment or weakness in the wall. • Care is required in selecting a location for attaching speakers to the wall. Injury to personnel, or damage to equipment, may result if the speakers are attached in a location which interferes with daily activities. EN01-10TH-A30[U].pm6 8 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,Getting Started Connecting Audio/Video Component
Turn the power off to all components before connections. Audio component connection Connect another component to the center unit with the Illustrations of the input/output terminals below are typical audio cords. examples. Use the cords supplied with another component or purchase When you connect another component, refer also to its them at an electric appliance store. manuals since the terminal name actually printed on the rear vary among the components. Audio cord (not supplied) If you connect a sound-enhancing device such as a graphic equalizer between the source component and the center unit, the sound output through this system may be distorted. DBS Tuner Center unit COMPONENT OUT PR PB Y MD RecorderMIN
Cassette DeckAUDIO LEFT RIGHT VCR OUT TV
EN01-10TH-A30[U].pm6 9 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,TV connection
The S-video cord and the component video cord are not supplied with this system. Use the cords supplied with another components or purchase them at an electric appliance store.A Composite video cord (supplied) C Component video cord (not supplied)
Red BlueB
S-video cord (not supplied) Green You can select one of three connection types— A , B , and C . Illustrations below are typical examples. • If your TV has S-video (Y/C-separation) and/or component video When you connect the TV, refer also to its manual since the (Y, P , P ) jacks, connect them using an S-video cord (not terminal names actually printed on the rear vary among theR B supplied) B and/or component video cord (not supplied) C . components. By using these jacks, you can get a better picture quality—in the order : Component video > S-video > Composite video. • If your TV supports the progressive video input, you can enjoy a high quality picture by making the progressive scanning mode active (see page 17.)A B Center unit TV
CONPONENT OUT PR PB Y MIN MIN MIN MIN CONPONENT OUT PR PB Y Green YC
Red Green Blue PB/CB PR/CR Blue RedNow, you can plug the power cord of the center unit into the AC outlet.
Note: Keep the power cord away from the connecting cords and the antenna cables. The power cord may cause noise or screen interference. EN01-10TH-A30[U].pm6 10 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,Basic DVD Operations
This manual mainly explains operations using the buttons on 2 Select the Source the remote control. You can also use the buttons on the center DVD unit if they have the similar names (or marks) as those on the Press DVD. remote control. The source changes to DVD. If operations using the center unit are different from those using the remote control, they are then explained. 1 3 Load a DVDSTANDBY/ON AUDIO STANDBY/ON AUDIO On the front panel ONLY: Press 0 to open the disc tray, then place a DVD correctly TV TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE 6 PROGRESSIVE with its label side up. DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL TV/VIDEO AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME 2 DVD VCR DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL 8 TUNER PRESET7 DOWN UP 4 3/8 CORRECT INCORRECT REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH ENTER 4 Start Playback TUNER PRESET55VOLUME + Press 3/8.VOLUME – VOLUME The disc tray closes. “LOADING” appears for TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING MUTING a while. • You can also start playback by closing theSOUND
123disc tray using 0 on the front panel.SETTING
456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST05Adjust the Volume ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE 7 DSP MODE REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM To increase the volume, press and hold VOLUME +. CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP To decrease the volume, press and hold VOLUME –.VOLUME
• Before playing the disc, select the color system to match the your TV. See “Changing the Color System” on page 17. CAUTION: • For in-depth information about DVD operations, see Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any source. If pages 27 to 36. the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound energy can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin your speakers. 1 Turn On the Power Notes: Before turning on the system, turn on your TV and select the correct • By pressing VOLUME + or – repeatedly, you can adjust the volume video input. (See the manual supplied with your TV.) level step by step. • When you use a JVC’s TV, you can turn on your TV by pressing • The volume level can be adjusted within 51 steps—“MIN (minimum),” TV on the remote control, and select the video input by 01 to 49, and “MAX (maximum).” pressing TV/VIDEO. (If your TV is not a JVC’s, see “Operating Other Manufacturers’ TV” on page 55.) To turn off the sounds temporarily • For changing the OSD messages—the information on the TV screen—into the desired language, see “Setting the Initial From the remote control ONLY: Languages” on pages 49 and 50. Press MUTING. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON To restore the sound, press STANDBY/ON on the front panel). AUDIO MUTING again. The STANDBY lamp goes off and the illumination • Pressing VOLUME + or – also restores the sound. lamp on the center unit lights up. The source indication selected previously appears on the display. EN11-19TH-A30[U].pm6 11 02.7.31, 11:11 AM, ns 6 Select an Appropriate Progressive Mode To activate DSP modes Press DSP MODE (or DSP on the front panel). DSP MODE You can select the progressive mode according to the picture type The DSP indicator lights up and the current DSP mode (film or video source). appears on the display for a while. • Each time you press the button, DSP mode changes Press PROGRESSIVE repeatedly until the PROGRESSIVE as follows: progressive mode you want appears. • Each time you press the button, the progressive THEATER HALL LIVE CLUB mode changes as follows: Normal VIDEO MODE FILM MODE indication DANCE CLUB (canceled) AUTO MODE — For in-depth information about DSP modes, see “Creating Realistic Sound Fields” on pages 21, 25, and 26. Notes: • This mode is available only when progressive scanning mode is selected. Note: • For in-depth information about each progressive mode, see page 16. Before activating surround or DSP mode, adjust the speaker setting to bring out the best performance from this system. 7 For in-depth information about adjusting the speaker setting, see Activate Surround or DSP Mode “Speaker Settings” on pages 18 and 19. You can enjoy two kinds of surround—Digital Multichannel Surround (Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround) and DSP modes. 8 Stop Playback Digital Multichannel Surround—Dolby Digital Press 7 twice. TUNER PRESET and DTS Digital Surround Playback stops completely and “DVD” appears on the display. (The DVD player goes on Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround takes effect only when you working for 3 minutes after playback stops.) enjoy a disc encoded with its signals—the DOLBY DIGITAL or • This system can memorize the end point even DTS indicator lights up on the display. when you press 7 once. When you start playback again by pressing 3/8, playback begins from where it has been stopped— Sound signal Resume play. indicators on the display To remove the loaded disc Press 0. “OPEN” appears on the display and the disc tray comes out. To activate Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround To close the disc tray, press 0 again. When a disc encoded with the Dolby Digital or DTS Digital • If you do not press the button, the disc tray closes Surround is loaded, the system detects it and starts playing the disc automatically after 3 minutes. automatically with Multichannel Surround activated. – For in-depth information about surround modes, see “Creating Realistic Sound Fields” on pages 20 and 23 . To turn off the power (into standby) STANDBY/ON Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (orAUDIO
DSP modes—THEATER, HALL, LIVE CLUB, STANDBY/ON on the front panel). DANCE CLUB The illumination lamp goes off and the STANDBY lamp lights up. DSP modes take effect only when you enjoy a disc recorded using • If you press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON Linear PCM—the LINEAR PCM indicator lights up on the display. on the front panel) while the disc tray is kept open, the disc tray closes automatically, then the system is turned off. • A small amount of power is consumed even in standby mode. To Sound signal turn the power off completely, unplug the AC power cord. indicators on the display EN11-19TH-A30[U].pm6 12 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,Basic VCD/CD Operations
2 Select the Source 1 STANDBY/ON AUDIO STANDBY/ON DVD AUDIO Press DVD. TV TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL TV/VIDEO 3 Load a VCD/CD AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME 2 VCR DVD DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL On the front panel ONLY: 7 Press 0 to open the disc tray, then place a disc correctly7 TUNER PRESETDOWN UP 4 3/8 with its label side up. REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCHENTER
CORRECT INCORRECT 5 VOLUME – 5 VOLUME +VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING MUTING • When using a CD single (8 cm), place it on the inner circle of the SOUND disc tray. 123SETTING • Continued use of irregular shape CDs (heart-shape, octagonal, 456PRO LOGIC etc.) can damage the center unit. 789SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE 6 DSP MODE REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM 4 Start Playback CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP Press 3/8. TUNER PRESET The disc tray closes. “LOADING” appears for a while. • You can also start playback by closing the • Before playing the disc, select the color system to disc tray using 0 on the front panel. match the your TV. See “Changing the Color System” on page 17. • SVCD can be operated by using the VCD operation procedure. • For in-depth information about VCD/CD operations, see pages 27, 28, and 37 to 42. 1 Turn On the Power Before turning on the system, turn on your TV if necessary and select the correct video input. (See the manual supplied with your TV.) • When you use a JVC’s TV, you can turn on your TV by pressing TV on the remote control, and select the video input by pressing TV/VIDEO. (If your TV is not a JVC’s, see “Operating Other Manufacturers’ TV” on page 55.) • For changing the OSD messages—the information on the TV screen—into the desired language, see “Setting the Initial Languages” on pages 49 and 50. Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON STANDBY/ON on the front panel). AUDIO The STANDBY lamp goes off and the illumination lamp on the center unit lights up. The source indication selected previously appears on the display. EN11-19TH-A30[U].pm6 13 02.7.31, 11:11 AM, 5 Note: Adjust the Volume Before activating DSP mode, adjust the speaker setting to bring out the best performance from this system. To increase the volume, press and hold VOLUME +. For in-depth information about adjusting the speaker setting, see To decrease the volume, press and hold VOLUME –. “Speaker Settings” on pages 18 and 19. VOLUME 7 Stop Playback CAUTION: Press 7 twice. TUNER PRESET Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any source. If Playback stops completely and “VCD” or “CD” the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound energy appears on the display. (The DVD player goes can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin your speakers. on working for 3 minutes after playback stops.) • This system can memorize the end point even when you press 7 Notes: once. When you start playback again by pressing 3/8, playback begins from where it has been stopped—Resume play. • By pressing VOLUME + or – repeatedly, you can adjust the volume level step by step. • The volume level can be adjusted within 51 steps—“MIN (minimum),” To remove the loaded disc 01 to 49, and “MAX (maximum).” Press 0. “OPEN” appears on the display and the disc tray comes out. To turn off the sounds temporarily To close the disc tray, press 0 again. From the remote control ONLY: • If you do not press the button, the disc tray closes Press MUTING. automatically after 3 minutes.TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING To restore the sound, press MUTING again. To turn off the power (into standby) • Pressing VOLUME + or – also restores the sound. Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON STANDBY/ON on the front panel). AUDIO 6 The illumination lamp goes off and the STANDBYActivate DSP Mode lamp lights up. You can enjoy DSP modes. • If you press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) while the disc tray is kept open, the disc tray DSP modes—THEATER, HALL, LIVE CLUB, closes automatically, then the system is turned off. DANCE CLUB • A small amount of power is consumed even in standby mode. To turn the power off completely, unplug the AC power cord. DSP modes take effect only when you enjoy a disc recorded using Linear PCM—the LINEAR PCM indicator lights up on the display. Sound signal indicators on the display To activate DSP modes Press DSP MODE (or DSP on the front panel). DSP MODE The DSP indicator lights up and the current DSP mode appears on the display for a while. • Each time you press the button, DSP mode changes as follows: THEATER HALL LIVE CLUB Normal indication DANCE CLUB (canceled) — For in-depth information about DSP modes, see “Creating Realistic Sound Fields” on pages 21, 25, and 26. EN11-19TH-A30[U].pm6 14 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,Basic Tuner Operations
1 3 Adjust the VolumeSTANDBY/ON AUDIO STANDBY/ON To increase the volume, press and hold VOLUME +.AUDIO
To decrease the volume, press and hold VOLUME –. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVEVOLUME
DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME 2 FM/AM VCR CAUTION:DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any source. If TUNER PRESET DOWN UP the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound energy44can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin your speakers.TUNING – REW FFVCR CHANNEL TUNING +TUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH Notes: • By pressing VOLUME + or – repeatedly, you can adjust the volume level step by step.ENTER
• The volume level can be adjusted within 51 steps—“MIN (minimum),” 3 3 01 to 49, and “MAX (maximum).”VOLUME – VOLUME + • You can turn off the sounds temporarily by pressing MUTING.VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING MUTING 4 Tune in to a Station From the remote control: • For in-depth information about tuner operations, see Press and hold TUNING + VCR CHANNEL “Tuner Operations” on pages 47 and 48. or – until the station TUNING • 9 kHz interval spacing is the initial setting for AM frequency starts changing B.SEARCH F.SEARCH tuner. You can change the interval spacing. See continuously on the display. “Setting the AM Tuner Interval Spacing” on page 47. The system starts searching for a station. On the front panel: 1 Turn On the Power 1) Press 7 so that “MANUAL” appears on the display. 2) Press and hold ¢ or 4 until the station frequency starts Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or changing continuously on the display. STANDBY/ON on the front panel). STANDBY/ON The system starts searching for a station.AUDIO
The STANDBY lamp goes off and the illumination lamp lights up on the center unit. Notes: The source indication selected previously appears • When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the system on the display. stops searching, and the indicator lights up on the display. • When an FM stereo program is received, the indicator also 2 lights up. Select the Band • When you press the button repeatedly, the frequency changes step by step. From the remote control: Press FM/AM. To turn off the power (into standby) FM/AM The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON • Each time you press the button, the band alternates STANDBY/ON on the front panel) again. AUDIO between FM and AM. The illumination lamp goes off and the STANDBY lamp lights up. On the front panel: • A small amount of power is consumed even in Press SOURCE repeatedly until the desired band (FM or AM) standby mode. To turn the power off completely, unplug the AC appears on the display. SOURCE power cord. The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. • Each time you press the button, the source changes as follows:DVD player* AUX IN AM FM
* “WAIT” appears on the display. EN11-19TH-A30[U].pm6 15 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,Other Basic Operations
• When Dolby Surround activates, the PRO LOGIC indicator TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE PROGRESSIVE lights up on the display. DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL – For in-depth information about Pro Logic modes, see “Creating AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME Realistic Sound Fields” on pages 20 and 24.VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL AUX TUNER PRESET Selecting an Appropriate Progressive Mode DOWN UP REW FF You can select an appropriate progressive mode according to the VCR CHANNEL TUNING picture type (film or video source). B.SEARCH F.SEARCH From the remote control ONLY: Press PROGRESSIVE repeatedly during playback PROGRESSIVEENTER
until the progressive mode you want appears. • Each time you press the button, the progressive mode changes as follows:VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING VIDEO MODE FILM MODESOUND
123AUTO MODESETTING
456PRO LOGIC VIDEO MODE : Suitable for playing back a video source disc.PRO LOGIC789FILM MODE : Suitable for playing back a film or progressive SLOW SETUP TEST 0 source disc. ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE AUTO MODE : Normally select this. Used to play a disc REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM containing both video and film source CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP SLEEP materials. This system recognizes the picture type (film or video source) of the current chapter.Enjoying Sounds from the External • If the playback picture is unclear or noisy, or the oblique lines of Component the picture are rough, try to change to other modes.
You can enjoy sounds from the external component connected to the Notes: AUX IN jacks on the rear panel of the center unit. • This mode is available only when progressive scanning mode is selected (see page 17). 1 • For VCD/SVCD playback, VIDEO MODE is selected automatically Select AUX as the source. and cannot be changed. From the remote control: Press AUX. AUX Turning Off the Power with the Timer Source changes to the external component connected to the AUX IN jacks. You can fall asleep while listening to music—Sleep Timer. On the front panel: From the remote control ONLY: Press SOURCE repeatedly until “AUX IN” Press SLEEP.SOURCE SLEEP appears on the display. • Each time you press the button, the shut-off time • Each time you press the button, the source changes as follows: changes as follows:DVD player* AUX IN 10 20 30 60 AM FM OFF 150 120 90
(Canceled) * “WAIT” appears on the display. When the shut-off time comes, the system turns off automatically. 2 Start playback on the external component. • For in-depth information about the external equipment, see the manual supplied for it. To check or change the time remaining until the shut-off time When you listen to analog sounds encoded with Dolby Press SLEEP once. Surround, you can enjoy Dolby Surround. SLEEPThe remaining time (in minutes) appears on the display. To activate Dolby Surround, go to step 3. • By pressing SLEEP, you can change the shut-off time. 3 Press PRO LOGIC to activate Dolby PRO LOGICSurround. To cancel the Sleep Timer
• Each time you press the button, Dolby Surround Press SLEEP repeatedly until “OFF” appears on the mode changes as follows: SLEEPdisplay.PRO LOGIC 3 STEREO • Turning off the power also cancels the Sleep Timer. STEREO
(canceled) EN11-19TH-A30[U].pm6 16 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,TV Settings Changing the Color System Notes
• Progressive scanning mode is available only when color system of NTSC is selected. This system is compatible with the PAL and NTSC systems. Select • Some progressive TVs and High-Definition TVs are not fully the color sytem to match the color system of your TV. Make sure compatible with this system, resulting in the unnatural picture when that the color system of a DVD, Video CD, or SVCD disc labeled on playing back a DVD in the progressive scanning mode. the package matches your TV. In such a case, change the scanning mode to “I–SCAN MODE.” • You can change the color system only when the unit is on To check the compatibility of your TV, contact your local JVC standby. customer service center. • All JVC progressive TVs and High-Definition TVs are fully compatible with this system. On the front panel ONLY: 1 Press and hold ¢ for a while. • During holding the button, the color system To select an appropriate progressive mode for playback pictures, see alternates between “NTSC” and “PAL.” “Selecting an Appropriate Progressive Mode” on page 16. 2 Release ¢ to select the color system you want. About scanning system The conventional scanning method to display video signals on the TV screen is called “Interlaced scanning.” With this method,Changing the Scanning Mode only half of the horizontal lines (called a “field”) are displayed at
a time. So two fields complete a single picture (frame); i.e., the This system supports the progressive scanning system (525p*) as first field, containing all the odd-numbered lines, is followed by well as the conventional interlaced scanning system (525i*). the second field, containing all the even-numbered lines. If your TV equipped with component video jacks supports the On the other hand, the Progressive scanning system scans all progressive video input, you can enjoy a high quality picture by horizontal lines at a time, so you can double the number of activating the progressive scanning mode. scanning lines displayed at a time, resulting in a flicker-free, • Refer also to the instruction manuals supplied with your TV. high-density picture. • If your TV equipped with component video jacks does not support To enjoy the progressive scanned picture, a monitor (or TV or the progressive video input, do not change the scanning mode to projector) connected to the system must support the progressive the progressive scanning mode (P–SCAN MODE.) video inputs. Depending on the material source format, DVD video can be * 525p and 525i indicate the number of scanning lines and scanning classified into two types; film source and video source (note that format of a video signal. some DVD video contain both film source and video source). • 525p indicates 525 scanning lines with progressive format. Film sources are recorded as 24-frame-per-second data, while • 525i indicates 525 scanning lines with interlaced format. (NTSC) video sources are recorded as 30-frame-per-second (60- field-per-second interlaced). From the remote control ONLY: When this system plays back a film source data, uninterlaced progressive output signals are created using the original data. 1 Press DVD. When a video source is played back, the unit interleaves linesDVD between the interlaced lines to create the pseudo uninterlaced You can change the scanning mode only when DVD is selected as the source and playback stops. picture and outputs as the progressive signals. If a disc is no loaded, go to step 3. 2 Press . TUNER PRESET7 Playback stops. 3 Press and hold PROGRESSIVE for a PROGRESSIVE while. • Each time you press and hold the button, the scanning mode alternates between “I–SCAN MODE” and “P–SCAN MODE”. I (Interlace)–SCAN MODE : Select this if your TV equipped with component video jacks does not support the progressive video input (conventional TV). P (Progressive)–SCAN MODE : Select this if your TV equipped with component video jacks supports the progressive video input. EN11-19TH-A30[U].pm6 17 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,Speaker Settings Setting the Delay Time
Adjust the delay time of the sounds from the center speaker and the STANDBY/ON AUDIO rear speakers, comparing to that of the sounds from the front speakers. If the distance to the center speaker* and/or the rear TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE speakers** from your listening point is almost the same as from the DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL front speakers, select “00 MS (msec).” * You can adjust the delay time only when the DOLBY DIGITAL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME or DTS indicator is lit on the display.VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL ** You can adjust the delay time only when the DOLBY DIGITAL, DTS, or PRO LOGIC indicator is lit on the display. TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF VCR CHANNEL TUNING For Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround: B.SEARCH F.SEARCH Before you start, remember... 2 3 There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is ENTER canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again. 1 Select and play a DVD encoded with Dolby VOLUME Digital or DTS Digital Surround. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGSOUND
123SETTING 2 Press SETTING repeatedly until one of SETTINGSETTING
456delay time indications (with the current PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC789setting*) appears on the display. SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP • Each time you press the button, the indication in the main display changes as follows:C–DLY R–DLY Normal indication
(canceled) C–DLY (Center delay) : To register delay time for center speaker—from 0 msec to 5 msec R–DLY (Rear delay) : To register delay time for rear speakers—from 0 msec to 15 msec * The initial setting for the center speaker is “00 MS.” The initial setting for the rear speakers is “00 MS.” If you have already changed the setting, a different value will be shown. 3 Press 3 or 2 to adjust delay time. • 3 : Increases delay time. • 2 : Decreases delay time. ENTER • 1 msec increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to 30 cm increase (or decrease) in distance. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other delay time. EN11-19TH-A30[U].pm6 18 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,Speaker Settings
For Dolby Pro Logic: Left front Center speaker Right front Before you start, remember... speaker speaker There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is Subwoofer canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again. 1 Press AUX to select the external AUX 3.0 m component as the source. 2.7 m 2.4m2Start playing a source encoded with Dolby 2.1 mSurround.
3 Press PRO LOGIC repeatedly on the PRO LOGIC remote control to select Dolby Pro Left rear Right rearspeaker speakerLogic.
4 Press SETTING repeatedly until one of SETTING delay time indications (with the current 1 msec increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to setting*) appears on the display. 30 cm increase (or decrease) in distance. Ex. : In this case, set C–DLY to “01 MS” and R–DLY to “03 MS” • Each time you press the button, the indication in the main display changes as follows: R–DLY Normal indication(canceled) R–DLY (Rear delay) : To register delay time for rear speakers—from 15 msec to 30 msec. * The initial setting for the rear speakers is “15 MS.” If you have already changed the setting, a different value will be shown. 5 Press 3 or 2 to adjust delay time. • 3 : Increases delay time. • 2 : Decreases delay time. ENTER • 1 msec increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to 30 cm increase (or decrease) in distance. EN11-19TH-A30[U].pm6 19 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,Creating Realistic Sound Fields
You can use the following surround to reproduce a realistic sound Dolby Pro Logic and Dolby 3 Stereo field. Dolby Surround encoding format records the left front channel, • Digital Multichannel Surround—Dolby Digital and DTS Digital right front channel, center channel, and rear channel signals (total 4 Surround channels) into 2 channels. • Dolby Surround The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built in this system decodes these 2 • DSP (Digital Signal Processor) modes channel signals into original 4 channel signals—matrix-based multichannel reproduction, and allows you to enjoy a realistic stereo sound in your listening room. Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround To enjoy surround effectively, all the speakers need to be When one of Dolby Surround is selected, the PRO LOGIC indicator connected and activated. lights up on the display. Dolby Digital* Used to reproduce multichannel sound tracks of the software Indications on the display for each surround encoded with Dolby Digital ( ). • Dolby Digital Dolby Digital encoding method (so-called discrete 5.1 channel digital audio format) records and digitally compresses the left front channel, right front channel, center channel, left rear channel, right rear channel, and LFE channel signals (total 6 channels, but LFE channel is counted as 0.1 channel. Therefore, called 5.1 channel). Since each channel is completely independent from the other • DTS Digital Surround channel signals to avoid interference, you can obtain much better sound quality with much stereo and surround effects. In addition, Dolby Digital enables stereo rear sounds, and sets the cutoff frequency of the rear treble at 20 kHz, compared to 7 kHz for Dolby Pro Logic. These facts enhance the sound movement and being-there feelings much more than Dolby Pro Logic. • Dolby Pro Logic When the system detects Dolby Digital signals, the DOLBY DIGITAL indicator lights up on the display. DTS Digital Surround** • Dolby 3 Stereo Used to reproduce multichannel sound tracks of the software encoded with DTS Digital Surround ( ). DTS Digital Surround is another discrete 5.1 channel digital audio format available on CD, LD, and DVD software. Compared to Dolby Digital, audio compression rate is relatively low. • DSP* This fact allows DTS Digital Surround format to add breadth and depth to the reproduced sounds. As a result, DTS Digital Surround features natural, solid and clear sound. When the system detects DTS Digital Surround signals, the DTS indicator lights up on the display. * When you select FM/AM or AUX as the source, the Linear PCM indicator ( ) does not light up. — According to the speaker settings, some audio channel indicators do not light up. In this case, set the speaker setting appropriately. Dolby Surround* Used to reproduce sound tracks of the VCR tapes encoded with Dolby Surround ( DOLBY SURROUND ). This is only used for the sound sources coming through the AUX IN jacks. * Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro **Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Logic,” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992–1997 Dolby pending. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of Laboratories. All rights reserved. Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ©1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. EN20-26TH-A30[U].pm6 20 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,Creating Realistic Sound Fields
DSP (Digital Signal Processor) Modes To check the speaker connections and settings using the test DSP modes have been designed to create important acoustic tone surround elements. 1. Select and play a DVD encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS The sound heard in a theater, a hall, a live club, or a dance club Digital Surround. consists of direct sound and indirect sound—early reflections and 2. Press TEST on the remote control. TEST reflections from behind. Direct sounds reach the listener directly The test tone comes out from the speakers (except without any reflection. On the other hand, indirect sounds are the subwoofer) in the order. delayed by the distances of the ceiling and walls. • If there is a speaker from which no sounds comes out, check These indirect sounds are important elements of the acoustic the speaker’s connection (see pages 7 and 8). surround effects. 3. Press TEST again to stop the test tone. The following DSP modes are provided with this unit. THEATER : Gives the feeling of a theater. HALL : Gives clear vocal and the feeling of a concert hall. LIVE CLUB : Gives the feeling of a live music club with a low ceiling. DANCE CLUB : Gives a throbbing bass beat. These DSP modes can be used to add the acoustic surround effects while reproducing stereo analog software or Linear PCM digital software, and can give you a real “being there” feeling. When one of the DSP modes is selected, the DSP indicator lights up on the display. Available surround according to the input signal format : Possible : Impossible Multichannel Pro Logic* DSP (canceled)Surround Surround Pro Logic 3 Stereo THEATER HALL LIVE CLUB DANCE CLUB STEREO Analog Linear PCM Dolby Digital Multichannel Dolby Surround DTS Digital Surround * You can use Pro Logic mode for all 2 channel sources, but surround effect does not work sufficiently except Dolby Surround encoded source. EN20-26TH-A30[U].pm6 21 02.7.31, 11:11 AM Input Signal format, 3 To adjust the output balance for the front speakers REW FF VCR CHANNEL TUNING 1) Press SOUND repeatedly until the SOUND B.SEARCH F.SEARCH adjustment indication for the front speakers appears on the display.2 3 ENTER • Each time you press the button, the adjustment indication on the display changes as follows: 00 F 00 00 R 00 CENVOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING Normal indication SW REAR SOUND SOUND (canceled) 123SETTING
456PRO LOGIC 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust thePRO LOGIC789output balance. SLOW SETUP TEST DSP MODE 3 : Decreases the left speakerANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE output, or restores the right ENTER REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM speaker output. CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP 2 : Decreases the right speaker output, or restores the left speaker output. • The output balance changes from OFF (silence), –06 (most reduction) to 00 (no reduction). • “00 F 00” is the initial setting (the output balance is at theAdjusting Stereo Sound center position). If you have already changed the setting,
another value will appear. You can adjust the following settings. It is recommended that you make adjustments from your actual 4 To adjust the output level for the subwoofer listening point while listening to reproduced sounds. 1) Press SOUND repeatedly to select SOUND – Output balance for the front speakers “SW.” – Output level for the subwoofer • Each time you press the button, the adjustment Once you adjust these items, the adjustments take effect for all the indication on the display changes as follows: surround modes. 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN Before you start, remember... Normal indication SW REAR • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is (canceled) canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again. 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the 1 Select and play any source except Dolby Digital output level. or DTS Digital Surround. 3 : Increases the output level. 2 : Decreases the output level. 2 • The output level changes from ENTERCancel Dolby Surround or DSP modes if they are –6 to +6. activated. • “SW 0dB” is the initial setting. If For deactivating Dolby Surround: PRO LOGIC you have already changed the Press PRO LOGIC on the remote control until settings, another value will appear. “STEREO” appears on the display. For deactivating DSP modes: DSP MODE Press DSP MODE (or DSP on the front panel) until the DSP indicator goes off from the display. Now, you are ready to start adjustments. • To adjust the output balance for the front speakers, go to the next step. • To adjust the output level for the subwoofer, go to step 4. EN20-26TH-A30[U].pm6 22 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,Creating Realistic Sound Fields
• Each time you press the button, the adjustment indicationVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL AUX on the display changes as follows: TUNER PRESET 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN DOWN UP REW FF VCR CHANNEL Normal indication TUNING SW REAR (canceled) B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 00 F (Front) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the front23ENTER speakers. 00 R (Rear) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the rear speakers.VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING • “00 F 00” and “00 R 00” are the initial setting (the output balances are at the center position). If you have already SOUND SOUND changed the setting, another value will appear. 123SETTING
456PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the789output balance. SLOW SETUP TEST D.R.C DSP MODE 3 : Decreases the left speakerANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE output, or restores the right ENTER REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM speaker output. CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP 2 : Decreases the right speaker output, or restores the left speaker output. • Each output balance changes fromAdjusting Dolby Digital and OFF (silence), –06 (most reduction) to 00 (no reduction). DTS Digital Surround
3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the other speaker. You can adjust the following settings while activating Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround. 3 To adjust the output levels for the center speaker, It is recommended that you make adjustments from your actual the rear speakers, and the subwoofer listening point while listening to reproduced sounds. 1) Press SOUND repeatedly to select the – Output balance for the front speakers “CEN,” “REAR,” or “SW.” SOUND – Output balance for the rear speakers • Each time you press the button, the adjustment – Output level for the center speaker* indication on the display changes as follows: – Output level for the rear speakers* – Output level for the subwoofer* 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN * The adjustment is separately memorized for Digital Multichannel Surround (Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround), and for Normal indication SW REAR (canceled) Dolby Pro Logic. Before you start, remember... CEN (Center) : To adjust the output level for center • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is speaker (from –6 dB to +6 dB). canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again. REAR : To adjust the output level for rear speakers (from –6 dB to +6 dB). 1 Select and play a DVD encoded with Dolby SW (Subwoofer) : To adjust the output level for subwooferDigital or DTS Digital Surround. (from –6 dB to +6 dB).
Now, you are ready to start adjustments. • “CEN 0dB,” “REAR 0dB,” and “SW 0dB” are the initial • To adjust the output balance for the front speakers and the rear settings. If you have already changed the settings, another speakers, go to the next step. value will appear. • To adjust the output level for the center speaker, the rear speakers, and the subwoofer, go to step 3. 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the output level. 2 3 : Increases the output level.To adjust the output balance for the front ENTER2 : Decreases the output level. speakers and the rear speakers 1) Press SOUND repeatedly until one of SOUND 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the following adjustment indications the other speakers. appears on the display. EN20-26TH-A30[U].pm6 23 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,Activating Dynamic Range Compression 4 To adjust the output balance for the front
speakers and the rear speakers You can enjoy a powerful sound even at a low volume level by 1) Press SOUND repeatedly until one of SOUND compressing the dynamic range (difference between the maximum the following adjustment indications and minimum sounds). appears on the display. • This function takes effect only when Dolby Digital is activated. • Each time you press the button, the adjustment indication From the remote control ONLY: on the display changes as follows: Press D.R.C. D.R.C 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN • Each time you press the button, the dynamic range compression mode alternates between on and off. Normal indication SW REAR Select “DRC ON” while watching the DVD at night. (You can (canceled) obtain a powerful sound at a low volume.) 00 F (Front) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the front speakers. 00 R (Rear) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the rearAdjusting Dolby Surround speakers.
You can adjust the following settings while activating Dolby • When selecting “3 STEREO,” you cannot adjust the output Surround. balance for the rear speakers. It is recommended that you make adjustments from your actual • “00 F 00” and “00 R 00” are the initial settings (the output listening point while listening to reproduced sounds. balances are at the center position). If you have already – Output balance for the front speakers changed the setting, another value will appear. – Output balance for the rear speakers – Output level for the center speaker* 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the – Output level for the rear speakers* output balance. – Output level for the subwoofer* 3 : Decreases the left speaker • When Dolby 3 Stereo is activated, you cannot adjust the rear output, or restores the right ENTER speakers. speaker output. * The adjustment is separately memorized for Digital Multichannel 2 : Decreases the right speaker Surround (Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround), and for output, or restores the left Dolby Pro Logic. speaker output. • Dolby Surround cannot be used with DSP modes. Once one of • Each output balance changes from Dolby Surround is activated, DSP modes in use will be canceled. OFF (silence), –06 (most reduction) to 00 (no reduction). Before you start, remember... • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the other speakers. canceled before you finish, start from step 3 again. 1 Press AUX to select the external AUX component as the source. 2 Start playing a source encoded with DolbySurround.
3 Press PRO LOGIC repeatedly on the PRO LOGIC remote control to select Dolby ProLogic or Dolby 3 Stereo.
The PRO LOGIC indicator lights up on the display. • Each time you press the button, the indication changes as follows: PRO LOGIC 3 STEREOSTEREO
(canceled) Now, you are ready to start adjustments. • To adjust the output balance for the front speakers and the rear speakers, go to the next step. • To adjust the output level for the center speaker, the rear speakers, and the subwoofer, go to step 5 on the next page. TO BE CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE EN20-26TH-A30[U].pm6 24 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,Creating Realistic Sound Fields Adjusting DSP Modes
REW FF VCR CHANNEL You can adjust the following settings while activating DSP modes.TUNING
It is recommended that you make adjustments from your actual B.SEARCH F.SEARCH listening point while listening to reproduced sounds. 2 3 – Output balance for the front speakers ENTER – Output balance for the rear speakers – Output level for the rear speakers* – Output level for the subwoofer*VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING * The adjustment is separately memorized for DSP modes. • DSP modes cannot be used with Dolby Surround. Once one of SOUND SOUND123DSP modes is activated, Dolby Surround in use will be canceled. SETTING • When you play back a DVD encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS456PRO LOGIC Digital Surround, DSP MODE button (or DSP button on the center789SLOW SETUP TEST unit) does not work. 0 DSP MODE ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE Before you start, remember... REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again. 1 Select and play any source except Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround. 5 To adjust the output level for the center speaker, 2 Press DSP MODE (or DSP on the front DSP MODE the rear speakers, and the subwoofer panel) repeatedly to select the desired 1) Press SOUND repeatedly to select the SOUND DSP mode. “CEN,” “REAR,” or “SW.” The DSP indicator lights up on the display while the DSP modes • Each time you press the button, the adjustment are activated. indication on the display changes as follows: • Each time you press the button, DSP mode changes as follows: THEATER HALL LIVE CLUB 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN Normal Normal indication indication DANCE CLUBSW REAR (canceled) (canceled) Now, you are ready to start the adjustment. • To adjust the output balance for the front speakers and the rear CEN (Center) : To adjust the output level for center speakers, go to the next step. speaker (from –6 dB to +6 dB). • To adjust the output level for the rear speakers and the subwoofer, REAR : To adjust the output level for rear go to step 4 on the next page. speakers (from –6 dB to +6 dB). SW (Subwoofer) : To adjust the output level for subwoofer (from –6 dB to +6 dB). • When selecting “3 STEREO,” you cannot adjust the output levels for the rear speakers. • “CEN 0dB,” “REAR 0dB,” and “SW 0dB” are the initial settings. If you have already changed the settings, another value will appear. 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the output level. 3 : Increases the output level. ENTER 2 : Decreases the output level. 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the other speakers. EN20-26TH-A30[U].pm6 25 02.7.31, 11:11 AM, 3 To adjust the output balance for the front 4 To adjust the output level for the rear speakers speakers and the rear speakers and the subwoofer 1) Press SOUND repeatedly until one of 1) Press SOUND repeatedly to select the SOUNDSOUND
the following adjustment indications “REAR” or “SW.” appears on the display. • Each time you press the button, the adjustment • Each time you press the button, the adjustment indication on the display changes as follows: indication on the display changes as follows: 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN Normal indication SW REAR Normal indication (canceled)SW REAR (canceled) 00 F (Front) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the front REAR : To adjust the output level for rear speakers. speakers (from –6 dB to +6 dB). 00 R (Rear) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the rear SW (Subwoofer) : To adjust the output level for subwoofer speakers. (from –6 dB to +6 dB). • “00 F 00” and “00 R 00” are the initial setting (the output • “REAR 0dB” and “SW 0dB” are the initial settings. If balances are at the center position). If you have already you have already changed the settings, another value will changed the setting, another value will appear. appear. 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the output balance. 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the 3 : Decreases the left speaker output level. output, or restores the right 3 : Increases the output level.ENTER ENTER speaker output. 2 : Decreases the output level. 2 : Decreases the right speaker output, or restores the left speaker output. 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting • Each output balance changes from the other speaker. OFF (silence), –06 (most reduction) to 00 (no reduction). 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the other speaker. EN20-26TH-A30[U].pm6 26 02.7.31, 11:11 AM,Disc Introduction—DVD/VCD/CD
This system has been designed to play back the following discs: DVD, IMPORTANT: Video CD, Super Video CD (SVCD), Audio CD, CD-R, and CD-RW. Before performing any operations, make sure of the following... • This system can also play back MP3 files recorded on CD-Rs and • Check the connection with the TV. CD-RWs. For in-depth information about what MP3, see “MP3 • Turn on the TV and select the correct input on the TV to view the Introduction” on page 43. pictures or on-screen indications on the TV screen. • For DVD playback, you can change the Setup menu setting to Discs you can play: your preference. (See pages 49 to 53.) Disc Mark Video Region Code If “ ” appears on the TV screen when pressing a button, Type (Logo) Format Number* the disc cannot accept an operation you have tried to do, or information required for that operation is not recorded in the disc. NOTICE : In some cases, without showing “ ,” operations DVD 3 will not be accepted. Video ALL Disc structure—DVD, Video CD (VCD/SVCD) and Audio CD (CD) A DVD disc consists of Titles, and each title may be divided into Video some Chapters. (See Example 1.) CD NTSC For example, if a DVD disc contains some movies, each movie may PAL have its own title number, and it may be further divided into some chapters. Super On the other hand, a VCD/SVCD or CD consists of Tracks. (See Video Example 2.) CD In general, each song has its own track number. (On some discs, each track may also be divided by Indexes.) When playing back a VCD/SVCD with Playback Control (PBC) Audio COMPACT function, you can select what to view using the menu shown on the CD DIGITAL AUDIO TV screen. (While operating a Video CD using the menu, some of the functions such as Repeat and Track Search may not work.) CD-R Example 1: DVD disc CD-RW • On some DVD or VCD/SVCD discs, their actual operations may be different from what is explained in this manual. This is due to the disc programming and disc structure, but not a malfunction of this system. • DVD-R discs recorded with the DVD VIDEO format can be Example 2 : Video CD/Audio CD played back. However, some discs may not be played back because of the disc characteristics or recording conditions. Note that unfinalized disc cannot be played back. • The following discs cannot be played back: – DVD-Audio, DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, CD-ROM, CD-I, (CD-I Ready), Photo CD, etc. Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the speakers. Notes on CD-R and CD-RW * Note on Region Code User-edited CD-Rs (Recordable) and CD-RWs (Rewritable) can be DVD players and DVD Video discs have their own Region Code played back only if they are already “finalized.” numbers. This system can play back DVD discs recorded with the • The system can play back CD-Rs or CD-RWs recorded on a color system of NTSC and PAL whose Region Code numbers personal computer if they have been recorded in the audio CD include “3.” format or recorded in MP3 format (see page 43). Examples: However, they may not be played back depending on their characteristics or recording conditions. • Before playing back CD-Rs or CD-RWs, read their instructions or cautions carefully. • Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this unit If a DVD with the inadequate Region Code numbers is loaded, because of their disc characteristics, damage or stain on them, or if “REGION ERR” appears on the display and playback cannot start. the built-in lens is dirty. • CD-RWs may require a longer readout time. This is caused by the fact that the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than for regular CDs. EN27-36TH-A30[U].pm6 27 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Basic Disc Operations To stop playback for a moment TUNER PRESET
Press 3/8. STANDBY/ON While pausing, the elapsed playing time flashes AUDIO on the display. • To resume play, press 3/8 again. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL To go to another chapter or track AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME Press ¢ or 4 repeatedly during playback. VCR • ¢ : Skips to the beginning of the next or succeeding chapter or DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL track. TUNER PRESET 4 ¢ • 4 : While a DVD, a VCD with PBC or MP3 is played backDOWN UP Goes back to the beginning of the previous chapter or track. REW FF 7 VCR CHANNEL TUNING 3/8 While a CD or a VCD without PBC is played back B.SEARCH F.SEARCH Goes back to the beginning of the current or previous track. ENTER To go to another title (only possible on a DVD) or track (only possible on a CD and VCD) SVCD can be operated by using the VCD operation directly using the number buttons procedure. Pressing the number buttons before or during play allows you to start playing the title/track number you want. (If your TV is turned on, the on-screen bar is pulled down automatically on the TV screen.)To start playback • To select number 1 to 9, press the corresponding number button
TUNER PRESET Press 3/8. (then press ENTER or wait for 5 seconds). The source is automatically changed to the • To select number 15, press 1, 5. DVD player. • To select number 23, press 2, 3. “WAIT” appears on the display for a while, then the detected disc type appears—DVD, VCD, CD, or MP3. (If To stop during playback your TV is turned on, the mark corresponding to the detected disc Press 7. TUNER PRESET type appears on the TV screen.) (If your TV is turned on, “ STOP” appears • When a disc is not loaded, “NO DISC” appears on the display. on the TV screen.) • When an MP3 disc is played back, playback Disc play starts from the first chapter or track of the selected disc. stops completely. • If a menu appears while playing a DVD or VCD with PBC • This system can memorize the end point even when you press 7. function, see “Disc Menu-Driven Playback” (for DVD) on page 31 When you start playback again by pressing 3/8, playback begins or “Disc Menu-Driven Playback (Only for VCD)” on page 38. from where it has been stopped—Resume play. • To stop completely, press 7 twice. (“7 STOP” appears on the TV Note: screen.) The disc type appears on the display. If “WRONG PARENTAL LEVEL” appears on the TV screen, Parental The DVD player goes on working for 3 minutes after playback Lock is in use. You cannot play back a DVD containing violent scenes stops. or those not suitable for your family members. To play back such a disc, cancel the Parental Lock. (See page 52.) To remove the disc Press 0 on the front panel.Playback information on the display The disc tray comes out.
To close the disc tray, press 0 again. DVD • If you do not press the button, the disc tray closes automatically 3 minutes after. Title No. Chapter No. Elapsed playing time VCD/CD Track No. Elapsed playing time MP3 Track No. Elapsed playing time EN27-36TH-A30[U].pm6 28 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,DVD Playback Showing the On-Screen Bar
You can show the following information on the TV screen while a STANDBY/ON disc is loaded.AUDIO
TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE From the remote control ONLY: DISPLAY DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL Press DISPLAY. DISPLAY AUDIO/ SUBTITLE • Each time you press the button, the following on-FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME AUDIO/ screen bar appears in sequence. FM MODE VCR DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP1234REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH56789ENTER On-screen bar goes off. VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING SOUND 1 : Disc type123SETTING DVD VCD SVCD CD MP3456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST 2 : Current title and total number of the titles on the ANGLE ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE disc REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM • Ex.: 1st title is playing out of 3 titles recorded. CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP 3 : Current chapter and total number of the chapters in the current title • Ex.: 1st chapter is playing out of 5 chapters recorded. 4 : Elapsed playing time or remaining time You can change the play time indication by pressing REMAIN. See page 31 for more details. Some DVDs contain several audio languages, subtitles, and multi- angle views. 5 : Subtitle language indication When you find the following marks on the DVD or its package, you • Ex.: When no subtitle is recorded on the disc. can select these elements recorded on the DVD. See page 30 for more details. 6 : Audio language indication • Ex.: Original sound (default) is selected out of 3 audio Subtitles are recorded on the disc. The number languages recorded. See page 30 for more details. 3 inside the mark indicates the total number of the recorded subtitles. 7 : Signal format indicator • Signal format type—Linear PCM (stereo), Dolby Digital, Several audio languages are recorded on the disc. 3 and DTS Digital Surround—will be indicated.The number inside the mark indicates the total Ex.: When the disc is encoded with Dolby Digital. number of the recorded audio languages. Multi-angle views are recorded on the disc. The 8 : Repeat mode indicator number inside the mark indicates the total number • Ex.: When repeat mode is turned off.3 of the recorded multi-angle views. See page 33 for more details. 9 : Multi-angle view indicator If you cannot find out whether your disc contains these features • Ex.: When only a single angle-view is recorded on the listed above, you can check it by showing the on-screen bar. disc. See page 30 for more details. For basic disc operations such as inserting a disc, starting playback, and moving to another chapters, see “Basic DVD Operations” on pages 11, 12, and “Basic Disc Operations” on page 28. EN27-36TH-A30[U].pm6 29 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Selecting the Subtitles Selecting the Multi-Angle Views
While playing back a DVD containing subtitles in different While playing back a DVD containing multi-angle views, you can languages, you can select the subtitle to be displayed on the TV view the same scene at different angles. screen. • When you play back the DVD containing multi-angle views, • You can set your favorite subtitle language as the initial language appears on the TV screen. shown on the screen. (See page 49.) From the remote control ONLY: From the remote control ONLY: Press ANGLE. ANGLESUBTITLE Press SUBTITLE. • Each time you press the button, the view angle changes. The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen for a while. • Each time you press the button, the subtitle language changes as follows: ANGLE 1 ANGLE 2 OFF /3 DEF 1/3 1/1 OFF /3 ENG 1/3 ANGLE 3 SPA 3/3 FRE 2/3 Ex.: When the disc has 3 selections—English, French, Spanish and no subtitle (OFF) Ex.: When the disc has 3 multi-angle views Note: When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Multi angle view indication also changes as follows:Selecting the Audio Languages 1/3 2/3
While playing back a DVD containing audio languages (sound track), you can select the language (sound track) to listen to. 3/3 • You can set your favorite audio language as the initial audio language. (See page 49.) Press AUDIO/FM MODE. AUDIO/FM MODE The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen for a while. • Each time you press the button, the audio language changes as follows: ENG 1/3 ENG 1/3 1/1 ENG 1/3 FRE 2/3 SPA 3/3 Ex.: When the disc has 3 selections—English, French, and Spanish EN27-36TH-A30[U].pm6 30 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,DVD Playback Disc Menu-Driven Playback
STANDBY/ON Disc menu-driven playback is possible while playing back a DVD AUDIO with menu (menu may be still pictures or moving pictures depending on the disc). TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE • When operating a disc using the disc menu, refer also to the DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL instructions supplied for the disc. AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME DVD discs generally have their own menus or title lists. A menuVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL usually contains various information about the disc and playback selections. On the other hand, a title list usually contains titles of TUNER PRESET DOWN UP movies and songs recorded. REW FF 1 VCR CHANNELTUNING ¡ From the remote control ONLY: B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 3/2/5/∞ 1 Press MENU or TOP ENTER MENU. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING ENTER A menu or title list will appear on the screen. “MENU” appears on the display. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING VOLUME • On some DVDs, a menu will TOP MENU TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING MENU automatically appear on the screen after playback starts. Number SOUND123buttons SETTING456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST 2 Select a desired item on the ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE menu or on the title list, using REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM 3/2/5/∞ and ENTER. CLEAR CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP REMAIN The unit starts playback of the selected ENTER item. SEARCH • On some discs, you can also select items by pressing the number buttons corresponding to the item numbers listed.Checking the Remaining Time
While playing back a DVD, you can check the remaining time to be played back. From the remote control ONLY: Press REMAIN. REMAIN The on-screen bar and the current play time indication appear on the TV screen for a while. • Each time you press the button, the following indication appears on the screen: REMAIN TIME:TITLE CHAPTER TIME TITLE TIME REMAIN TIME:CHAPTER REMAIN TIME:TITLE : Select this to show the remaining time of the current title. CHAPTER TIME : Select this to show the elapsed playing time of the current chapter. REMAIN TIME:CHAPTER : Select this to show the remaining time of the current chapter. TITLE TIME : Select this to show the elapsed playing time of the current title. EN27-36TH-A30[U].pm6 31 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Moving to a Particular Portion Directly Searching for a Particular Point
You can move to another title, chapter, or particular scene in the You can search for a particular point while playing a disc—Variable chapter directly. Speed Forward/Reverse Search. • No sound comes out during Variable Speed Forward/Reverse From the remote control ONLY: Search. 1 Press SEARCH during playback or pause. SEARCH To fast-forward the chapter—Variable Speed • Each time you press the button, the following indication appears on the screen: Forward Search From the remote control ONLY: TITLE – – CHAPTER – – – Press ¡ during playback or pause. • Each time you press the button, the search speed F.SEARCH Canceled TIME – – : – – : – – changes as follows: TITLE – – : Select this to move to another title. x2 x4 CHAPTER – – – : Select this to move to another chapter. TIME – – : – – : – – : Select this to move to a particular scene. PLAY (Normal play) x8 2 Press the number buttons to123To reverse the chapter—Variable Speed Reverse select a desired title, chapter, Search456or playing time. From the remote control ONLY: The unit starts playback of the selected789Press 1 during playback or pause. item. (The on-screen bar appears for a • Each time you press the button, the search speed B.SEARCH while.) 0 changes as follows: x2 x4 PLAY (Back play) x8 How to input the title and chapter number TUNER PRESET Press the number buttons corresponding to the number, then wait To resume normal play for about 5 seconds or press ENTER to start playback. Press 3/8. • To select number 5, press 5, then ENTER. • To select number 12, press 1, 2, then ENTER. • To select number 22, press 2, 2, then ENTER. How to input the playing time Press the number buttons to input the playing time, then wait for about 5 seconds or press ENTER to start playback at the selected elapsed playing time. • To input time “00:45:23,” press 4, 5, 2, 3. • To input time “01:23:45,” press 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. • To cancel a mis-entry, press CLEAR. Each time you press the button, the last entry will be erased. Note: When you want to move to another title directly, you can move to it by simply pressing the corresponding number buttons (without pressing SEARCH in step 1). EN27-36TH-A30[U].pm6 32 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,DVD Playback
7 A–B Repeat STANDBY/ON While playing, you can also select a portion you want to repeat. AUDIO • A–B repeat is not performed between different titles. • An interval of more than 5 seconds is required between point A TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE and point B. DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME Example:VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET 7 DOWN UP 3/8 REPEAT:A– REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH23REPEAT:A–BENTER ENTER
From the remote control ONLY: VOLUME 1 Press A–B REPEAT to select the start A-B REPEAT TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING point. “RPT A–” appears on the display and “REPEAT:A–”SOUND
123appears on the TV screen.SETTING
456PRO LOGIC 2 Press A–B REPEAT again to select the A-B REPEAT789SLOW SETUP TEST 0 end point. ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE “RPT A–” changes to “RPT A–B” and REPEAT REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM PROGRAM “REPEAT:A–” changes to “REPEAT:A–B,” CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP A-B REPEAT then A–B repeat begins. The unit automatically locates point A and starts repeated playback between points A and B.To cancel A–B Repeat Repeating Playback Press A–B REPEAT again. A-B REPEAT
“RPT OFF” appears on the display and “REPEAT OFF” Repeat play cannot be used in the following cases: appears on the TV screen. • When you enjoy program play 7 Repeat Play Note: From the remote control ONLY: When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Repeat mode Press REPEAT repeatedly. REPEAT indication also changes as follows: The indication corresponding to the selected mode appears on your TV. • Each time you press the button, Repeat mode changes as follows: REPEAT:CHAPTER REPEAT:TITLE On some DVDs, A–B Repeat may not be used even within the same title. This is due to their disc structures, and not a REPEAT OFF malfunction of the unit. REPEAT:CHAPTER : Current chapter will be repeated. REPEAT:TITLE : Current title will be repeated. REPEAT OFF : Repeat play is canceled. (Normal play is resumed.) Note: When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Repeat mode indication also changes as follows: REPEAT:CHAPTER REPEAT:TITLE REPEAT OFF EN27-36TH-A30[U].pm6 33 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Programming the Playing Order of the Chapters—Program Play 5 Press 3 or 2 to select a chapter number, then ENTER. You can arrange the chapter playback order before you start playing. • 3 : Increases the number. You can program up to 20 steps. • 2 : Decreases the number.
• Before making a program, make sure that the TV is turned on • You can also select a chapter number using the number buttons. and the correct input is selected on the TV. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTERFrom the remote control ONLY: TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPT
1 Load a disc. 1286– – – – 2 – – – – 7 – – – – • If the current playing source is not the DVD player, press 3 – – – – 8 – – – – 4 – – – – 9 – – – – 3/8, then 7 before going to the next step. 5 – – – – 10 – – – – PREVIOUS NEXT 2 Press PROGRAM. PROGRAM PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMThe PROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV
screen. • To select all chapters in the selected title as one program • “PROGRAM” appears on the display. step, simply press ENTER without selecting any number. “ALL” appears on the chapter number position. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER 6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 to program other chapters TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPT you want. 1 – – – – 6 – – – – 2 – – – – 7 – – – – • After 10 steps are programed, “NEXT «” is selected 3 – – – – 8 – – – – (highlighted). If you want to program more steps, press 4 – – – – 9 – – – – 5 – – – – 10 – – – – ENTER. PREVIOUS NEXT PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAM 7 Press / . TUNER PRESET3 8The chapters are played in the order you
3 Press ENTER. have programed and the PROGRAM indicator lights up. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER After all the chapters you programed are played back, the TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPT ENTER PROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV screen again. 1 – – – – 6 – – – – 2 – – – – 7 – – – – 3 – – – – 8 – – – – 4 – – – – 9 – – – – TUNER PRESET 5 – – – – 10 – – – – To stop during playback CHOOSE : 1–5 PREVIOUS NEXT Press 7.The PROGRAM MENU screen appears on
PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAM the TV screen.Title numbers you can select in the next step • If you press 3/8 while this screen is shown, the unit starts
program play. 4 Press 3 or 2 to select a title number, then ENTER. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER • : Increases the number. TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPT3 ENTER128622• 2 : Decreases the number. 2157212• You can also select a title number31178194369– – – – using the number buttons. 54210 – – – – PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER PREVIOUS NEXT TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPT PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAM 1 – 2 – – 6 – – – – 2 – – – – 7 – – – – 3 – – – – 8 – – – – 4 – – – – 9 – – – – 5 – – – – 10 – – – – CHOOSE : 1–9 PREVIOUS NEXT PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMChapter numbers you can select in the
next stepTO BE CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
EN27-36TH-A30[U].pm6 34 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,DVD Playback To erase the stored program
Press 0 to eject the disc. STANDBY/ON • If you turn off the system or change the source, theAUDIO
program is also erased. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE STEP DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL To check the program contents AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME You can check the program contents by pressing PROGRAM.VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL The PROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV screen. TUNER PRESET DOWN UP 3/8 REW FF To modify the program VCR CHANNEL TUNING You can modify the program while the PROGRAM MENU screen is B.SEARCH F.SEARCH shown on the TV screen. 3/2/5/∞ ENTER • To erase a step: Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an unwantedENTER
program step, then press CLEAR. • To modify a step: Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) a program step you want to modify, then perform steps 3 to 5 on page 34.VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING (Before entering a new number, press CLEAR repeatedly until “– –” appears on the number entry position.) SOUND • To add a step: Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an empty123SETTING program step, then perform steps 3 to 5 on page 34. 456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SLOW SETUP TEST • To move to program step 10 from program step 11, press 5 ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE ZOOM when program step 11 is selected (highlighted) so that “PREVIOUS »” is selected (highlighted). Then, press ENTER. REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM PROGRAM • To move to program step 11 from program step 10, press ∞ CLEAR CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP when program step 10 is selected (highlighted) so that “NEXT « ” is selected (highlighted). Then, press ENTER.To exit from program play
From the remote control ONLY: Press PROGRAM.PROGRAM
The PROGRAM MENU screen goes off, and the opening screen appears. (The program you made is still kept in memory.) • If you press 3/8 while this screen is shown, the unit starts normal playback. DVD/Video CD/CD PLAYER EN27-36TH-A30[U].pm6 35 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,DVD Special Effect Playback 7 Zoom
You can zoom in on the picture while playing back a DVD. 7 Still Picture/Frame-by-Frame Playback From the remote control ONLY: You can advance the still picture frame by frame while playing a DVD. 1 Press ZOOM to zoom in. ZOOM • Each time you press the button, the picture is From the remote control ONLY: enlarged as follows: 1 Press STEP once during playback. STEP A still picture appears on the TV screen. 248PAUSE2x Zoom 4x Zoom Canceled 2 Press 3/2/5/∞ to move the enlarged portion you want to watch. 2 Press STEP repeatedly to advance the STEP ENTER picture frame by frame. • Each time you press the button, the picture advances ENTER frame by frame. 2383838383838ENTER To cancel the ZOOM To resume normal play ZOOMTUNER PRESET Press ZOOM repeatedly until the normal size picture is Press 3/8. resumed. 7 Slow Motion Playback You can enjoy slow motion playback while playing a DVD. From the remote control ONLY: Press SLOW repeatedly during playback or pause. SLOW • Each time you press the button, slow motion speed changes as follows: SLOW 1 /2 SLOW 1 /4 PLAY (Normal play) EN27-36TH-A30[U].pm6 36 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,VCD/CD Playback
1234* 5 6 STANDBY/ON AUDIO 1/35 00:12 TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE DISPLAY DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL On-screen bar goes off. 7** AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME / * Appears only when a VCD is loaded.VCR DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL38** Appears only when a VCD is played back. TUNER PRESET 4 DOWN UP ¢ 1 : Disc type REW FF DVD VCD SVCD CD MP3 VCR CHANNEL 1 TUNING ¡ B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 2 : Current track and total number of the tracks on the discENTER
ENTER • Ex.: 1st track is playing out of 35 tracks recorded. 3 : Sound mode • Ex.: Stereo sound (Left channel and Right channel).VOLUME
MENU TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING RETURN 4 : Play Back Control (PBC) indicator • Ex.: PBC is on. (When PBC is turned off, will Number SOUND appear.) 123buttons SETTING 5 : Repeat mode indicator456PRO LOGIC • Ex.: When repeat mode is turned off. See page 39 for more789details. SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE 6 : Elapsed playing time or remaining time REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM You can change the play time indication by pressing CLEAR REMAIN. See below.CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP REMAIN 7 : Sound indication SEARCH • Indicates sound input level. (Appears only during playback VCD.) • SVCD can be operated by using the VCD operation Checking the Remaining Time procedure. • For basic disc operations such as inserting a disc, starting While playing back a VCD or CD, you can check the remaining playback, and moving to another tracks, see “Basic VCD/ time. CD Operations” on pages 13, 14, and “Basic Disc Operations” on page 28. From the remote control ONLY: Press REMAIN. REMAINShowing the On-Screen Bar The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen for a while.
• Each time you press the button, the play time indication changes as follows: You can show the following information on the TV screen while a disc is loaded. REMAIN TIME:TRACK DISC TIME From the remote control ONLY: TRACK TIME REMAIN TIME:DISC Press DISPLAY. DISPLAY • Each time you press the button, the following on-screen REMAIN TIME:TRACK bar appears in sequence. : Select this to show the remaining time of the current track. DISC TIME : Select this to show the total elapsed playing time of the disc. REMAIN TIME:DISC : Select this to show the total remaining time of the disc. TRACK TIME : Select this to show the elapsed playing time of the current track. EN37-42TH-A30[U].pm6 37 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Disc Menu–Driven Playback (Only for VCD) Moving to a Particular Portion Directly
The Play Back Control function (PBC) allows you to operate the You can move to a particular portion (scene) on the track directly. VCD using menus. • PBC function is canceled when you use this function. When you start playing a VCD with PBC function, a menu will automatically appear on the TV screen. (“MENU” will also appear From the remote control ONLY: on the display.) 1 Press SEARCH during playback or pause. • A menu may be a list of items, divided screens, or some moving • Each time you press the button, the following indication pictures. (See “PBC operation concept” below.) appears on the TV screen. When a menu appears, you can select a desired item on the menu. • When a list of items is displayed on the TV screen, press the TIME – – : – – TRACK TIME – – : – – number buttons to select an item. • When “3” or “SELECT” is displayed on the TV screen, press Canceled 3/8 to start playback. TIME – – : – – : Select this to move to a particular portion on the current disc. To go to the next submenu UP TRACK TIME – – : – – Press ¢. FF : Select this to move to a particular portion on the current track. To return to the previous submenuDOWN
Press 4. 2 Press number buttons to select123REW a playing time you want to456To cancel the PBC playback search for. You can cancel the menu-driven operations (PBC function): The unit starts playback at the selected7891Press 7 to stop playback. elapsed playing time. (The on-screen02Press the number buttons to select a track. bar appears for a while.) Normal playback starts from the selected track. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING • You can also turn on and off the PBC function by pressing MENU • To input time “45:23,” press 4, 5, 2, 3. on the remote control. Each time • To input time “09:45,” press 9, 4, 5, then wait for about 5 you press the button, the PBC function turns on and off. seconds (or press ENTER). • To cancel a misentry, press CLEAR. Each time you press the button, the last entry will be erased. PBC operation conceptSearching for a Particular Point
You can search for a particular point while playing a disc—Variable Speed Forward/Reverse Search. • No sound comes out during Variable Speed Forward/Reverse Search on a VCD. To fast-forward the tracks—Variable Speed Forward Search Press ¡ during playback or pause. • Each time you press the button, the search speed changes as follows: F.SEARCH Note: While operating a VCD using menu, some of the functions such as x2 x4 repeat play may not work. PLAY (Normal play) x8 To reverse the tracks—Variable Speed Reverse Search Press 1 during playback or pause. • Each time you press the button, the search speed changes as follows: B.SEARCH x2 x4 PLAY (Normal play) x8 EN37-42TH-A30[U].pm6 38 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,VCD/CD Playback
Note: When the on-screen bar is shown on the screen, Repeat mode indication also changes as follows: STANDBY/ONAUDIO
TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE REPEAT:ONE REPEAT:DISC DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME REPEAT OFFVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET 7 A–B Repeat 7 DOWN UP 3/8 While playing, you can also select a portion you want to repeat. REW FF VCR CHANNEL • An interval of more than 5 seconds is required between point ATUNING
and point B. B.SEARCH F.SEARCH23ENTER Example:ENTER
VOLUME REPEAT:A– TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGSOUND
123REPEAT:A–BSETTING
456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE From the remote control ONLY: REPEAT PROGRAMREPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM 1 Press A–B REPEAT to select the start A-B REPEAT CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP A–B REPEAT point. “RPT A–” appears on the display and “REPEAT:A–” appears on the TV screen. 2 Press A–B REPEAT again to select the A-B REPEAT end point.Repeating Playback “RPT A–” changes to “RPT A–B” and
“REPEAT:A–” changes to “REPEAT:A–B,” Repeat play cannot be used in the following cases: then A–B repeat begins. • When you play back a VCD using the PBC function The unit automatically locates point A and starts repeated • When you enjoy program play playback between points A and B. 7 Repeat Play To cancel A–B Repeat From the remote control ONLY: Press A–B REPEAT again. A-B REPEATREPEAT Press REPEAT repeatedly. “RPT OFF” appears on the display and “REPEAT OFF” The indication corresponding to the selected mode appears appears on the TV screen. on your TV. • Each time you press the button, repeat mode changes as follows: Note: REPEAT:ONE REPEAT:DISC When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Repeat mode indication also changes as follows: REPEAT OFF REPEAT:ONE : Current track will be repeated. REPEAT:DISC : All the tracks will be repeated. REPEAT OFF : Repeat play is canceled. (Normal play is resumed.) EN37-42TH-A30[U].pm6 39 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Programming the Playing Order of the 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to program other tracks Tracks—Program Play you want.
• After 10 steps are programed, “NEXT «” is selectedYou can arrange the track playback order before you start playing. (highlighted). If you want to program more steps, press You can program up to 20 steps. ENTER.
• Before making a program, make sure that the TV is turned on TUNER PRESET and the correct input is selected on the TV. 6 Press 3/8.The tracks are played in the order you have From the remote control ONLY: programed and the PROGRAM indicator
1 Load a disc. lights up. • If the current playing source is not the DVD player, press 3/8, then 7 before going to the next step. After all the tracks you programed are played back, thePROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV screen again.
2 Press PROGRAM. PROGRAMThe PROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV To stop during play
screen. TUNER PRESET • “PROGRAM” appears on the display. Press 7.The PROGRAM MENU screen appears on
PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER the TV screen. TRACK TRACK • If you press 3/8 while this screen is 1 – – 6 – – shown, the system starts program play. 2 – – 7 – – 3 – – 8 – – PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER 4 – – 9 – – TRACK TRACK 5 – – 10 – – 1761267– – PREVIOUS NEXT398– – 4139– – 51110 – – PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAM PREVIOUS NEXT 3 PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMPress ENTER.To exit from program play
PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER From the remote control ONLY: TRACK TRACK Press PROGRAM. PROGRAMENTER 1 – – 6 – – The PROGRAM MENU screen goes off, and the 2 – – 7 – – 3 – – 8 – – opening screen appears. (The program you made is 4 – – 9 – – still kept in memory.) 5 – – 10 – – CHOOSE : 1–17 • If you press 3/8 while this screen is shown, the unit starts normal PREVIOUS NEXT playback. PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMTrack numbers you can select in the
next step 4 DVD/Video CD/CD PLAYER Press 3 or 2 to select a track number, then ENTER. • 3 : Increases the number. • 2 : Decreases the number. • You can also select a track number ENTER To erase the stored program using the number buttons. Press 0 to eject the disc. • If you turn off the system or change the source, the program is also erased. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER TRACK TRACK176– – To check the program contents 2 – – 7 – – PROGRAM 3 – – 8 – – You can check the program contents by pressing 4 – – 9 – – PROGRAM. The PROGRAM MENU screen appears on 5 – – 10 – – the TV screen. PREVIOUS NEXT PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMTO BE CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
EN37-42TH-A30[U].pm6 40 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,VCD/CD Playback Selecting Playback Channel
STANDBY/ON When you play back a karaoke VCD or CD, you can only selectAUDIO
either the left channel or right channel to listen to. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE Press AUDIO/FM MODE repeatedly. AUDIO/ AUDIO/ DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL STEP FM MODEThe on-screen bar appears on the screen for a while. FM MODE AUDIO/FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME • Each time you press the button, the sound mode changes as VCR follows: DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET / AUDIO:LEFT AUDIO:RIGHTDOWN UP38REW FF AUDIO:STEREO VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 3/2/5/∞ ENTER 1/35 00:12ENTER VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGSOUND
123SETTING AUDIO:STEREO (LR) : Select this to listen to both456PRO LOGIC channel sounds. 789SLOW AUDIO:LEFT (L) : Select this to listen to the leftSLOW SETUP TEST 0 channel sounds. ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE ZOOM AUDIO:RIGHT (R) : Select this to listen to the right REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM channel sounds. CLEAR CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP REMEMBER that after playing back a karaoke VCD or CD using “AUDIO:LEFT” or “AUDIO:RIGHT,” select “AUDIO:STEREO” to restore normal stereo playback.To modify the program
You can modify the program while the PROGRAM MENU screen is shown on the TV screen. • To erase a step: press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an unwanted program step, then press CLEAR. • To modify a step: press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an program step you want to modify, then perform steps 3 and 4. (Before entering a new number, press CLEAR repeatedly until “– –” appears on number entry position.) • To add a step: press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an empty program step, then perform steps 3 and 4. • To move to program step 10 from program step 11, press 5 when program step 11 is selected (highlighted) so that “PREVIOUS » ” is selected (highlighted). Then, press ENTER. • To move to program step 11 from program step 10, press ∞ when program step 10 is selected (highlighted) so that “NEXT « ” is selected (highlighted). Then, press ENTER. EN37-42TH-A30[U].pm6 41 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,VCD Special Effect Playback 7 Zoom
You can zoom in on the picture while playing a VCD. 7 Still Picture/Frame-by-Frame Playback From the remote control ONLY: You can advance the still picture frame by frame while playing a VCD. 1 Press ZOOM to zoom in. ZOOM • Each time you press the button, the picture is From the remote control ONLY: enlarged as follows: 1 Press STEP once during playback. STEP A still picture appears on the TV screen. 8PAUSE2x Zoom Canceled 2 Press 3/2/5/∞ to move the enlarged portion you want to 2 watch. ENTERPress STEP repeatedly to advance the STEP picture frame by frame. • Each time you press the button, the picture advances ENTER frame by frame. 2383838383838ENTER To cancel the ZOOM To resume normal play TUNER PRESET Press ZOOM again. ZOOM Press 3/8. The normal size picture is resumed. 7 Slow Motion Playback You can enjoy slow motion playback while playing a VCD. From the remote control ONLY: Press SLOW repeatedly during playback or pause. SLOW • Each time you press the button, slow motion speed changes as follows: SLOW 1 /2 SLOW 1 /4 SLOW 1 /8 PLAY (Normal play) SLOW 1 /16 EN37-42TH-A30[U].pm6 42 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,MP3 Introduction
This system is incorporated with an MP3 decoder. You can play back MP3 tracks (files) recorded on CD-Rs and CD-RWs. • Notice that “files” and “tracks” are used interchangeably. STANDBY/ONAUDIO What is MP3?
TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE MP3 is an abbreviation of Motion Picture Experts Group (or MPEG) Audio Layer 3. MP3 is simply a file format with a data compression DISPLAY DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL ratio of 1:10 (128 Kbps*). That means, by using MP3 format, one AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME CD-R or CD-RW can contain 10 times as much data volume as aVCR
regular CD can. DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL * Bit rate is the average number of bits that one second of audio data 4 TUNER PRESET ¢ will consume. The measuring unit used is Kbps (1000 bits per DOWN UP second). REW FF 7 VCR CHANNEL To get a better audio quality, choose a higher bit rate. The most TUNING 3/8 popular bit rate for encoding (recording) is 128 Kbps. B.SEARCH F.SEARCHMP3 File Compatibility ENTER ENTER
• This system can only read MP3 files that are recorded in the format that is compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1 or Level 2. • The system can read or play MP3 files only with the extension VOLUME code—“.mp3”. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING • ID3* tags cannot be shown on the display. * An MP3 file can contain file information called “ID3 Tag” where SOUND123its album name, performer, track title, etc. are recorded. There are SETTING two versions—ID3v1 (ID3 Tag version 1) and ID3v2 (ID3 Tag456PRO LOGIC version 2). 789SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODEDisc structure—How are MP3 files recorded
and played back? REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP “MP3 files (tracks)” can be recorded in “directories (or folders),” in PC terminology. During recording, the files and directories can be arranged in a way similar to arranging files and folder/directories of computer data. “Root” is similar to the root of a tree. Every file and directory can be linked to the root. In compliance with ISO 9660, the maximum allowable depth of For in-depth information about a disc to be played back, see nested directories—so-called “hierarchy”—is eight (inclusive of the “Disc Introduction—DVD/VCD/CD” on page 27. root). Playback order, files search order, and directory search order of the MP3 files recorded on a disc are determined by the writing (or encoding) application; therefore, playback order may be different from the one you have intended while recording the folders/ directories and the files. Note on MP3 discs MP3 discs (either CD-R or CD-RW) require a longer readout time. (It differs due to the complexity of the directory/file configuration.) EN43-46TH-A30[U].pm6 43 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,MP3 Playback Starting Playback The on-screen bar
12345It is recommended to turn on your TV when playing back an MP3 disc. 1/35 128 00:22/03:48 1 Press 0 to load a disc. 1 : Disc type DVD VCD SVCD CD MP3 2 Press 3/8. TUNER PRESET After detecting the disc, playback starts. 2 : Current track (file) and total number of the tracks • The on-screen bar and the contents on the disc recorded on the MP3 disc will be shown • Ex.: 1st track is playing out of 35 tracks recorded. on the TV if it is turned on. 3 : Bit rate • Ex.: Bit rate used for recording the loaded disc is 5/135 ? ? 128 Kbps. (See the previous page.) 4 : Repeat mode indicator • Ex.: When repeat mode is turned off. SPRING See page 46 for more details.SUMMER
FALL 5 : Elapsed playing time and the total playing time ofWINTER
LIAR.MP3 the current track LOVE.MP3 6 : Sound indication • Indicates sound input level. (Only appears during playback.) 5/135 ? ?To go to another track SPRING
Press ¢ or 4 during playback. SPRING1.MP3 SPRING2.MP3 • ¢ : Skip to the beginning of the next track. UP SPRING3.MP3 SPRING4.MP3 FF SPRING5.MP3 • 4 : Skip to the beginning of the previous track. DOWNREW
Note: If the loaded disc is not recorded in the audio CD format or MP3 format, “WRONG DISC FORMAT” appears on the TV screen. To stop playback for a moment TUNER PRESET Press 3/8. To resume play, press 3/8 again or ENTER.To stop during playback TUNER PRESET
Press 7.To remove the disc
Press 0 on the front panel. The disc tray comes out. To close the disc tray, press 0 again. EN43-46TH-A30[U].pm6 44 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,MP3 Playback Operations Using the On-Screen Display
STANDBY/ON AUDIO It is recommended to turn on your TV when playing back an MP3 disc. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVEWhen the loaded MP3 disc is recognized, the following on-screen
DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL display appears on the TV screen. (The contents of this on-screen AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME display varies according to the disc—the way MP3 tracks wereVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX recorded on the disc.)CONTROL • Only the first 8 letters of the titles appear on the TV screen. TUNER PRESET DOWN UPFrom the remote control ONLY:
REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH ButtonTo do∞ 5 ENTER
ENTER ENTER Start playback or go into a directory. ∞ / 5 Select a track or directory.VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGNumber SOUND
buttons123SETTING456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODEREPEAT
REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAMSEARCH CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP
5/135 ? ? MP3 On-Screen Display OperationsSPRING SUMMER FALL WINTER
LIAR.MP3 LOVE.MP3ENTER
5 ∞ 5 and ENTERSPRING
SPRING ENTER SUMMER SPRING1.MP3 ENTER FALL SPRING2.MP3 WINTER SPRING3.MP3 LIAR.MP3 SPRING4.MP3 LOVE.MP3 To “SUMMER” SPRING5.MP3 Start playing “SPRING1.MP3” 5 ∞ 5 ∞SPRING
SPRING ENTER SUMMER SPRING1.MP3 ENTER FALL SPRING2.MP3 WINTER SPRING3.MP3 LIAR.MP3 SPRING4.MP3 LOVE.MP3 To “FALL” SPRING5.MP3 Start playing “SPRING2.MP3” 5 ∞ 5 ∞SPRING SPRING
SUMMER ENTER SPRING1.MP3 ENTER FALL SPRING2.MP3 WINTER SPRING3.MP3 LIAR.MP3 SPRING4.MP3 LOVE.MP3 Start playing SPRING5.MP3 Start playing “LIAR.MP3” “SPRING3.MP3”Note: If you press 2, the cursor moves to current playback track.
EN43-46TH-A30[U].pm6 45 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Moving to a Particular Track Directly Repeating Playback
You can move to a particular track on the disc directly. On an MP3 disc, A–B Repeat cannot be used. You can enjoy only Repeat play. From the remote control ONLY: 1 SEARCHPress SEARCH during playback or pause. From the remote control ONLY: “TRACK – – – – ” appears on the TV screen. To repeat playback—Repeat Play Press REPEAT repeatedly. 2 REPEATPress the number buttons to123The indication corresponding to the selected mode appears select a track number you on the TV screen. 456want. • Each time you press the button, repeat mode changes as The system starts playback from the789follows: selected track. 0 REPEAT:RANDOM REPEAT:ONE • To select number 5, press 5 (then ENTER). REPEAT OFF REPEAT:DISC REPEAT:DIR • To select number 10, press 1, 0 (then ENTER). • To select number 23, press 2, 3 (then ENTER). • To select number 123, press 1, 2, 3. REPEAT:RANDOM : All tracks recorded on the disc will be played once at Note: random (random play), and random play will be repeated. REPEAT:ONE When you want to move to another file (track) directly, you can move to it simply by pressing the number buttons (without pressing : Current track will be repeated. SEARCH in step 1). REPEAT:DIR : Tracks in the current directory will be repeated. REPEAT:DISC : All tracks on the disc will be repeated. REPEAT OFF : Repeat play is canceled. (Normal play is resumed.) Note: When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Repeat mode indication also changes as follows: REPEAT:RANDOM REPEAT:ONE REPEAT OFF REPEAT:DISC REPEAT:DIR EN43-46TH-A30[U].pm6 46 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Tuner Operations Tuning in Stations
STANDBY/ON From the remote control:AUDIO
1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select the FM/AM TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE band. DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. AUDIO/ • Each time you press the button, the band alternates FM MODE AUDIO/FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME FM/AM between FM and AM.VCR
TUNER DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNERPRESET
TUNER PRESET PRESET DOWN DOWN UP UP 2 Press and hold TUNING + or – until you find TUNING – REW FF TUNING + the frequency you want. VCR CHANNELVCR CHANNEL TUNING TUNING• TUNING + : Increases the B.SEARCH F.SEARCH frequency. B.SEARCH F.SEARCH • TUNING – : Decreases the ENTER frequency. The system starts searching for stations and stops when a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in.VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING On the front panel: SOUND 1 Press SOURCE repeatedly until the123SOURCE SETTING desired band appears on the display. 456PRO LOGIC The last received station of the selected band is tuned789SLOW SETUP TEST in. 0 • Each time you press the button, the source changes as follows: ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM PROGRAMDVD player* AUX IN
CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEPAM FM
* “WAIT” appears on the display. 2 Press 7 so that “MANUAL” appears on the For basic tuner operations, see “Basic Tuner Operations” on page display. 15. • Each time you press the button, the operation mode of ¢ and 4 buttons alternates between “PRESET” and “MANUAL.”Setting the AM Tuner Interval Spacing PRESET : Select this for using ¢ and 4 as the
buttons to select the preset station. Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart, and other countries use MANUAL : Select this for using ¢ and 4 as the 10 kHz spacing. buttons to change the frequency manually. • 9 kHz interval spacing is the initial setting. • Each time you do the following procedure, the AM tuner interval spacing alternates between 9 kHz and 10 kHz. 3 Press and hold ¢ or 4 until 1 you find the frequency you want.Select AM as the band. • ¢ : Increases the frequency. • 4 : Decreases the frequency. 2 Press 9, 1, and 0 on the remote control. The new setting for the interval spacing appears on the display, and the band changes into FM. Notes: • When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the 3 Press FM/AM on the remote control to select AM indicator lights up on the display. as the band again. • When an FM stereo program is received, the indicator also lights up. • When you press the button repeatedly, the frequency changes step by step. EN47-48TH-A30[U].pm6 47 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Using Preset Tuning To tune in a preset station
From the remote control: Once a station is assigned to a channel number, the station can be 1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select the FM/AM quickly tuned. You can preset up to 15 FM and 15 AM stations. band. The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. To store the preset stations • Each time you press the button, the band alternates From the remote control ONLY: between FM and AM. 1 Tune in the station you want to preset (see “Tuning in Stations”). 2 Press TUNER PRESET UP or DOWN until the desired preset station TUNER PRESET appears on the DOWN UP display. REW FF 2 Press PROGRAM. PROGRAM • TUNER PRESET UP : Increases the preset number. The preset number appears on the display and the • TUNER PRESET DOWN : Decreases the preset number. PROGRAM indicator lights up. On the front panel: 1 Press SOURCE repeatedly until the SOURCE desired band appears on the display. Preset number 2 Press 7 so that “PRESET” appears on the 3 Press TUNER PRESET UP or DOWN to select a display. preset number. • Each time you press the button, the operation mode ofTUNER PRESET DOWN UP ¢ and 4 buttons alternates between “PRESET” and “MANUAL.” REW FF PRESET : Select this for using ¢ and 4 as the buttons to select the preset station. • TUNER PRESET UP : Increases the preset number. MANUAL : Select this for using ¢ and 4 as the • TUNER PRESET DOWN : Decreases the preset number. buttons to change the frequency manually. 4 Press PROGRAM to store the preset 3 Press ¢ or 4 repeatedly untilPROGRAM the desired preset station appears station. on the display. The PROGRAM indicator goes off, and the station is assigned to the selected preset number. • ¢ : Increases the preset number. • 4 : Decreases the preset number. 5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 until you store all the stations you want. Selecting the FM Reception Mode When an stereo FM program tuned currently is noisy, you can To erase a stored preset station change the FM reception mode to improve the reception. Storing a new station on a used number erases the previously stored one. Press AUDIO/FM MODE. AUDIO/FM MODE The indicator goes off from the display and the program loses the stereo effect. To resume the stereo effect, press AUDIO/FM MODE again. The stereo effect resumes. Note: The FM reception mode will also resume in the following case: • When you change the frequency or the preset number EN47-48TH-A30[U].pm6 48 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Setting up the DVD Preferences Setting the Initial Languages
STANDBY/ON You can select your favorite language you listen to or read on the TVAUDIO
screen. When you operate this system or watch a DVD, you will be able to TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE operate the system or to enjoy a DVD in the language you have DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL selected and stored. AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME On the language selection menu, you can select the following:VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET LANGUAGES SYSTEM DOWN UP REW FF OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH VCR CHANNEL TUNING AUDIO ENGLISH B.SEARCH F.SEARCH SUBTITLE ENGLISH ∞ 5 MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISHENTER ENTER
» « | \ : Move Setup : ExitVOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING RETURN OSD LANGUAGE : Select the indication language shown on the TV screen while operating the SOUND system. (ex. PLAY, STOP, PAUSE, etc.) 123SETTING AUDIO : Select the language you listen to while456PRO LOGIC watching a DVD. 789SLOW SETUP TEST SETUP 0 SUBTITLE : Select the subtitle language you read ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE while watching a DVD. REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM MENU LANGUAGE : Select the menu language recorded on a CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP DVD which you use while operating the DVD’s own menu.Languages you can select on this menu
On the Setup menu, you can do the two main important settings— You can select the following languages separately for each listed language selection (LANGUAGES) menu and system setting item on the menu. (SYSTEM) menu. • For “OSD LANGUAGE”: • Setup menu can only be displayed while a disc is not playing. English, Chinese, Spanish, French, German, Japanese, and (The DVD player must be selected as the source.) Korean. • You can only use the remote control for Setup menu operations. • For “AUDIO,” “SUBTITLE,” and “MENU LANGUAGE”: English, Chinese, French, German, Japanese, Russian, Spanish, Portuguese, Korean and Original*. * Available only for “AUDIO” and “SUBTITLE.” When you want to operate the disc or enjoy its playback in the originally recorded (default) language, select “ORIGINAL.” Note: The original language will be selected as the initial language regardless of your setting in the following cases: • If the language you have selected is not recorded on the disc. • If the disc is programed to be played back in the original language. EN49-53TH-A30[U].pm6 49 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Basic language selecting procedure Introducing the DVD Preference (System)
Ex. : To select the desired language as the initial language for “AUDIO.” You can set the DVD preference to match it to your usage and From the remote control ONLY: operating circumstances. 1 Press SETUP. SETUP On the system setting menu, you can set the following: Language selection menu of the Setup menu appears on LANGUAGES SYSTEM the TV screen. LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB RATING LEVEL OFF OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH AUDIO ENGLISH SUBTITLE ENGLISH MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISH » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit TV SCREEN: Select the TV screen size for playing back a DVD 2 recorded with 16:9 wide screen video signal.Press ∞ (or 5) to select • 4:3 LB : Select “4:3 LB (Letter Box)” (highlight) one of the language when the aspect ratio of your TV items. is 4:3. While viewing a wideENTER
LANGUAGES SYSTEM screen picture, the black bars appear on the top and the bottom OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH of the screen. AUDIO ENGLISH SUBTITLE ENGLISH • 4:3 PS : Select “4:3 PS (Pan-Scan)” when MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISH the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3. While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit appear, however, the left and right edge sides of the pictures will not 3 Press ENTER. be shown on the screen. Pop-up window appears (where the • 16:9 : Select “16:9” when the language names are listed). aspect ratio of the TV is ENTER 16:9. (Set the screen size to “ ” indicates the current full on your TV.) setting. LANGUAGES SYSTEM RATING LEVEL :You can select this to restrict playback of DVDs OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH containing violent scenes and those not suitable AUDIO EENNGGLILSIHSH for your family members. (See page 52 for SUBTITLE ECNHGLINISEHSE FRENCH detailed operations.)MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISHGERMAN JAPANESE RUSSIAN
» « | \ : Move Setup : Exit indicates that more languages are listed, but not shown. 4 Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) the language you want, then press ENTER.ENTER
The setting is stored (and the pop-up window goes off). • When you want to cancel the setting you have just made, press RETURN without pressing ENTER. (Pop-up menu also goes off.) 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to select the other language items listed.To erase the Setup menu SETUP
Press SETUP. EN49-53TH-A30[U].pm6 50 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Setting up the DVD Preferences
3 Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) one of the system STANDBY/ON AUDIO setting items listed on the menu. ENTER TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE LANGUAGES SYSTEM DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME RATING LEVEL OFFVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 3/2/5/∞ 4 Press ENTER.ENTER Pop-up window appears (where the ENTER
selectable settings are listed). ENTER indicates the current setting.VOLUME
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING RETURN TV SCREEN 4:43 :L 3B LBNumber SOUND RATING LEVEL O4F F: 3 PS
buttons12316 : 9SETTING
456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST SETUP ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM 5 Press ∞ (or 5) to select CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP (highlight) the proper setting, then press ENTER.The setting is stored (and the pop-up ENTER
window goes off).Setting the TV screen size • When you want to cancel the setting
you have just made, press RETURN without pressing ENTER. (Pop-upFrom the remote control ONLY:
SETUP menu also goes off.)1 Press SETUP.Language selection menu of the setup menu appears on • Even if “4:3 PS” is selected, the screen size may become
the TV screen. “4:3 LB” while playing some DVDs. This depends on how LANGUAGES SYSTEM the DVD is programed and recorded. • If a disc (or some portions of the disc) is recorded with OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH the video signals of 4:3 aspect ratio, this setting does not AUDIO ENGLISH take effect. The pictures are displayed with full 4:3 aspect SUBTITLE ENGLISH MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISH ratio or with 4:3 Letter Box. » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit To erase the Setup menu 2 Press ENTER (or 3/2) to Press SETUP. SETUP select (highlight) the system setting menu.ENTER
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB RATING LEVEL OFF » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit EN49-53TH-A30[U].pm6 51 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Setting the Parental (Rating) Level 5 Press the number buttons to enter the password
(4 digits).Using this function, you can restrict playback of DVD containing • When shipped from the factory, password is “7890.”
violent scenes and those not suitable for your family members. • If you enter a wrong password, your setting will be canceled.Nobody can play such a disc unless this function is canceled.
(“WRONG PARENTAL LEVEL” appears on the TV screen if you LANGUAGES SYSTEM try to play back such a disc.) TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB • This setting takes effect only for the DVDs containing the rating ENTER PASSWORD *** level information—Level 1 (most restrictive) to Level 8 (least DIGITAL OUTPUT restrictive).From the remote control ONLY:
1 » « | \ : Move Setup : ExitPress SETUP. SETUPLanguage selection menu of the setup menu appears on
the TV screen. 2 Press ENTER (or 3/2) to select (highlight) the system LANGUAGES SYSTEM setting menu. TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB ENTER RATING LEVEL OFOFF BILTESVTERLE 1AM LANGUAGES SYSTEM LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB LEVEL 4 RATING LEVEL OFF LEVEL 5 » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit 6 Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) the level you want, 3 Press ∞ (or 5) to select then press ENTER.ENTER
(highlight) “RATING LEVEL.”ENTER
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB RATING LEVEL OFFTo erase the Setup menu SETUP
» « | \ : Move Setup : ExitPress SETUP again.
4 Press ENTER. “RATING LEVEL” now changes to “ENTER PASSWORD” on the menu.ENTER
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB ENTER PASSWORD » « | \ : Move Setup : ExitTO BE CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
EN49-53TH-A30[U].pm6 52 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Setting up the DVD Preferences
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB STANDBY/ON RATING LEVEL OLFEFVEL 4 AUDIO BILTESVTERLE 5AM LEVEL 6 TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE LEVEL 7 LEVEL 8 DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL NEW PASSWORD » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUMEVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
LANGUAGES SYSTEM B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 5/∞ TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LBENTER NEW PASSWORD - ENTER VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING » « | \ : Move Setup : ExitNumber SOUND
123• If “NEW PASSWORD” is the last item listed on the pop-up buttons SETTING window and is not shown, pressing ∞ repeatedly will show it456PRO LOGIC in the pop-up window. 789SLOW SETUP TEST SETUP ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE 3 Press the number buttons to REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM enter a new password, then CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP ENTER.Your new password is now stored. ENTER SETUP To change the password To erase the Setup menu Press SETUP again.
1 Repeat steps 1 to 5 of “Setting the Parental (Rating) Level” procedure. To reset the passwordYou can reset the password to the initial setting “7890.”
2 Press ∞ (or 5) to select REMEMBER all the other preset settings such as the speaker (highlight) “NEW settings, preset stations, Sleep Timer, DVD setup menu settings are also reset to the factory settings.PASSWORD,” then ENTER. ENTER While the source is DVD player and playback stops, press and
hold 7 on the front panel until the “INITIAL” appears on the display. EN49-53TH-A30[U].pm6 53 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Operating JVC’s Components You can use the remote control to operate not only this unit but also other JVC products.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied for the other products. — This remote control can operate a VCR whose remote control code is set to A code. • To operate the other products, aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on the target product. ❏ To operate a JVC’s TVYou can perform the following operations on the TV.
STANDBY/ON AUDIO TV : Turn on or off the TV.TV VOLUME +/– : Adjust the volume. TV TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE TV/VIDEO TV/VIDEO : Set the input mode (either TV or
DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNELTV CHANNEL TV VOLUME VIDEO).
AUDIO/ +/– FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME +/– TV CHANNEL +/– : Change the channels.VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF ❏ To operate a JVC’s VCRAfter pressing VCR CONTROL on the remote VCR CONTROL
control, you can perform the following operations STANDBY/ON AUDIO on the VCR.VCR TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE STEP DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL VCR : Turn on or off the VCR.
AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME VCR CHANNEL +/– : Change the channels.VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL VCR CONTROL 1 – 9, 0 : Select TV channel on the VCR. TUNER PRESET 3/8 : Start playback.4 DOWN UP ¢ 7 : Stop playback. REW FFVCR CHANNEL VCR CHANNELTUNING VCR CHANNEL STEP : Pause playback. To release it,
– +B.SEARCH F.SEARCH press 3/8. 7 3/8 FF (¢) : Fast-wind a tape. ENTER REW (4) : Rewind a tape. VOLUME After operating the VCR, press DVD FM/AM TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING DVD or FM/AM.Number SOUND
123buttons SETTING456IMPORTANT: PRO LOGIC789When you press VCR CONTROL, some buttons on the SLOW SETUP TEST 0 remote control cannot work for operating this unit. ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODETo operate this unit, press DVD or FM/AM.
REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP EN54-58TH-A30[U].pm6 54 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Operating Other Manufacturers’ TV
❏ To change the transmittable signals for operating a You can use the remote control to operate other TV manufactures’ TV. • Refer also to the manuals supplied for the other products. 1. Press and hold TV . • To operate the other products, aim the remote control 2. Enter manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9, and 0. directly at the remote sensor on the target product. 3. Release TV . Now, you can perform the following operations on the TV. TV : Turn on or off the TV. STANDBY/ON TV VOLUME +/– : Adjust the volume.AUDIO
TV/VIDEO : Set the input mode (either TV or TV TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE TV/VIDEO VIDEO) DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL TV VOLUME TV CHANNEL +/– : Change the channels. TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME +/–+/–VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL 4. Try to operate your TV by pressing TV . When your TV turns on or off, you have entered the correct TUNER PRESET DOWN UP code. REW FF VCR CHANNEL TUNING If there are more than one code listed for your brand of TV, B.SEARCH F.SEARCH try each one until the correct one is entered. ENTER Manufacturers’ codes for TV Manufacturer Codes JVC 01VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING Hitachi 10 Magnavox 04 Number SOUND Mitsubishi 13 buttons123Panasonic 12, 24SETTING
456RCA 07, 29 PRO LOGIC789Samsung 11 SLOW SETUP TEST 0 Sanyo 05, 20 ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE Sharp 02, 16, 22 REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM Sony 03 CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP Toshiba 09 Zenith 17 Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment. EN54-58TH-A30[U].pm6 55 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Maintenance
To get the best performance of the unit, keep your discs and mechanism clean. General Notes Cleaning the unit In general, you will have the best performance by keeping your • Stains on the unit discs, and the mechanism clean. Should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the unit is heavily stained, • Store discs in their cases, and keep them in cabinets or on shelves. wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-diluted neutral detergent and • Keep the disc tray closed when not in use. wrung well, then wipe clean with a dry cloth. • Since the unit may deteriorate in quality, become damaged or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following. — DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth. Handling Discs — DO NOT wipe it strong. — DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine. — DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides to it. • Remove the disc from its case by — DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact with holding it at the edge while it for a long time. pressing the center hole lightly. • Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc. • Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping. • Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc when placing it back in its case. • Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes, and moisture. To clean the disc Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge. DO NOT use any solvent—such as conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner, or benzine—to clean the disc. EN54-58TH-A30[U].pm6 56 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Troubleshooting
Use this chart to help you solve daily operational problems. If there is any problem you cannot solve, contact your JVC service center. PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION Power does not come on. The power cord is not connected correctly. Insert the plug into the socket. The remote control does not work. • It is too far from the center unit, or is not • Come close to the center unit. facing the center unit. • There is something obstructing the remote • Avoid any obstacles. sensor. • The VCR CONTROL button has been • Press DVD or FM/AM to operate the pressed. system. (See page 54.) • The battery is flat. • Replace the battery. • The battery has been inserted the wrong • Insert the battery correctly. way round (+/–). • Sunlight is falling directly on the detector. • Shade the remote control from direct sunlight. No sound. • There is a short in the speaker cord. • Reconnect the speaker cord. • The audio cord is not connected properly. • Connect the cord properly. (See page 9.) • An incorrect source has been selected. • Select the correct source. (See pages 11 to 16.) • Muting is on. • Press MUTING to cancel muting. • The disc is copy–protected CD. • Replace the disc. Sound is emitted from only one speaker. • The speaker cord is not connected correctly. • Connect the cord properly. (See page 8.) • Left-right balance is incorrect. • Adjust balance. (See pages 22 to 26.) No video. • The video cord is not connected properly. • Connect the cord properly. (See page 10.) • TV input selection is incorrect. • Select the correct input. No picture is displayed on the TV screen, the • The color system of the disc does not match • Change the color system, or replace the picture is blurred, or the picture is divided the system. disc.(See page 17.) into two parts. • The scanning mode is set to “P–SCAN • Change the scanning mode to “I–SCAN MODE” though the system is connected to MODE.” (See page 17.) the TV which does not support the progressive video input such as a conventional TV. A disc cannot be played. • The system and disc region code numbers • Replace the disc. (See page 27.) are incompatible. • The disc causes the parental (rating) error. • Enter password to change the parental (rating) level. (See page 52.) “WRONG DISC FORMAT” appears on the • The CD–R/CD–RW does not contain any • Replace the disc. TV screen. MP3 files. Pictures and sounds are distorted. • The disc is dirty. • Clean the disc. • A VCR is connected between the center unit • Connect the center unit and TV directly. and the TV. Pictures are distorted when progressive mode • “Progressive Mode ” may not be set • Change “Progressive Mode” is selected. appropriately for the current disc. (See page 16.) The edge is missing on the picture image. • Initial setup (TV screen size) was incorrect. • Set TV screen size correctly. (See pages 50 and 51.) Continuous static during FM broadcasts. • The received signal is too weak. • Connect an external FM antenna (see page 6), or contact your dealer. • The station is too far away. • Select another station. • The antenna is not connected correctly. • Check the connection. (See page 6.) The system does not work correctly. • Lightning or electronic noise interferes with • Switch power off, and remove and re-insert operation of the microcomputer. the power plug in the socket. • Immediately after heating the room, the unit • Turn off the power, plug off and leave the was moved to a cold location causing unit a few hours before switching power on condensation to form inside. again. The VCR cannot be operated using this • The remote control is not set for VCR • Press VCR CONTROL to operate the VCR. remote control. operations. (See page 54.) • The VCR is not a JVC’s product. • This remote control can operate a JVC’s VCR whose remote control code is set to A code. EN54-58TH-A30[U].pm6 57 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Specifications
Center unit (XV-THA30) Subwoofer (SP-WA30) Amplifier section Speaker: 20 cm Front/Center/Rear: Bass-reflex, Magnetically Shielded 25 watts per channel, min. RMS at 6 ohms as 1 kHz, Power Handling Capacity: 110 W with no more than 10 % total harmonic distortion. Impedance: 4 Ω (min) Subwoofer: Frequency Range: 25 Hz to 200 Hz 110 watts, min. RMS at 4 ohms as 100 Hz, Dimensions (W × H × D): 249 mm × 404 mm × 335 mm with no more than 10 % total harmonic distortion. Mass: 6.5 kg (except cords) Audio section Audio input sensitivity/Impedance (at 1 kHz) Satellite Speakers (SP-XA30) AUX IN: 500 mV/47 kΩ Speakers: 8 cm Bass-reflex, Magnetically Shielded Video section Power Handling Capacity: 35 W Color System: NTSC/PAL Impedance: 6 Ω (min) For NTSC discs, the scanning mode can be selected between Frequency Range: 90 Hz to 20 kHz interaced scanning and progressive scanning. For PAL discs, Length of cords: 6 m only interaced scanning mode is available. Dimensions (W × H × D): 105 mm × 119 mm × 126 mm Horizontal Resolution: 480 lines Mass: 600 g (except cords) Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 68 dB Output Level VIDEO OUT VIDEO (Composite): 1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω Rear Satellite Speakers (SP-XSA30) S-VIDEO (Y): 1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω (C): 0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω Speakers: 8 cm COMPONENT OUT Bass-reflex, Magnetically Shielded Y: 1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω Power Handling Capacity: 35 W PB/PR: 0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω Impedance: 6 Ω (min) Frequency Range: 90 Hz to 20 kHz Tuner section Length of cords: 10 m Tuning Range FM : 87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz AM : 531 kHz – 1 602 kHz Dimensions (W × H × D): 105 mm × 119 mm × 126 mm (at 9 kHz intervals) Mass: 600 g (except cords) 530 kHz – 1 600 kHz (at 10 kHz intervals) Usable Sensitivity FM: 8.0 dBf (0.9 µV/75 Ω) Designs & specifications are subject to change without notice. AM loop antenna: 650 µV/m General Readable discs: DVD VIDEO, Video CD, Super Video CD, Audio CD, CD–R/RW (Audio CD, Video CD, Super Video CD, MP3 disc), DVD–R (Video format) Power Requirements: AC 110 V – 127 V/220 V – 240 V , adjustable with the voltage selector, 50 Hz/60 Hz Power Consumption: 120 W (at operation) 2 W (in standby mode) Dimensions (W × H × D): 350 mm × 80 mm × 365mm Mass: 6.5 kg EN54-58TH-A30[U].pm6 58 02.7.31, 11:12 AM,Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A., Canada, Australia and U.K.)
COMPONENT OUT PR PB Y MIN MIN 4 MIN MIN CAUTION for mains (AC) line BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your mains (AC) line voltage corresponds with the position of the voltage selector switch provided on the outside of this equipment and, if different, reset the voltage selector switch, to prevent from a damage or risk of fire/electric shock. VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED EN, CH JVC 0702KSMMDWSAM TH-A30[US,UB]cover.pm6 2 02.7.31, 11:22 AM,DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM SYSTÈME DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SISTEMA DE CINEMA DIGITAL DE DVD TH-A30 Consists of XV-THA30, SP-XA30,SP-XSA30 and SP-WA30 Consta de XV-THA30, SP-XA30, SP-XSA30 y SP-WA30 Consiste em XV-THA30, SP-XA30, SP-XSA30 e SP-WA30
STANDBY/ONAUDIO
TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUMEVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCHENTER VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGSTANDBY
AUDIO/FM MODE STANDBY/ON DSP VOLUME SOURCE DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30DIGITALRM-STHA30U DVD CINEMA SYSTEMINSTRUCTIONS MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES For Customer Use: INSTRUÇÕES Enter below the Model No. and Serial No. which are located either on the rear,
bottom or side of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference. Model No. Serial No.LVT0945-007A
[UW] TH-A30[UW]cover.pm6 1 02.8.19, 6:25 PM,Warnings, Cautions and Others / Avisos, precauciones y otras notas / Advertêcias, precauções e outras notas
Caution –– STANDBY/ON switch! Precaução –– Interruptor STANDBY/ON ! Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely. The Desconectar o cabo de alimentação para desligar a alimentação por STANDBY/ON switch in any position does not disconnect the completo. Qualquer que seja a posição de ajuste do interruptor mains line. The power can be remote controlled. STANDBY/ON , a alimentação não é completamente cortada. A alimentação pode ser controlada remotamente. Precaución –– Interruptor STANDBY/ON ! Desconectar el cable de alimentación para desactivar la alimentación totalmente. Cualquier que sea la posición de ajuste del interruptor STANDBY/ON , la alimentación no es cortada completamente. La alimentación puede ser controlada remotamente. CAUTION ATENÇÃO To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.: Para reduzir riscos de choques eléctricos, incêndio, etc.: 1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet. 1. Não retire parafusos nem desmonte as tampas ou o gabinete. 2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture. 2. Não exponha este aparelho à chuva nem à umidade. CAUTION AVISO • Do not block the ventilation openings or holes. • Não obstrua as aberturas e orifícios de ventilação. (Se (If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a os orifícios ou aberturas de ventilação estiverem newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to obstruídos por qualquer papel ou tecido, não haverá get out.) circulação do ar quente.) • Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted • Não coloque nenhum objeto com chamas, como velas candles, on the apparatus. acesas, sobre o aparelho. • When discarding batteries, environmental problems • Ao descartar as baterias, leve em consideração os must be considered and local rules or laws governing problemas que possam ser causados ao meio ambiente the disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly. e os regulamentos e leis locais e governamentais sobre • Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping recolhimento dessas baterias devem ser rigorosamente or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such seguidos. as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus. • Não exponha este aparelho à chuva, umidade, pingos ou esguichos de água, nem coloque em cima do mesmo qualquer tipo de recipiente que contenha líquidos, como por exemplo vasos.PRECAUCIÓN
Para reducir riesgos de choques eléctricos, incendio, etc.: 1. No extraiga los tornillos, los cubiertas ni la caja. 2. No exponga este aparato a la lluviaoala humedad.PRECAUCION
• No obstruya las rendijas o los orificios de ventilación. (Si las rendijas o los orificios de ventilación quedan tapados con un periódico, un trozo de tela, etc., no se podrá disipar el calor). • No ponga sobre el aparato ninguna llama al descubierto, como velas encendidas. • Cuando tenga que descartar las pilas, tenga en cuenta los problemas ambientales y observe estrictamente los reglamentos o las leyes locales sobre disposición de las pilas. • No exponga este aparato a la lluvia, humedad, goteos o salpicaduras. Tampoco ponga recipientes conteniendo líquidos, como floreros, encima del aparato.G-1
TH-A30[UW]safety.pm6 1 02.8.23, 5:13 PM, Caution: Proper Ventilation Precaução: ventilação apropriada To avoid risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from damage. Para prevenir o risco de choque elétrico ou incêndio e para proteger o Locate the apparatus as follows: aparelho contra danos. Front: No obstructions open spacing. Localize-o da seguinte maneira: Sides: No obstructions in 10 cm from the sides. Frente: Espaço aberto, sem obstruções Top: No obstructions in 10 cm from the top. Lados: Espaço de 10 cm sem obstruções nos lados Back: No obstructions in 15 cm from the back. Topo: Espaço de 10 cm sem obstruções acima Bottom: No obstructions, place on the level surface. Atrás: Espaço de 15 cm sem obstruções atrás In addition, maintain the best possible air circulation as illustrated. Parte inferior: Sem obstruções. Coloque o aparelho em superfície nivelada. Precaución: Ventilación Adecuada Mantenha, além disso, a maior circulação de ar possível, como indica Para evitar el riesgo de choque eléctrico e incendio y para proteger el a ilustração. aparato contra daños. Ubique el aparato de la siguiente manera: Frente: Espacio abierto sin obstrucciones Lados: 10 cm sin obstrucciones a los lados Parte superior: 10 cm sin obstrucciones en la parte superior Parte trasera: 15 cm sin obstrucciones en la parte trasera Fondo: Sin obstrucciones, colóquelo sobre una superficie nivelada Además, mantenga la mejor circulación de aire posible como se ilustra. Spacing 15 cm or more Espacio de 15 cm o más Espaço de 15 cm ou mais XV-THA30 Wall or obstructions Front Pared u obstrucciones Frente Parede ou obstáculo Frente Stand height 15 cm or more Allura del soporte 15 cm o más Base com altura de 15 cm ou mais Floor Piso PisoG-2
TH-A30[UW]safety.pm6 2 02.8.23, 5:13 PMPortuguês Español English
,IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS IMPORTANTE PARA PRODUCTOS LÁSER IMPOTANTE PARA PRODUTOS LASER
REPRODUCTION OF LABELS / REPRODUCCIÓN DE ETIQUETAS / REPRODUÇÃO DE ETIQUETAS 1 CLASSIFICATION LABEL, PLACED ON EXTERIORSURFACE
1 ETIQUETA DE CLASIFICACIÓN, COLOCADA EN LA SUPERFICIE EXTERIOR 1 ETIQUETA DE CLASSIFICACAO, COLOCADA EM SUPERFICIE EXTERNA CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASER LAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT PRODUCTO LASER CLASE12WARNING LABEL, PLACED INSIDE THE UNIT 2 ETIQUETA DE ADVERTENCIA, PEGADA EN EL IN- TERIOR DE LA UNIDAD 2 ETIQUETA DE ADVERTÊNCIA LOCALIZADA NA PARTE INTERNA DA UNIDADE.G-3
TH-A30[UW]safety.pm6 3 02.8.23, 5:13 PM, 1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT 2. CAUTION: Invisible laser radiation when open and inter- lock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam. 3. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the Unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel. 1. PRODUCTO LÁSER CLASE 1 2. PELIGRO: En el interior hay radiación láser invisible. Evite el contacto directo con el haz. 3. PRECAUCIÓN: No abra la tapa superior. En el interior de la unidad no existen piezas reparables por el usuario; deje todo servicio técnico en manos de personal calificado. 1. PRODUTO LASER CLASSE 1 2. PERIGO: O laser emite uma rediação invisível que é perigosa, caso o aparelho esteja abertoeatrava inoperante ou danificada. Evite exposição direta ao feixe dos raios. 3. CUIDADO: Não abra a caixa do aparelho. Não existem peças reparáveis pelo usuário na parte interna da unidade. Solicite assistência técnica somente a pessoal técnico qualificado.G-4
TH-A30[UW]safety.pm6 4 02.8.23, 5:13 PMPortuguês Español English
,Table of Contents
Parts Identification ... 2 DVD Playback ... 29 Center Unit ... 2 Showing the On-Screen Bar ... 29 Remote Control ... 3 Selecting the Subtitles ... 30 Getting Started... 5 Selecting the Audio Languages ... 30 Selecting the Multi-Angle Views ... 30 Before Installation ... 5 Checking the Remaining Time ... 31 Checking the Supplied Accessories ... 5 Disc Menu-Driven Playback ... 31 Adjusting the Voltage Selector ... 5 Moving to a Particular Portion Directly ... 32 Putting Batteries in the Remote Control ... 5 Searching for a Particular Point ... 32 Connecting the FM and AM Antennas ... 6 Repeating Playback ... 33 Speaker Layout Diagram ... 7 7 Repeat Play ... 33 Connecting the Speakers ... 8 7 A–B Repeat ... 33 Connecting Audio/Video Component ... 9 Programming the Playing Order of the Chapters Basic DVD Operations ... 11 —Program Play ... 34 1 Turn On the Power ... 11 DVD Special Effect Playback ... 36 2 Select the source ... 11 7 Still Picture/Frame-by-Frame Playback ... 36 3 Load a DVD ... 11 7 Slow Motion Playback ... 36 4 Start Playback ... 11 7 Zoom ... 36 5 Adjust the Volume ... 11 VCD/CD Playback... 37 6 Select an Appropriate Progressive Mode ... 12 Showing the On-Screen Bar ... 37 7 Activate Surround or DSP Mode ... 12 Checking the Remaining Time ... 37 8 Stop Playback ... 12 Disc Menu-Driven Playback (Only for VCD) ... 38 Basic VCD/CD Operations ... 13 Moving to a Particular Portion Directly ... 38 Searching for a Particular Point ... 38 1 Turn On the Power ... 13 Repeating Playback ... 39 2 Select the source ... 13 7 Repeat Play ... 39 3 Load a VCD/CD ... 13 7 A–B Repeat ... 39 4 Start Playback ... 13 Programming the Playing Order of the Tracks 5 Adjust the Volume ... 14 —Program Play ... 40 6 Activate DSP Mode ... 14 Selecting Playback Channel ... 41 7 Stop Playback ... 14 VCD Special Effect Playback ... 42 Basic Tuner Operations ... 15 7 Still Picture/Frame-by-Frame Playback ... 42 1 Turn On the Power ... 15 7 Slow Motion Playback ... 42 2 Select the Band ... 15 7 Zoom ... 42 3 Adjust the Volume ... 15 MP3 Introduction ... 43 4 Tune in to a Station ... 15 MP3 Playback ... 44 Other Basic Operations ... 16 Starting Playback ... 44 Enjoying Sounds from the External Component ... 16 Operations Using the On-Screen Display ... 45 Selecting an Appropriate Progressive Mode ... 16 Moving to a Particular Track Directly ... 46 Turning Off the Power with the Timer ... 16 Repeating Playback ... 46 TV Settings... 17 Tuner Operations ... 47 Changing the Color System ... 17 Setting the AM Tuner Interval Spacing ... 47 Changing the Scanning Mode ... 17 Tuning in Stations ... 47 Using Preset Tuning ... 48 Speaker Settings... 18 Selecting the FM Reception Mode ... 48 Setting the Delay Time ... 18 Setting up the DVD Preferences ... 49 Creating Realistic Sound Fields ... 20 Setting the Initial Languages ... 49 7 Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround... 20 Introducing the DVD Preference (System) ... 50 7 Dolby Surround ... 20 Setting the Parental (Rating) Level ... 52 7 DSP (Digital Signal Processor) Modes ... 21 Adjusting Stereo Sound ... 22 Operating JVC’s Components ... 54 Adjusting Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround ... 23 Operating Other Manufacturers’ TV ... 55 Activating Dynamic Range Compression ... 24 Maintenance ... 56 Adjusting Dolby Surround ... 24 Adjusting DSP Modes ... 25 Troubleshooting ... 57 Disc Introduction—DVD/VCD/CD ... 27 Specifications... 58 Basic Disc Operations ... 28 EN01-10TH-A30[UW].pm6 1 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Parts Identification Center Unit Front Panel
12345678STANDBY
AUDIO/FM MODE STANDBY/ON DSP VOLUME SOURCE DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30DIGITAL9pqwSee pages in the parentheses for details.Front Panel
1 STANDBY/ON button and STANDBY lamp (11 – 15) 7 Remote sensor 2 AUDIO/FM MODE button (30, 41, 48) 8 3/8 (play/pause) button (11 – 14, 28, 44) 3 Multi operation buttons • Pressing this button also turns on the power and • 4, ¢, and 7 changes the source to the DVD player. 4 Disc tray (11, 13) 9 DSP button (12, 14, 22, 25) 5 0 (open/close) button (11 – 14, 35, 40, 44) p VOLUME + and – buttons (11, 14, 15) • Pressing this button also turns on the power and q SOURCE button (15, 16, 47, 48) changes the source to the DVD player. w Illumination lamp (11 – 15) 6 Display windowDisplay Window
1234567TUNED ST PROGRAM PBC MHz TITLE DSP kHz LINEAR PCMLCRLFE
LS S RS89See pages in the parentheses for details.Display Window
1 Sound signal indicators (12, 14, 16, 20) 5 DSP indicator (21, 25) • PRO LOGIC, DOLBY DIGITAL, DTS, 6 PBC (Play Back Control) indicator (37) and LINEAR PCM 7 Frequency unit indicators 2 TITLE indicator (28) • MHz (for FM station) and kHz (for AM station) 3 Tuner mode indicators (15, 47, 48) 8 Audio channel indicators • TUNED and ST (stereo) • Indicates audio channels currently being played back. 4 PROGRAM indicator (34, 40, 48) 9 Main display EN01-10TH-A30[UW].pm6 2 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Parts Identification Remote Control
See pages in the parentheses for details.Remote Cotrol Remote Control
1 STANDBY/ON AUDIO button (11 – 15) 2 VCR button (54) 3 TV button (11, 13, 54, 55) STANDBY/ON 4 STEP button (36, 42, 54) 1 AUDIO 5 DISPLAY button (29, 37) 6 AUDIO/FM MODE button (30, 41, 48) 2t7SUBTITLE button (30) TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE3y8Source selecting buttons (11, 13, 15, 16, 24, 47) • DVD, FM/AM, AUX 4 DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL u • Pressing one of these buttons also turns on the power. 5 AUDIO/ 9 4, 7, 3/8, and ¢ buttons FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME6iTUNER PRESET UP and DOWN buttons (48) 7 VCR FF (Fast-forward) and REW (Rewind) buttonsDVD FM/AM AUX CONTROLopVCR CHANNEL + and – buttons (54)8 TUNING + and – buttons (15, 47) TUNER PRESET DOWN UP ¡ F. (Forward) SEARCH and 1 B. (Back) SEARCH 9 buttonsREW FF q Menu operation buttons VCR CHANNELTUNING
p • 3, 2, 5, and ∞ buttons • ENTER button B.SEARCH F.SEARCH w VOLUME + and – buttons (11, 14, 15) e TOP MENU button (31) r MENU button (31, 38) q ENTER t TV/VIDEO button (11, 13, 54, 55) y PROGRESSIVE button (12, 16, 17) u TV CHANNEL + and – buttons (54, 55) i TV VOLUME + and – buttons (54, 55) w VOLUME o VCR CONTROL button (54) TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING e ; IMPORTANT: If you press VCR CONTROL , this remote control will workraONLY for the JVC’s VCR. When you want to operate the system again, press DVD or FM/AM. ; MUTING button (11, 14) a RETURN button (38, 50, 51) RM-STHA30U DVD CINEMA SYSTEM EN01-10TH-A30[UW].pm6 3 02.8.23, 5:30 PM, nInside the Cover Inside the Cover
1 Number buttons (32, 38, 46, 54, 55) 2 SLOW button (36, 42) TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING 3 ZOOM button (36, 42) 4 ANGLE button (30) 5 REPEAT button (33, 39, 46) SOUND 6 A–B REPEAT button (33, 39) 12397CLEAR button (32, 38, 41) SETTING 8 SEARCH button (32, 38, 46) 1456p9SOUND button (22 – 26) PRO LOGIC p SETTING button (18, 19) 789qqPRO LOGIC button (16, 19, 22, 24) 2 SLOW SETUP TESTwwSETUP button (50 – 53) 0e3eTEST button (21)ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODErrD.R.C button (24) 4ttDSP MODE button (12, 14, 22, 25) REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM5yPROGRAM button (34, 35, 40, 48)y6uSLEEP button (16)CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEPuiREMAIN button (31, 37) 8 iTo open the cover of the remote control, push here then
slide downward. VOLUMEDEFM/A TM V VOLUME T AU UX TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING NERCOVP CR NTRRESE OT L B.SE VA CR RCH T CU HN AIN NG NEL ENT F.E SR EARCH TOP MENU M VOE LN UU MERETURN
1 MUTING42753SLO SW86OUND ANG SEL +E 10 9 TTING RE NTS SE PP Z RE O OAT OM C/PTUAL PLOGIC
CL TE AA < REP D E–> E IGA ES
S TRBTTTONE G PRO DO TO GS
R PA MM ODE REM EA FI FN ECTSLEEP
D RV MD -C SIN TE HM AA3S0Y USTEM RM-STHA30U DVD CINEMA SYSTEM EN01-10TH-A30[UW].pm6 4 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Getting Started Before Installation Putting Batteries in the Remote Control
General Precautions Before using the remote control, put two supplied batteries first. • DO NOT insert any metal object into the center unit. • When using the remote control, aim the remote control directly at • DO NOT disassemble the center unit or remove screws, covers, or the remote sensor on the center unit. cabinet. • DO NOT expose the center unit to rain or moisture. 1. On the back of the remote control, remove the battery cover. Locations • Install the center unit in a location that is level and protected from moisture. • The temperature around the center unit must be between 5˚C and 35˚C. • Make sure there is good ventilation around the center unit. Poor ventilation could cause overheating and damage the center unit. Handling the center unit • DO NOT touch the power cord with wet hands. 2. Insert batteries. Make sure to match the polarity: • DO NOT pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When (+) to (+) and (–) to (–). unplugging the cord, always grasp the plug so as not to damage the cord. • Keep the power cord away from the connecting cords and the antenna. The power cord may cause noise or screen interference. It is recommended to use a coaxial cable for antenna connection, since it is well-shielded against interference. • When a power failure occurs, or when you unplug the power cord, the preset settings such as preset FM/AM channels and sound adjustments may be erased in a few days. 3. Replace the cover.Checking the Supplied Accessories
Check to be sure you have all of the following supplied accessories. The number in the parentheses indicates the quantity of the pieces supplied. • Remote Control (1) • Batteries (2) • AM loop antenna (1) If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases, replace • FM antenna (1) the batteries. Use two UM-4“AAA”/IEC “R03” type dry-cell • AC Plug Adaptor (1) batteries. • Video cord (1) CAUTION: If anything is missing, contact your dealer immediately. Follow these precautions to avoid leaking or cracking cells: • Place batteries in the remote control so they match the polarity: (+) to (+) and (–) to (–).Adjusting the Voltage Selector • Use the correct type of batteries. Batteries that look similar may
differ in voltage. • Always replace both batteries at the same time. Before connections, always do the following first if necessary. • Do not expose batteries to heat or flame. Set the correct voltage for your area with the voltage selector switch on the rear panel. Slide the voltage selector using a screw driver, so the voltage number the voltage mark is set at is the same as the voltage where you are plugging in the system. EN01-10TH-A30[UW].pm6 5 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Connecting the FM and AM Antennas
If AM reception is poor, connect single vinyl-covered wire (not supplied). 123AM loop antenna (supplied) If FM reception is poor, connect outdoor FM antenna (not supplied). Snap the tabs on the loop into FM antenna (supplied) the slots of the base to assemble the AM loop antenna. COMPONENT OUT PR PB Y MIN MIN4 MIN MIN Center unit Cooling fan (See “About the cooling fan” below.) FM antenna connection AM antenna connection Connect the supplied FM antenna to the FM 75 Ω COAXIAL Connect the supplied AM loop antenna to the AM and H terminals. terminal as temporary measure. Turn the loop until you have the best reception. Extend the supplied FM antenna horizontally. • If reception is poor, connect an outdoor single vinyl-covered wire • If reception is poor, connect an outdoor antenna. Before attaching to the AM terminal. (Keep the AM loop antenna connected.) a 75 Ω coaxial cable (with a standard type connector), disconnect the supplied FM antenna. Note: If the AM loop antenna wire is covered with vinyl, remove the vinyl by twisting it as shown in the diagram. About the cooling fan A cooling fan is mounted on the rear panel of the center unit to For safety, observe the following carefully. prevent abnormal temperature inside the center unit, thus assuring • Make sure there is good ventilation around the center unit. Poor normal operation of the unit. The cooling fan automatically starts ventilation could overheat and damage the center unit. rotating to supply external cool air to the inside of the center unit • DO NOT block the cooling fan and the ventilation openings or when the internal temperature goes up. holes. (If they are blocked by a newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.) • DO NOT touch the speaker cords to the cooling fan. EN01-10TH-A30[UW].pm6 6 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Getting Started Speaker Layout Diagram Center unit STANDBY
AUDIO/FM MODE STANDBY/ONDIGITALDSP VOLUME SOURCESURROUNDDVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30DIGITALRight front Subwoofer
speakerLeft front
speakerCenter speaker Left rear Right rear
speaker speaker COMPONENT OUT PR PB Y MIN MIN 4 MIN MINTo right rear To center speaker To left front speaker
speakerTo left rear To subwoofer To right front speaker
speaker EN01-10TH-A30[UW].pm6 7 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Connecting the Speakers When setting the speakers
To obtain the best possible sound from this system, you need to Connect the satellite speakers and subwoofer to the terminals on the place all the speakers except the subwoofer at the same distance rear panel using speaker cords supplied. from the listening position with each front faced toward the listener. Labels are attached to the speaker cords to indicate the terminals to Since bass sound is non-directional, you can place a subwoofer be connected. wherever you like. Normally place it in front of you. • Connect the red cord to the red (+) terminal, and the black cord to Left front Center speaker Right front speaker speaker the black (–) terminal respectively. CAUTION: Subwoofer Use speakers with the SPEAKER IMPEDANCE indicated by the speaker terminals.Connecting speaker cords to the terminals
123Left rear Right rear speaker speaker If your speakers cannot be placed at the same distance from the listening position You can adjust the delay time of the center speaker and rear speakers. For in-depth information about adjusting the delay time, see “Setting the Delay Time” on page 18 and 19. 1 Press and hold the terminal clamp. Note: 2 Insert the speaker cord. You can change the phase of subwoofer sounds by connecting the speaker cords to the terminals inversely—the red cord to the black 3 Release the finger from the clamp. terminal, and the black cord to the red terminal. You may get the more effective bass sounds by changing the phase. Notes: • If the speaker cord is covered with vinyl, remove the CAUTION: vinyl by twisting it as shown in the diagram. • Make sure the core wire of speaker cords do not expose • When attaching the satellite speakers on the wall, have them to out of the terminals.This could cause short-circuit. attached to the wall by a qualified person. DO NOT attach the satellite speakers on the wall by yourself to avoid an unexpected damage of their falling from the wall, caused by incorrect attachment or weakness in the wall. • Care is required in selecting a location for attaching speakers to the wall. Injury to personnel, or damage to equipment, may result if the speakers are attached in a location which interferes with daily activities. EN01-10TH-A30[UW].pm6 8 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Getting Started Connecting Audio/Video Component
Turn the power off to all components before connections. Audio component connection Connect another component to the center unit with the Illustrations of the input/output terminals below are typical audio cords. examples. Use the cords supplied with another component or purchase When you connect another component, refer also to its them at an electric appliance store. manuals since the terminal name actually printed on the rear vary among the components. Audio cord (not supplied) If you connect a sound-enhancing device such as a graphic equalizer between the source component and the center unit, the sound output through this system may be distorted. DBS Tuner Center unit COMPONENT OUT PR PB Y MD RecorderMIN
Cassette DeckAUDIO LEFT RIGHT VCR OUT TV
EN01-10TH-A30[UW].pm6 9 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,TV connection
The S-video cord and the component video cord are not supplied with this system. Use the cords supplied with another components or purchase them at an electric appliance store.A Composite video cord (supplied) C Component video cord (not supplied)
Red BlueB
S-video cord (not supplied) Green You can select one of three connection types— A , B , and C . Illustrations below are typical examples. • If your TV has S-video (Y/C-separation) and/or component video When you connect the TV, refer also to its manual since the (Y, P , P ) jacks, connect them using an S-video cord (not terminal names actually printed on the rear vary among theR B supplied) B and/or component video cord (not supplied) C . components. By using these jacks, you can get a better picture quality—in the order : Component video > S-video > Composite video. • If your TV supports the progressive video input, you can enjoy a high quality picture by making the progressive scanning mode active (see page 17.)A B Center unit TV
CONPONENT OUT PR PB Y MIN MIN MIN MIN CONPONENT OUT PR PB Y Green YC
Red Green Blue PB/CB PR/CR Blue RedNow, you can plug the power cord of the center unit into the AC outlet.
Note: Keep the power cord away from the connecting cords and the antenna cables. The power cord may cause noise or screen interference. EN01-10TH-A30[UW].pm6 10 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Basic DVD Operations
This manual mainly explains operations using the buttons on 2 Select the Source the remote control. You can also use the buttons on the center DVD unit if they have the similar names (or marks) as those on the Press DVD. remote control. The source changes to DVD. If operations using the center unit are different from those using the remote control, they are then explained. 1 3 Load a DVDSTANDBY/ON AUDIO STANDBY/ON AUDIO On the front panel ONLY: Press 0 to open the disc tray, then place a DVD correctly TV TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE 6 PROGRESSIVE with its label side up. DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL TV/VIDEO AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME 2 DVD VCR DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL 8 TUNER PRESET7 DOWN UP 4 3/8 CORRECT INCORRECT REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH ENTER 4 Start Playback TUNER PRESET55VOLUME + Press 3/8.VOLUME – VOLUME The disc tray closes. “LOADING” appears for TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING MUTING a while. • You can also start playback by closing theSOUND
123disc tray using 0 on the front panel.SETTING
456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST05Adjust the Volume ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE 7 DSP MODE REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM To increase the volume, press and hold VOLUME +. CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP To decrease the volume, press and hold VOLUME –.VOLUME
• Before playing the disc, select the color system to match the your TV. See “Changing the Color System” on page 17. CAUTION: • For in-depth information about DVD operations, see Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any source. If pages 27 to 36. the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound energy can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin your speakers. 1 Turn On the Power Notes: Before turning on the system, turn on your TV and select the correct • By pressing VOLUME + or – repeatedly, you can adjust the volume video input. (See the manual supplied with your TV.) level step by step. • When you use a JVC’s TV, you can turn on your TV by pressing • The volume level can be adjusted within 51 steps—“MIN (minimum),” TV on the remote control, and select the video input by 01 to 49, and “MAX (maximum).” pressing TV/VIDEO. (If your TV is not a JVC’s, see “Operating Other Manufacturers’ TV” on page 55.) To turn off the sounds temporarily • For changing the OSD messages—the information on the TV screen—into the desired language, see “Setting the Initial From the remote control ONLY: Languages” on pages 49 and 50. Press MUTING. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON To restore the sound, press STANDBY/ON on the front panel). AUDIO MUTING again. The STANDBY lamp goes off and the illumination • Pressing VOLUME + or – also restores the sound. lamp on the center unit lights up. The source indication selected previously appears on the display. EN11-19TH-A30[UW].pm6 11 02.8.23, 5:30 PM, ns 6 Select an Appropriate Progressive Mode To activate DSP modes Press DSP MODE (or DSP on the front panel). DSP MODE You can select the progressive mode according to the picture type The DSP indicator lights up and the current DSP mode (film or video source). appears on the display for a while. • Each time you press the button, DSP mode changes Press PROGRESSIVE repeatedly until the PROGRESSIVE as follows: progressive mode you want appears. • Each time you press the button, the progressive THEATER HALL LIVE CLUB mode changes as follows: Normal VIDEO MODE FILM MODE indication DANCE CLUB (canceled) AUTO MODE — For in-depth information about DSP modes, see “Creating Realistic Sound Fields” on pages 21, 25, and 26. Notes: • This mode is available only when progressive scanning mode is selected. Note: • For in-depth information about each progressive mode, see page 16. Before activating surround or DSP mode, adjust the speaker setting to bring out the best performance from this system. 7 For in-depth information about adjusting the speaker setting, see Activate Surround or DSP Mode “Speaker Settings” on pages 18 and 19. You can enjoy two kinds of surround—Digital Multichannel Surround (Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround) and DSP modes. 8 Stop Playback Digital Multichannel Surround—Dolby Digital Press 7 twice. TUNER PRESET and DTS Digital Surround Playback stops completely and “DVD” appears on the display. (The DVD player goes on Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround takes effect only when you working for 3 minutes after playback stops.) enjoy a disc encoded with its signals—the DOLBY DIGITAL or • This system can memorize the end point even DTS indicator lights up on the display. when you press 7 once. When you start playback again by pressing 3/8, playback begins from where it has been stopped— Sound signal Resume play. indicators on the display To remove the loaded disc Press 0. “OPEN” appears on the display and the disc tray comes out. To activate Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround To close the disc tray, press 0 again. When a disc encoded with the Dolby Digital or DTS Digital • If you do not press the button, the disc tray closes Surround is loaded, the system detects it and starts playing the disc automatically after 3 minutes. automatically with Multichannel Surround activated. – For in-depth information about surround modes, see “Creating Realistic Sound Fields” on pages 20 and 23 . To turn off the power (into standby) STANDBY/ON Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (orAUDIO
DSP modes—THEATER, HALL, LIVE CLUB, STANDBY/ON on the front panel). DANCE CLUB The illumination lamp goes off and the STANDBY lamp lights up. DSP modes take effect only when you enjoy a disc recorded using • If you press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON Linear PCM—the LINEAR PCM indicator lights up on the display. on the front panel) while the disc tray is kept open, the disc tray closes automatically, then the system is turned off. • A small amount of power is consumed even in standby mode. To Sound signal turn the power off completely, unplug the AC power cord. indicators on the display EN11-19TH-A30[UW].pm6 12 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Basic VCD/CD Operations
2 Select the Source 1 STANDBY/ON AUDIO STANDBY/ON DVD AUDIO Press DVD. TV TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL TV/VIDEO 3 Load a VCD/CD AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME 2 VCR DVD DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL On the front panel ONLY: 7 Press 0 to open the disc tray, then place a disc correctly7 TUNER PRESETDOWN UP 4 3/8 with its label side up. REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCHENTER
CORRECT INCORRECT 5 VOLUME – 5 VOLUME +VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING MUTING • When using a CD single (8 cm), place it on the inner circle of the SOUND disc tray. 123SETTING • Continued use of irregular shape CDs (heart-shape, octagonal, 456PRO LOGIC etc.) can damage the center unit. 789SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE 6 DSP MODE REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM 4 Start Playback CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP Press 3/8. TUNER PRESET The disc tray closes. “LOADING” appears for a while. • You can also start playback by closing the • Before playing the disc, select the color system to disc tray using 0 on the front panel. match the your TV. See “Changing the Color System” on page 17. • SVCD can be operated by using the VCD operation procedure. • For in-depth information about VCD/CD operations, see pages 27, 28, and 37 to 42. 1 Turn On the Power Before turning on the system, turn on your TV if necessary and select the correct video input. (See the manual supplied with your TV.) • When you use a JVC’s TV, you can turn on your TV by pressing TV on the remote control, and select the video input by pressing TV/VIDEO. (If your TV is not a JVC’s, see “Operating Other Manufacturers’ TV” on page 55.) • For changing the OSD messages—the information on the TV screen—into the desired language, see “Setting the Initial Languages” on pages 49 and 50. Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON STANDBY/ON on the front panel). AUDIO The STANDBY lamp goes off and the illumination lamp on the center unit lights up. The source indication selected previously appears on the display. EN11-19TH-A30[UW].pm6 13 02.8.23, 5:30 PM, 5 Note: Adjust the Volume Before activating DSP mode, adjust the speaker setting to bring out the best performance from this system. To increase the volume, press and hold VOLUME +. For in-depth information about adjusting the speaker setting, see To decrease the volume, press and hold VOLUME –. “Speaker Settings” on pages 18 and 19. VOLUME 7 Stop Playback CAUTION: Press 7 twice. TUNER PRESET Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any source. If Playback stops completely and “VCD” or “CD” the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound energy appears on the display. (The DVD player goes can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin your speakers. on working for 3 minutes after playback stops.) • This system can memorize the end point even when you press 7 Notes: once. When you start playback again by pressing 3/8, playback begins from where it has been stopped—Resume play. • By pressing VOLUME + or – repeatedly, you can adjust the volume level step by step. • The volume level can be adjusted within 51 steps—“MIN (minimum),” To remove the loaded disc 01 to 49, and “MAX (maximum).” Press 0. “OPEN” appears on the display and the disc tray comes out. To turn off the sounds temporarily To close the disc tray, press 0 again. From the remote control ONLY: • If you do not press the button, the disc tray closes Press MUTING. automatically after 3 minutes.TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING To restore the sound, press MUTING again. To turn off the power (into standby) • Pressing VOLUME + or – also restores the sound. Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON STANDBY/ON on the front panel). AUDIO 6 The illumination lamp goes off and the STANDBYActivate DSP Mode lamp lights up. You can enjoy DSP modes. • If you press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) while the disc tray is kept open, the disc tray DSP modes—THEATER, HALL, LIVE CLUB, closes automatically, then the system is turned off. DANCE CLUB • A small amount of power is consumed even in standby mode. To turn the power off completely, unplug the AC power cord. DSP modes take effect only when you enjoy a disc recorded using Linear PCM—the LINEAR PCM indicator lights up on the display. Sound signal indicators on the display To activate DSP modes Press DSP MODE (or DSP on the front panel). DSP MODE The DSP indicator lights up and the current DSP mode appears on the display for a while. • Each time you press the button, DSP mode changes as follows: THEATER HALL LIVE CLUB Normal indication DANCE CLUB (canceled) — For in-depth information about DSP modes, see “Creating Realistic Sound Fields” on pages 21, 25, and 26. EN11-19TH-A30[UW].pm6 14 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Basic Tuner Operations
1 3 Adjust the VolumeSTANDBY/ON AUDIO STANDBY/ON To increase the volume, press and hold VOLUME +.AUDIO
To decrease the volume, press and hold VOLUME –. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVEVOLUME
DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME 2 FM/AM VCR CAUTION:DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any source. If TUNER PRESET DOWN UP the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound energy44can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin your speakers.TUNING – REW FFVCR CHANNEL TUNING +TUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH Notes: • By pressing VOLUME + or – repeatedly, you can adjust the volume level step by step.ENTER
• The volume level can be adjusted within 51 steps—“MIN (minimum),” 3 3 01 to 49, and “MAX (maximum).”VOLUME – VOLUME + • You can turn off the sounds temporarily by pressing MUTING.VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING MUTING 4 Tune in to a Station From the remote control: • For in-depth information about tuner operations, see Press and hold TUNING + VCR CHANNEL “Tuner Operations” on pages 47 and 48. or – until the station TUNING • 10 kHz interval spacing is the initial setting for AM frequency starts changing B.SEARCH F.SEARCH tuner. You can change the interval spacing. See continuously on the display. “Setting the AM Tuner Interval Spacing” on page 47. The system starts searching for a station. On the front panel: 1 Turn On the Power 1) Press 7 so that “MANUAL” appears on the display. 2) Press and hold ¢ or 4 until the station frequency starts Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or changing continuously on the display. STANDBY/ON on the front panel). STANDBY/ON The system starts searching for a station.AUDIO
The STANDBY lamp goes off and the illumination lamp lights up on the center unit. Notes: The source indication selected previously appears • When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the system on the display. stops searching, and the indicator lights up on the display. • When an FM stereo program is received, the indicator also 2 lights up. Select the Band • When you press the button repeatedly, the frequency changes step by step. From the remote control: Press FM/AM. To turn off the power (into standby) FM/AM The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON • Each time you press the button, the band alternates STANDBY/ON on the front panel) again. AUDIO between FM and AM. The illumination lamp goes off and the STANDBY lamp lights up. On the front panel: • A small amount of power is consumed even in Press SOURCE repeatedly until the desired band (FM or AM) standby mode. To turn the power off completely, unplug the AC appears on the display. SOURCE power cord. The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. • Each time you press the button, the source changes as follows:DVD player* AUX IN AM FM
* “WAIT” appears on the display. EN11-19TH-A30[UW].pm6 15 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Other Basic Operations
• When Dolby Surround activates, the PRO LOGIC indicator TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE PROGRESSIVE lights up on the display. DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL – For in-depth information about Pro Logic modes, see “Creating AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME Realistic Sound Fields” on pages 20 and 24.VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL AUX TUNER PRESET Selecting an Appropriate Progressive Mode DOWN UP REW FF You can select an appropriate progressive mode according to the VCR CHANNEL TUNING picture type (film or video source). B.SEARCH F.SEARCH From the remote control ONLY: Press PROGRESSIVE repeatedly during playback PROGRESSIVEENTER
until the progressive mode you want appears. • Each time you press the button, the progressive mode changes as follows:VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING VIDEO MODE FILM MODESOUND
123AUTO MODESETTING
456PRO LOGIC VIDEO MODE : Suitable for playing back a video source disc.PRO LOGIC789FILM MODE : Suitable for playing back a film or progressive SLOW SETUP TEST 0 source disc. ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE AUTO MODE : Normally select this. Used to play a disc REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM containing both video and film source CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP SLEEP materials. This system recognizes the picture type (film or video source) of the current chapter.Enjoying Sounds from the External • If the playback picture is unclear or noisy, or the oblique lines of Component the picture are rough, try to change to other modes.
You can enjoy sounds from the external component connected to the Notes: AUX IN jacks on the rear panel of the center unit. • This mode is available only when progressive scanning mode is selected (see page 17). 1 • For VCD/SVCD playback, VIDEO MODE is selected automatically Select AUX as the source. and cannot be changed. From the remote control: Press AUX. AUX Turning Off the Power with the Timer Source changes to the external component connected to the AUX IN jacks. You can fall asleep while listening to music—Sleep Timer. On the front panel: From the remote control ONLY: Press SOURCE repeatedly until “AUX IN” Press SLEEP.SOURCE SLEEP appears on the display. • Each time you press the button, the shut-off time • Each time you press the button, the source changes as follows: changes as follows:DVD player* AUX IN 10 20 30 60 AM FM OFF 150 120 90
(Canceled) * “WAIT” appears on the display. When the shut-off time comes, the system turns off automatically. 2 Start playback on the external component. • For in-depth information about the external equipment, see the manual supplied for it. To check or change the time remaining until the shut-off time When you listen to analog sounds encoded with Dolby Press SLEEP once. Surround, you can enjoy Dolby Surround. SLEEPThe remaining time (in minutes) appears on the display. To activate Dolby Surround, go to step 3. • By pressing SLEEP, you can change the shut-off time. 3 Press PRO LOGIC to activate Dolby PRO LOGICSurround. To cancel the Sleep Timer
• Each time you press the button, Dolby Surround Press SLEEP repeatedly until “OFF” appears on the mode changes as follows: SLEEPdisplay.PRO LOGIC 3 STEREO • Turning off the power also cancels the Sleep Timer. STEREO
(canceled) EN11-19TH-A30[UW].pm6 16 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,TV Settings Changing the Color System Notes
• Progressive scanning mode is available only when color system of NTSC is selected. This system is compatible with the PAL and NTSC systems. Select • Some progressive TVs and High-Definition TVs are not fully the color sytem to match the color system of your TV. Make sure compatible with this system, resulting in the unnatural picture when that the color system of a DVD, Video CD, or SVCD disc labeled on playing back a DVD in the progressive scanning mode. the package matches your TV. In such a case, change the scanning mode to “I–SCAN MODE.” • You can change the color system only when the unit is on To check the compatibility of your TV, contact your local JVC standby. customer service center. • All JVC progressive TVs and High-Definition TVs are fully compatible with this system. On the front panel ONLY: 1 Press and hold ¢ for a while. • During holding the button, the color system To select an appropriate progressive mode for playback pictures, see alternates between “NTSC” and “PAL.” “Selecting an Appropriate Progressive Mode” on page 16. 2 Release ¢ to select the color system you want. About scanning system The conventional scanning method to display video signals on the TV screen is called “Interlaced scanning.” With this method,Changing the Scanning Mode only half of the horizontal lines (called a “field”) are displayed at
a time. So two fields complete a single picture (frame); i.e., the This system supports the progressive scanning system (525p*) as first field, containing all the odd-numbered lines, is followed by well as the conventional interlaced scanning system (525i*). the second field, containing all the even-numbered lines. If your TV equipped with component video jacks supports the On the other hand, the Progressive scanning system scans all progressive video input, you can enjoy a high quality picture by horizontal lines at a time, so you can double the number of activating the progressive scanning mode. scanning lines displayed at a time, resulting in a flicker-free, • Refer also to the instruction manuals supplied with your TV. high-density picture. • If your TV equipped with component video jacks does not support To enjoy the progressive scanned picture, a monitor (or TV or the progressive video input, do not change the scanning mode to projector) connected to the system must support the progressive the progressive scanning mode (P–SCAN MODE.) video inputs. Depending on the material source format, DVD video can be * 525p and 525i indicate the number of scanning lines and scanning classified into two types; film source and video source (note that format of a video signal. some DVD video contain both film source and video source). • 525p indicates 525 scanning lines with progressive format. Film sources are recorded as 24-frame-per-second data, while • 525i indicates 525 scanning lines with interlaced format. (NTSC) video sources are recorded as 30-frame-per-second (60- field-per-second interlaced). From the remote control ONLY: When this system plays back a film source data, uninterlaced progressive output signals are created using the original data. 1 Press DVD. When a video source is played back, the unit interleaves linesDVD between the interlaced lines to create the pseudo uninterlaced You can change the scanning mode only when DVD is selected as the source and playback stops. picture and outputs as the progressive signals. If a disc is no loaded, go to step 3. 2 Press . TUNER PRESET7 Playback stops. 3 Press and hold PROGRESSIVE for a PROGRESSIVE while. • Each time you press and hold the button, the scanning mode alternates between “I–SCAN MODE” and “P–SCAN MODE”. I (Interlace)–SCAN MODE : Select this if your TV equipped with component video jacks does not support the progressive video input (conventional TV). P (Progressive)–SCAN MODE : Select this if your TV equipped with component video jacks supports the progressive video input. EN11-19TH-A30[UW].pm6 17 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Speaker Settings Setting the Delay Time
Adjust the delay time of the sounds from the center speaker and the STANDBY/ON AUDIO rear speakers, comparing to that of the sounds from the front speakers. If the distance to the center speaker* and/or the rear TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE speakers** from your listening point is almost the same as from the DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL front speakers, select “00 MS (msec).” * You can adjust the delay time only when the DOLBY DIGITAL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME or DTS indicator is lit on the display.VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL ** You can adjust the delay time only when the DOLBY DIGITAL, DTS, or PRO LOGIC indicator is lit on the display. TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF VCR CHANNEL TUNING For Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround: B.SEARCH F.SEARCH Before you start, remember... 2 3 There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is ENTER canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again. 1 Select and play a DVD encoded with Dolby VOLUME Digital or DTS Digital Surround. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGSOUND
123SETTING 2 Press SETTING repeatedly until one of SETTINGSETTING
456delay time indications (with the current PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC789setting*) appears on the display. SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP • Each time you press the button, the indication in the main display changes as follows:C–DLY R–DLY Normal indication
(canceled) C–DLY (Center delay) : To register delay time for center speaker—from 0 msec to 5 msec R–DLY (Rear delay) : To register delay time for rear speakers—from 0 msec to 15 msec * The initial setting for the center speaker is “00 MS.” The initial setting for the rear speakers is “00 MS.” If you have already changed the setting, a different value will be shown. 3 Press 3 or 2 to adjust delay time. • 3 : Increases delay time. • 2 : Decreases delay time. ENTER • 1 msec increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to 30 cm increase (or decrease) in distance. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other delay time. EN11-19TH-A30[UW].pm6 18 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Speaker Settings
For Dolby Pro Logic: Left front Center speaker Right front Before you start, remember... speaker speaker There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is Subwoofer canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again. 1 Press AUX to select the external AUX 3.0 m component as the source. 2.7 m 2.4m2Start playing a source encoded with Dolby 2.1 mSurround.
3 Press PRO LOGIC repeatedly on the PRO LOGIC remote control to select Dolby Pro Left rear Right rearspeaker speakerLogic.
4 Press SETTING repeatedly until one of SETTING delay time indications (with the current 1 msec increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to setting*) appears on the display. 30 cm increase (or decrease) in distance. Ex. : In this case, set C–DLY to “01 MS” and R–DLY to “03 MS” • Each time you press the button, the indication in the main display changes as follows: R–DLY Normal indication(canceled) R–DLY (Rear delay) : To register delay time for rear speakers—from 15 msec to 30 msec. * The initial setting for the rear speakers is “15 MS.” If you have already changed the setting, a different value will be shown. 5 Press 3 or 2 to adjust delay time. • 3 : Increases delay time. • 2 : Decreases delay time. ENTER • 1 msec increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to 30 cm increase (or decrease) in distance. EN11-19TH-A30[UW].pm6 19 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Creating Realistic Sound Fields
You can use the following surround to reproduce a realistic sound Dolby Pro Logic and Dolby 3 Stereo field. Dolby Surround encoding format records the left front channel, • Digital Multichannel Surround—Dolby Digital and DTS Digital right front channel, center channel, and rear channel signals (total 4 Surround channels) into 2 channels. • Dolby Surround The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built in this system decodes these 2 • DSP (Digital Signal Processor) modes channel signals into original 4 channel signals—matrix-based multichannel reproduction, and allows you to enjoy a realistic stereo sound in your listening room. Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround To enjoy surround effectively, all the speakers need to be When one of Dolby Surround is selected, the PRO LOGIC indicator connected and activated. lights up on the display. Dolby Digital* Used to reproduce multichannel sound tracks of the software Indications on the display for each surround encoded with Dolby Digital ( ). • Dolby Digital Dolby Digital encoding method (so-called discrete 5.1 channel digital audio format) records and digitally compresses the left front channel, right front channel, center channel, left rear channel, right rear channel, and LFE channel signals (total 6 channels, but LFE channel is counted as 0.1 channel. Therefore, called 5.1 channel). Since each channel is completely independent from the other • DTS Digital Surround channel signals to avoid interference, you can obtain much better sound quality with much stereo and surround effects. In addition, Dolby Digital enables stereo rear sounds, and sets the cutoff frequency of the rear treble at 20 kHz, compared to 7 kHz for Dolby Pro Logic. These facts enhance the sound movement and being-there feelings much more than Dolby Pro Logic. • Dolby Pro Logic When the system detects Dolby Digital signals, the DOLBY DIGITAL indicator lights up on the display. DTS Digital Surround** • Dolby 3 Stereo Used to reproduce multichannel sound tracks of the software encoded with DTS Digital Surround ( ). DTS Digital Surround is another discrete 5.1 channel digital audio format available on CD, LD, and DVD software. Compared to Dolby Digital, audio compression rate is relatively low. • DSP* This fact allows DTS Digital Surround format to add breadth and depth to the reproduced sounds. As a result, DTS Digital Surround features natural, solid and clear sound. When the system detects DTS Digital Surround signals, the DTS indicator lights up on the display. * When you select FM/AM or AUX as the source, the Linear PCM indicator ( ) does not light up. — According to the speaker settings, some audio channel indicators do not light up. In this case, set the speaker setting appropriately. Dolby Surround* Used to reproduce sound tracks of the VCR tapes encoded with Dolby Surround ( DOLBY SURROUND ). This is only used for the sound sources coming through the AUX IN jacks. * Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro **Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Logic,” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992–1997 Dolby pending. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of Laboratories. All rights reserved. Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ©1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. EN20-26TH-A30[UW].pm6 20 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Creating Realistic Sound Fields
DSP (Digital Signal Processor) Modes To check the speaker connections and settings using the test DSP modes have been designed to create important acoustic tone surround elements. 1. Select and play a DVD encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS The sound heard in a theater, a hall, a live club, or a dance club Digital Surround. consists of direct sound and indirect sound—early reflections and 2. Press TEST on the remote control. TEST reflections from behind. Direct sounds reach the listener directly The test tone comes out from the speakers (except without any reflection. On the other hand, indirect sounds are the subwoofer) in the order. delayed by the distances of the ceiling and walls. • If there is a speaker from which no sounds comes out, check These indirect sounds are important elements of the acoustic the speaker’s connection (see pages 7 and 8). surround effects. 3. Press TEST again to stop the test tone. The following DSP modes are provided with this unit. THEATER : Gives the feeling of a theater. HALL : Gives clear vocal and the feeling of a concert hall. LIVE CLUB : Gives the feeling of a live music club with a low ceiling. DANCE CLUB : Gives a throbbing bass beat. These DSP modes can be used to add the acoustic surround effects while reproducing stereo analog software or Linear PCM digital software, and can give you a real “being there” feeling. When one of the DSP modes is selected, the DSP indicator lights up on the display. Available surround according to the input signal format : Possible : Impossible Multichannel Pro Logic* DSP (canceled)Surround Surround Pro Logic 3 Stereo THEATER HALL LIVE CLUB DANCE CLUB STEREO Analog Linear PCM Dolby Digital Multichannel Dolby Surround DTS Digital Surround * You can use Pro Logic mode for all 2 channel sources, but surround effect does not work sufficiently except Dolby Surround encoded source. EN20-26TH-A30[UW].pm6 21 02.8.23, 5:30 PM Input Signal format, 3 To adjust the output balance for the front speakers REW FF VCR CHANNEL TUNING 1) Press SOUND repeatedly until the SOUND B.SEARCH F.SEARCH adjustment indication for the front speakers appears on the display.2 3 ENTER • Each time you press the button, the adjustment indication on the display changes as follows: 00 F 00 00 R 00 CENVOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING Normal indication SW REAR SOUND SOUND (canceled) 123SETTING
456PRO LOGIC 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust thePRO LOGIC789output balance. SLOW SETUP TEST DSP MODE 3 : Decreases the left speakerANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE output, or restores the right ENTER REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM speaker output. CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP 2 : Decreases the right speaker output, or restores the left speaker output. • The output balance changes from OFF (silence), –06 (most reduction) to 00 (no reduction). • “00 F 00” is the initial setting (the output balance is at theAdjusting Stereo Sound center position). If you have already changed the setting,
another value will appear. You can adjust the following settings. It is recommended that you make adjustments from your actual 4 To adjust the output level for the subwoofer listening point while listening to reproduced sounds. 1) Press SOUND repeatedly to select SOUND – Output balance for the front speakers “SW.” – Output level for the subwoofer • Each time you press the button, the adjustment Once you adjust these items, the adjustments take effect for all the indication on the display changes as follows: surround modes. 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN Before you start, remember... Normal indication SW REAR • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is (canceled) canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again. 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the 1 Select and play any source except Dolby Digital output level. or DTS Digital Surround. 3 : Increases the output level. 2 : Decreases the output level. 2 • The output level changes from ENTERCancel Dolby Surround or DSP modes if they are –6 to +6. activated. • “SW 0dB” is the initial setting. If For deactivating Dolby Surround: PRO LOGIC you have already changed the Press PRO LOGIC on the remote control until settings, another value will appear. “STEREO” appears on the display. For deactivating DSP modes: DSP MODE Press DSP MODE (or DSP on the front panel) until the DSP indicator goes off from the display. Now, you are ready to start adjustments. • To adjust the output balance for the front speakers, go to the next step. • To adjust the output level for the subwoofer, go to step 4. EN20-26TH-A30[UW].pm6 22 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Creating Realistic Sound Fields
• Each time you press the button, the adjustment indicationVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL AUX on the display changes as follows: TUNER PRESET 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN DOWN UP REW FF VCR CHANNEL Normal indication TUNING SW REAR (canceled) B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 00 F (Front) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the front23ENTER speakers. 00 R (Rear) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the rear speakers.VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING • “00 F 00” and “00 R 00” are the initial setting (the output balances are at the center position). If you have already SOUND SOUND changed the setting, another value will appear. 123SETTING
456PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the789output balance. SLOW SETUP TEST D.R.C DSP MODE 3 : Decreases the left speakerANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE output, or restores the right ENTER REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM speaker output. CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP 2 : Decreases the right speaker output, or restores the left speaker output. • Each output balance changes fromAdjusting Dolby Digital and OFF (silence), –06 (most reduction) to 00 (no reduction). DTS Digital Surround
3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the other speaker. You can adjust the following settings while activating Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround. 3 To adjust the output levels for the center speaker, It is recommended that you make adjustments from your actual the rear speakers, and the subwoofer listening point while listening to reproduced sounds. 1) Press SOUND repeatedly to select the – Output balance for the front speakers “CEN,” “REAR,” or “SW.” SOUND – Output balance for the rear speakers • Each time you press the button, the adjustment – Output level for the center speaker* indication on the display changes as follows: – Output level for the rear speakers* – Output level for the subwoofer* 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN * The adjustment is separately memorized for Digital Multichannel Surround (Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround), and for Normal indication SW REAR (canceled) Dolby Pro Logic. Before you start, remember... CEN (Center) : To adjust the output level for center • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is speaker (from –6 dB to +6 dB). canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again. REAR : To adjust the output level for rear speakers (from –6 dB to +6 dB). 1 Select and play a DVD encoded with Dolby SW (Subwoofer) : To adjust the output level for subwooferDigital or DTS Digital Surround. (from –6 dB to +6 dB).
Now, you are ready to start adjustments. • “CEN 0dB,” “REAR 0dB,” and “SW 0dB” are the initial • To adjust the output balance for the front speakers and the rear settings. If you have already changed the settings, another speakers, go to the next step. value will appear. • To adjust the output level for the center speaker, the rear speakers, and the subwoofer, go to step 3. 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the output level. 2 3 : Increases the output level.To adjust the output balance for the front ENTER2 : Decreases the output level. speakers and the rear speakers 1) Press SOUND repeatedly until one of SOUND 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the following adjustment indications the other speakers. appears on the display. EN20-26TH-A30[UW].pm6 23 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Activating Dynamic Range Compression 4 To adjust the output balance for the front
speakers and the rear speakers You can enjoy a powerful sound even at a low volume level by 1) Press SOUND repeatedly until one of SOUND compressing the dynamic range (difference between the maximum the following adjustment indications and minimum sounds). appears on the display. • This function takes effect only when Dolby Digital is activated. • Each time you press the button, the adjustment indication From the remote control ONLY: on the display changes as follows: Press D.R.C. D.R.C 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN • Each time you press the button, the dynamic range compression mode alternates between on and off. Normal indication SW REAR Select “DRC ON” while watching the DVD at night. (You can (canceled) obtain a powerful sound at a low volume.) 00 F (Front) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the front speakers. 00 R (Rear) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the rearAdjusting Dolby Surround speakers.
You can adjust the following settings while activating Dolby • When selecting “3 STEREO,” you cannot adjust the output Surround. balance for the rear speakers. It is recommended that you make adjustments from your actual • “00 F 00” and “00 R 00” are the initial settings (the output listening point while listening to reproduced sounds. balances are at the center position). If you have already – Output balance for the front speakers changed the setting, another value will appear. – Output balance for the rear speakers – Output level for the center speaker* 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the – Output level for the rear speakers* output balance. – Output level for the subwoofer* 3 : Decreases the left speaker • When Dolby 3 Stereo is activated, you cannot adjust the rear output, or restores the right ENTER speakers. speaker output. * The adjustment is separately memorized for Digital Multichannel 2 : Decreases the right speaker Surround (Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround), and for output, or restores the left Dolby Pro Logic. speaker output. • Dolby Surround cannot be used with DSP modes. Once one of • Each output balance changes from Dolby Surround is activated, DSP modes in use will be canceled. OFF (silence), –06 (most reduction) to 00 (no reduction). Before you start, remember... • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the other speakers. canceled before you finish, start from step 3 again. 1 Press AUX to select the external AUX component as the source. 2 Start playing a source encoded with DolbySurround.
3 Press PRO LOGIC repeatedly on the PRO LOGIC remote control to select Dolby ProLogic or Dolby 3 Stereo.
The PRO LOGIC indicator lights up on the display. • Each time you press the button, the indication changes as follows: PRO LOGIC 3 STEREOSTEREO
(canceled) Now, you are ready to start adjustments. • To adjust the output balance for the front speakers and the rear speakers, go to the next step. • To adjust the output level for the center speaker, the rear speakers, and the subwoofer, go to step 5 on the next page. TO BE CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE EN20-26TH-A30[UW].pm6 24 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Creating Realistic Sound Fields Adjusting DSP Modes
REW FF VCR CHANNEL You can adjust the following settings while activating DSP modes.TUNING
It is recommended that you make adjustments from your actual B.SEARCH F.SEARCH listening point while listening to reproduced sounds. 2 3 – Output balance for the front speakers ENTER – Output balance for the rear speakers – Output level for the rear speakers* – Output level for the subwoofer*VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING * The adjustment is separately memorized for DSP modes. • DSP modes cannot be used with Dolby Surround. Once one of SOUND SOUND123DSP modes is activated, Dolby Surround in use will be canceled. SETTING • When you play back a DVD encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS456PRO LOGIC Digital Surround, DSP MODE button (or DSP button on the center789SLOW SETUP TEST unit) does not work. 0 DSP MODE ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE Before you start, remember... REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again. 1 Select and play any source except Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround. 5 To adjust the output level for the center speaker, 2 Press DSP MODE (or DSP on the front DSP MODE the rear speakers, and the subwoofer panel) repeatedly to select the desired 1) Press SOUND repeatedly to select the SOUND DSP mode. “CEN,” “REAR,” or “SW.” The DSP indicator lights up on the display while the DSP modes • Each time you press the button, the adjustment are activated. indication on the display changes as follows: • Each time you press the button, DSP mode changes as follows: THEATER HALL LIVE CLUB 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN Normal Normal indication indication DANCE CLUBSW REAR (canceled) (canceled) Now, you are ready to start the adjustment. • To adjust the output balance for the front speakers and the rear CEN (Center) : To adjust the output level for center speakers, go to the next step. speaker (from –6 dB to +6 dB). • To adjust the output level for the rear speakers and the subwoofer, REAR : To adjust the output level for rear go to step 4 on the next page. speakers (from –6 dB to +6 dB). SW (Subwoofer) : To adjust the output level for subwoofer (from –6 dB to +6 dB). • When selecting “3 STEREO,” you cannot adjust the output levels for the rear speakers. • “CEN 0dB,” “REAR 0dB,” and “SW 0dB” are the initial settings. If you have already changed the settings, another value will appear. 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the output level. 3 : Increases the output level. ENTER 2 : Decreases the output level. 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the other speakers. EN20-26TH-A30[UW].pm6 25 02.8.23, 5:30 PM, 3 To adjust the output balance for the front 4 To adjust the output level for the rear speakers speakers and the rear speakers and the subwoofer 1) Press SOUND repeatedly until one of 1) Press SOUND repeatedly to select the SOUNDSOUND
the following adjustment indications “REAR” or “SW.” appears on the display. • Each time you press the button, the adjustment • Each time you press the button, the adjustment indication on the display changes as follows: indication on the display changes as follows: 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN Normal indication SW REAR Normal indication (canceled)SW REAR (canceled) 00 F (Front) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the front REAR : To adjust the output level for rear speakers. speakers (from –6 dB to +6 dB). 00 R (Rear) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the rear SW (Subwoofer) : To adjust the output level for subwoofer speakers. (from –6 dB to +6 dB). • “00 F 00” and “00 R 00” are the initial setting (the output • “REAR 0dB” and “SW 0dB” are the initial settings. If balances are at the center position). If you have already you have already changed the settings, another value will changed the setting, another value will appear. appear. 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the output balance. 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the 3 : Decreases the left speaker output level. output, or restores the right 3 : Increases the output level.ENTER ENTER speaker output. 2 : Decreases the output level. 2 : Decreases the right speaker output, or restores the left speaker output. 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting • Each output balance changes from the other speaker. OFF (silence), –06 (most reduction) to 00 (no reduction). 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the other speaker. EN20-26TH-A30[UW].pm6 26 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Disc Introduction—DVD/VCD/CD
This system has been designed to play back the following discs: DVD, IMPORTANT: Video CD, Super Video CD (SVCD), Audio CD, CD-R, and CD-RW. Before performing any operations, make sure of the following... • This system can also play back MP3 files recorded on CD-Rs and • Check the connection with the TV. CD-RWs. For in-depth information about what MP3, see “MP3 • Turn on the TV and select the correct input on the TV to view the Introduction” on page 43. pictures or on-screen indications on the TV screen. • For DVD playback, you can change the Setup menu setting to Discs you can play: your preference. (See pages 49 to 53.) Disc Mark Video Region Code If “ ” appears on the TV screen when pressing a button, Type (Logo) Format Number* the disc cannot accept an operation you have tried to do, or information required for that operation is not recorded in the disc. NOTICE : In some cases, without showing “ ,” operations DVD 4 will not be accepted. Video ALL Disc structure—DVD, Video CD (VCD/SVCD) and Audio CD (CD) A DVD disc consists of Titles, and each title may be divided into Video some Chapters. (See Example 1.) CD NTSC For example, if a DVD disc contains some movies, each movie may PAL have its own title number, and it may be further divided into some chapters. Super On the other hand, a VCD/SVCD or CD consists of Tracks. (See Video Example 2.) CD In general, each song has its own track number. (On some discs, each track may also be divided by Indexes.) When playing back a VCD/SVCD with Playback Control (PBC) Audio COMPACT function, you can select what to view using the menu shown on the CD DIGITAL AUDIO TV screen. (While operating a Video CD using the menu, some of the functions such as Repeat and Track Search may not work.) CD-R Example 1: DVD disc CD-RW • On some DVD or VCD/SVCD discs, their actual operations may be different from what is explained in this manual. This is due to the disc programming and disc structure, but not a malfunction of this system. • DVD-R discs recorded with the DVD VIDEO format can be Example 2 : Video CD/Audio CD played back. However, some discs may not be played back because of the disc characteristics or recording conditions. Note that unfinalized disc cannot be played back. • The following discs cannot be played back: – DVD-Audio, DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, CD-ROM, CD-I, (CD-I Ready), Photo CD, etc. Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the speakers. Notes on CD-R and CD-RW * Note on Region Code User-edited CD-Rs (Recordable) and CD-RWs (Rewritable) can be DVD players and DVD Video discs have their own Region Code played back only if they are already “finalized.” numbers. This system can play back DVD discs recorded with the • The system can play back CD-Rs or CD-RWs recorded on a color system of NTSC and PAL whose Region Code numbers personal computer if they have been recorded in the audio CD include “4.” format or recorded in MP3 format (see page 43). Examples: However, they may not be played back depending on their characteristics or recording conditions. • Before playing back CD-Rs or CD-RWs, read their instructions or cautions carefully. • Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this unit If a DVD with the inadequate Region Code numbers is loaded, because of their disc characteristics, damage or stain on them, or if “REGION ERR” appears on the display and playback cannot start. the built-in lens is dirty. • CD-RWs may require a longer readout time. This is caused by the fact that the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than for regular CDs. EN27-36TH-A30[UW].pm6 27 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Basic Disc Operations To stop playback for a moment TUNER PRESET
Press 3/8. STANDBY/ON While pausing, the elapsed playing time flashes AUDIO on the display. • To resume play, press 3/8 again. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL To go to another chapter or track AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME Press ¢ or 4 repeatedly during playback. VCR • ¢ : Skips to the beginning of the next or succeeding chapter or DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL track. TUNER PRESET 4 ¢ • 4 : While a DVD, a VCD with PBC or MP3 is played backDOWN UP Goes back to the beginning of the previous chapter or track. REW FF 7 VCR CHANNEL TUNING 3/8 While a CD or a VCD without PBC is played back B.SEARCH F.SEARCH Goes back to the beginning of the current or previous track. ENTER To go to another title (only possible on a DVD) or track (only possible on a CD and VCD) SVCD can be operated by using the VCD operation directly using the number buttons procedure. Pressing the number buttons before or during play allows you to start playing the title/track number you want. (If your TV is turned on, the on-screen bar is pulled down automatically on the TV screen.)To start playback • To select number 1 to 9, press the corresponding number button
TUNER PRESET Press 3/8. (then press ENTER or wait for 5 seconds). The source is automatically changed to the • To select number 15, press 1, 5. DVD player. • To select number 23, press 2, 3. “WAIT” appears on the display for a while, then the detected disc type appears—DVD, VCD, CD, or MP3. (If To stop during playback your TV is turned on, the mark corresponding to the detected disc Press 7. TUNER PRESET type appears on the TV screen.) (If your TV is turned on, “ STOP” appears • When a disc is not loaded, “NO DISC” appears on the display. on the TV screen.) • When an MP3 disc is played back, playback Disc play starts from the first chapter or track of the selected disc. stops completely. • If a menu appears while playing a DVD or VCD with PBC • This system can memorize the end point even when you press 7. function, see “Disc Menu-Driven Playback” (for DVD) on page 31 When you start playback again by pressing 3/8, playback begins or “Disc Menu-Driven Playback (Only for VCD)” on page 38. from where it has been stopped—Resume play. • To stop completely, press 7 twice. (“7 STOP” appears on the TV Note: screen.) The disc type appears on the display. If “WRONG PARENTAL LEVEL” appears on the TV screen, Parental The DVD player goes on working for 3 minutes after playback Lock is in use. You cannot play back a DVD containing violent scenes stops. or those not suitable for your family members. To play back such a disc, cancel the Parental Lock. (See page 52.) To remove the disc Press 0 on the front panel.Playback information on the display The disc tray comes out.
To close the disc tray, press 0 again. DVD • If you do not press the button, the disc tray closes automatically 3 minutes after. Title No. Chapter No. Elapsed playing time VCD/CD Track No. Elapsed playing time MP3 Track No. Elapsed playing time EN27-36TH-A30[UW].pm6 28 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,DVD Playback Showing the On-Screen Bar
You can show the following information on the TV screen while a STANDBY/ON disc is loaded.AUDIO
TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE From the remote control ONLY: DISPLAY DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL Press DISPLAY. DISPLAY AUDIO/ SUBTITLE • Each time you press the button, the following on-FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME AUDIO/ screen bar appears in sequence. FM MODE VCR DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP1234REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH56789ENTER On-screen bar goes off. VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING SOUND 1 : Disc type123SETTING DVD VCD SVCD CD MP3456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST 2 : Current title and total number of the titles on the ANGLE ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE disc REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM • Ex.: 1st title is playing out of 3 titles recorded. CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP 3 : Current chapter and total number of the chapters in the current title • Ex.: 1st chapter is playing out of 5 chapters recorded. 4 : Elapsed playing time or remaining time You can change the play time indication by pressing REMAIN. See page 31 for more details. Some DVDs contain several audio languages, subtitles, and multi- angle views. 5 : Subtitle language indication When you find the following marks on the DVD or its package, you • Ex.: When no subtitle is recorded on the disc. can select these elements recorded on the DVD. See page 30 for more details. 6 : Audio language indication • Ex.: Original sound (default) is selected out of 3 audio Subtitles are recorded on the disc. The number languages recorded. See page 30 for more details. 3 inside the mark indicates the total number of the recorded subtitles. 7 : Signal format indicator • Signal format type—Linear PCM (stereo), Dolby Digital, Several audio languages are recorded on the disc. 3 and DTS Digital Surround—will be indicated.The number inside the mark indicates the total Ex.: When the disc is encoded with Dolby Digital. number of the recorded audio languages. Multi-angle views are recorded on the disc. The 8 : Repeat mode indicator number inside the mark indicates the total number • Ex.: When repeat mode is turned off.3 of the recorded multi-angle views. See page 33 for more details. 9 : Multi-angle view indicator If you cannot find out whether your disc contains these features • Ex.: When only a single angle-view is recorded on the listed above, you can check it by showing the on-screen bar. disc. See page 30 for more details. For basic disc operations such as inserting a disc, starting playback, and moving to another chapters, see “Basic DVD Operations” on pages 11, 12, and “Basic Disc Operations” on page 28. EN27-36TH-A30[UW].pm6 29 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Selecting the Subtitles Selecting the Multi-Angle Views
While playing back a DVD containing subtitles in different While playing back a DVD containing multi-angle views, you can languages, you can select the subtitle to be displayed on the TV view the same scene at different angles. screen. • When you play back the DVD containing multi-angle views, • You can set your favorite subtitle language as the initial language appears on the TV screen. shown on the screen. (See page 49.) From the remote control ONLY: From the remote control ONLY: Press ANGLE. ANGLESUBTITLE Press SUBTITLE. • Each time you press the button, the view angle changes. The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen for a while. • Each time you press the button, the subtitle language changes as follows: ANGLE 1 ANGLE 2 OFF /3 DEF 1/3 1/1 OFF /3 ENG 1/3 ANGLE 3 SPA 3/3 FRE 2/3 Ex.: When the disc has 3 selections—English, French, Spanish and no subtitle (OFF) Ex.: When the disc has 3 multi-angle views Note: When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Multi angle view indication also changes as follows:Selecting the Audio Languages 1/3 2/3
While playing back a DVD containing audio languages (sound track), you can select the language (sound track) to listen to. 3/3 • You can set your favorite audio language as the initial audio language. (See page 49.) Press AUDIO/FM MODE. AUDIO/FM MODE The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen for a while. • Each time you press the button, the audio language changes as follows: ENG 1/3 ENG 1/3 1/1 ENG 1/3 FRE 2/3 SPA 3/3 Ex.: When the disc has 3 selections—English, French, and Spanish EN27-36TH-A30[UW].pm6 30 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,DVD Playback Disc Menu-Driven Playback
STANDBY/ON Disc menu-driven playback is possible while playing back a DVD AUDIO with menu (menu may be still pictures or moving pictures depending on the disc). TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE • When operating a disc using the disc menu, refer also to the DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL instructions supplied for the disc. AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME DVD discs generally have their own menus or title lists. A menuVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL usually contains various information about the disc and playback selections. On the other hand, a title list usually contains titles of TUNER PRESET DOWN UP movies and songs recorded. REW FF 1 VCR CHANNELTUNING ¡ From the remote control ONLY: B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 3/2/5/∞ 1 Press MENU or TOP ENTER MENU. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING ENTER A menu or title list will appear on the screen. “MENU” appears on the display. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING VOLUME • On some DVDs, a menu will TOP MENU TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING MENU automatically appear on the screen after playback starts. Number SOUND123buttons SETTING456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST 2 Select a desired item on the ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE menu or on the title list, using REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM 3/2/5/∞ and ENTER. CLEAR CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP REMAIN The unit starts playback of the selected ENTER item. SEARCH • On some discs, you can also select items by pressing the number buttons corresponding to the item numbers listed.Checking the Remaining Time
While playing back a DVD, you can check the remaining time to be played back. From the remote control ONLY: Press REMAIN. REMAIN The on-screen bar and the current play time indication appear on the TV screen for a while. • Each time you press the button, the following indication appears on the screen: REMAIN TIME:TITLE CHAPTER TIME TITLE TIME REMAIN TIME:CHAPTER REMAIN TIME:TITLE : Select this to show the remaining time of the current title. CHAPTER TIME : Select this to show the elapsed playing time of the current chapter. REMAIN TIME:CHAPTER : Select this to show the remaining time of the current chapter. TITLE TIME : Select this to show the elapsed playing time of the current title. EN27-36TH-A30[UW].pm6 31 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Moving to a Particular Portion Directly Searching for a Particular Point
You can move to another title, chapter, or particular scene in the You can search for a particular point while playing a disc—Variable chapter directly. Speed Forward/Reverse Search. • No sound comes out during Variable Speed Forward/Reverse From the remote control ONLY: Search. 1 Press SEARCH during playback or pause. SEARCH To fast-forward the chapter—Variable Speed • Each time you press the button, the following indication appears on the screen: Forward Search From the remote control ONLY: TITLE – – CHAPTER – – – Press ¡ during playback or pause. • Each time you press the button, the search speed F.SEARCH Canceled TIME – – : – – : – – changes as follows: TITLE – – : Select this to move to another title. x2 x4 CHAPTER – – – : Select this to move to another chapter. TIME – – : – – : – – : Select this to move to a particular scene. PLAY (Normal play) x8 2 Press the number buttons to123To reverse the chapter—Variable Speed Reverse select a desired title, chapter, Search456or playing time. From the remote control ONLY: The unit starts playback of the selected789Press 1 during playback or pause. item. (The on-screen bar appears for a • Each time you press the button, the search speed B.SEARCH while.) 0 changes as follows: x2 x4 PLAY (Back play) x8 How to input the title and chapter number TUNER PRESET Press the number buttons corresponding to the number, then wait To resume normal play for about 5 seconds or press ENTER to start playback. Press 3/8. • To select number 5, press 5, then ENTER. • To select number 12, press 1, 2, then ENTER. • To select number 22, press 2, 2, then ENTER. How to input the playing time Press the number buttons to input the playing time, then wait for about 5 seconds or press ENTER to start playback at the selected elapsed playing time. • To input time “00:45:23,” press 4, 5, 2, 3. • To input time “01:23:45,” press 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. • To cancel a mis-entry, press CLEAR. Each time you press the button, the last entry will be erased. Note: When you want to move to another title directly, you can move to it by simply pressing the corresponding number buttons (without pressing SEARCH in step 1). EN27-36TH-A30[UW].pm6 32 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,DVD Playback
7 A–B Repeat STANDBY/ON While playing, you can also select a portion you want to repeat. AUDIO • A–B repeat is not performed between different titles. • An interval of more than 5 seconds is required between point A TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE and point B. DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME Example:VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET 7 DOWN UP 3/8 REPEAT:A– REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH23REPEAT:A–BENTER ENTER
From the remote control ONLY: VOLUME 1 Press A–B REPEAT to select the start A-B REPEAT TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING point. “RPT A–” appears on the display and “REPEAT:A–”SOUND
123appears on the TV screen.SETTING
456PRO LOGIC 2 Press A–B REPEAT again to select the A-B REPEAT789SLOW SETUP TEST 0 end point. ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE “RPT A–” changes to “RPT A–B” and REPEAT REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM PROGRAM “REPEAT:A–” changes to “REPEAT:A–B,” CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP A-B REPEAT then A–B repeat begins. The unit automatically locates point A and starts repeated playback between points A and B.To cancel A–B Repeat Repeating Playback Press A–B REPEAT again. A-B REPEAT
“RPT OFF” appears on the display and “REPEAT OFF” Repeat play cannot be used in the following cases: appears on the TV screen. • When you enjoy program play 7 Repeat Play Note: From the remote control ONLY: When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Repeat mode Press REPEAT repeatedly. REPEAT indication also changes as follows: The indication corresponding to the selected mode appears on your TV. • Each time you press the button, Repeat mode changes as follows: REPEAT:CHAPTER REPEAT:TITLE On some DVDs, A–B Repeat may not be used even within the same title. This is due to their disc structures, and not a REPEAT OFF malfunction of the unit. REPEAT:CHAPTER : Current chapter will be repeated. REPEAT:TITLE : Current title will be repeated. REPEAT OFF : Repeat play is canceled. (Normal play is resumed.) Note: When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Repeat mode indication also changes as follows: REPEAT:CHAPTER REPEAT:TITLE REPEAT OFF EN27-36TH-A30[UW].pm6 33 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,Programming the Playing Order of the Chapters—Program Play 5 Press 3 or 2 to select a chapter number, then ENTER. You can arrange the chapter playback order before you start playing. • 3 : Increases the number. You can program up to 20 steps. • 2 : Decreases the number.
• Before making a program, make sure that the TV is turned on • You can also select a chapter number using the number buttons. and the correct input is selected on the TV. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTERFrom the remote control ONLY: TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPT
1 Load a disc. 1286– – – – 2 – – – – 7 – – – – • If the current playing source is not the DVD player, press 3 – – – – 8 – – – – 4 – – – – 9 – – – – 3/8, then 7 before going to the next step. 5 – – – – 10 – – – – PREVIOUS NEXT 2 Press PROGRAM. PROGRAM PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMThe PROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV
screen. • To select all chapters in the selected title as one program • “PROGRAM” appears on the display. step, simply press ENTER without selecting any number. “ALL” appears on the chapter number position. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER 6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 to program other chapters TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPT you want. 1 – – – – 6 – – – – 2 – – – – 7 – – – – • After 10 steps are programed, “NEXT «” is selected 3 – – – – 8 – – – – (highlighted). If you want to program more steps, press 4 – – – – 9 – – – – 5 – – – – 10 – – – – ENTER. PREVIOUS NEXT PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAM 7 Press / . TUNER PRESET3 8The chapters are played in the order you
3 Press ENTER. have programed and the PROGRAM indicator lights up. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER After all the chapters you programed are played back, the TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPT ENTER PROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV screen again. 1 – – – – 6 – – – – 2 – – – – 7 – – – – 3 – – – – 8 – – – – 4 – – – – 9 – – – – TUNER PRESET 5 – – – – 10 – – – – To stop during playback CHOOSE : 1–5 PREVIOUS NEXT Press 7.The PROGRAM MENU screen appears on
PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAM the TV screen.Title numbers you can select in the next step • If you press 3/8 while this screen is shown, the unit starts
program play. 4 Press 3 or 2 to select a title number, then ENTER. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER • : Increases the number. TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPT3 ENTER128622• 2 : Decreases the number. 2157212• You can also select a title number31178194369– – – – using the number buttons. 54210 – – – – PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER PREVIOUS NEXT TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPT PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAM 1 – 2 – – 6 – – – – 2 – – – – 7 – – – – 3 – – – – 8 – – – – 4 – – – – 9 – – – – 5 – – – – 10 – – – – CHOOSE : 1–9 PREVIOUS NEXT PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMChapter numbers you can select in the
next stepTO BE CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
EN27-36TH-A30[UW].pm6 34 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,DVD Playback To erase the stored program
Press 0 to eject the disc. STANDBY/ON • If you turn off the system or change the source, theAUDIO
program is also erased. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE STEP DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL To check the program contents AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME You can check the program contents by pressing PROGRAM. VCR The PROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV screen. DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP 3/8To modify the program
REW FF VCR CHANNEL TUNING You can modify the program while the PROGRAM MENU screen is B.SEARCH F.SEARCH shown on the TV screen. 3/2/5/∞ ENTER • To erase a step: Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an unwantedENTER
program step, then press CLEAR. • To modify a step: Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) a program step you want to modify, then perform steps 3 to 5 on page 34.VOLUME
(Before entering a new number, press CLEAR repeatedly until TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING “– –” appears on the number entry position.) SOUND • To add a step: Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an empty123program step, then perform steps 3 to 5 on page 34.SETTING
456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SLOW SETUP TEST • To move to program step 10 from program step 11, press 5 ZOOM when program step 11 is selected (highlighted) so thatANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE “PREVIOUS »” is selected (highlighted). Then, press ENTER. REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM PROGRAM • To move to program step 11 from program step 10, press ∞ CLEAR CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP when program step 10 is selected (highlighted) so that “NEXT « ” is selected (highlighted). Then, press ENTER.To exit from program play
From the remote control ONLY: Press PROGRAM.PROGRAM
The PROGRAM MENU screen goes off, and the opening screen appears. (The program you made is still kept in memory.) • If you press 3/8 while this screen is shown, the unit starts normal playback. DVD/Video CD/CD PLAYER EN27-36TH-A30[UW].pm6 35 02.8.23, 5:30 PM,DVD Special Effect Playback 7 Zoom
You can zoom in on the picture while playing back a DVD. 7 Still Picture/Frame-by-Frame Playback From the remote control ONLY: You can advance the still picture frame by frame while playing a DVD. 1 Press ZOOM to zoom in. ZOOM • Each time you press the button, the picture is From the remote control ONLY: enlarged as follows: 1 Press STEP once during playback. STEP A still picture appears on the TV screen. 248PAUSE2x Zoom 4x Zoom Canceled 2 Press 3/2/5/∞ to move the enlarged portion you want to watch. 2 Press STEP repeatedly to advance the STEP ENTER picture frame by frame. • Each time you press the button, the picture advances ENTER frame by frame. 2383838383838ENTER To cancel the ZOOM To resume normal play ZOOMTUNER PRESET Press ZOOM repeatedly until the normal size picture is Press 3/8. resumed. 7 Slow Motion Playback You can enjoy slow motion playback while playing a DVD. From the remote control ONLY: Press SLOW repeatedly during playback or pause. SLOW • Each time you press the button, slow motion speed changes as follows: SLOW 1 /2 SLOW 1 /4 PLAY (Normal play) EN27-36TH-A30[UW].pm6 36 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,VCD/CD Playback
1234* 5 6 STANDBY/ON AUDIO 1/35 00:12 TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE DISPLAY DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL On-screen bar goes off. 7** AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME / * Appears only when a VCD is loaded.VCR DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL38** Appears only when a VCD is played back. TUNER PRESET 4 DOWN UP ¢ 1 : Disc type REW FF DVD VCD SVCD CD MP3 VCR CHANNEL 1 TUNING ¡ B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 2 : Current track and total number of the tracks on the discENTER
ENTER • Ex.: 1st track is playing out of 35 tracks recorded. 3 : Sound mode • Ex.: Stereo sound (Left channel and Right channel).VOLUME
MENU TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING RETURN 4 : Play Back Control (PBC) indicator • Ex.: PBC is on. (When PBC is turned off, will Number SOUND appear.) 123buttons SETTING 5 : Repeat mode indicator456PRO LOGIC • Ex.: When repeat mode is turned off. See page 39 for more789details. SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE 6 : Elapsed playing time or remaining time REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM You can change the play time indication by pressing CLEAR REMAIN. See below.CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP REMAIN 7 : Sound indication SEARCH • Indicates sound input level. (Appears only during playback VCD.) • SVCD can be operated by using the VCD operation Checking the Remaining Time procedure. • For basic disc operations such as inserting a disc, starting While playing back a VCD or CD, you can check the remaining playback, and moving to another tracks, see “Basic VCD/ time. CD Operations” on pages 13, 14, and “Basic Disc Operations” on page 28. From the remote control ONLY: Press REMAIN. REMAINShowing the On-Screen Bar The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen for a while.
• Each time you press the button, the play time indication changes as follows: You can show the following information on the TV screen while a disc is loaded. REMAIN TIME:TRACK DISC TIME From the remote control ONLY: TRACK TIME REMAIN TIME:DISC Press DISPLAY. DISPLAY • Each time you press the button, the following on-screen REMAIN TIME:TRACK bar appears in sequence. : Select this to show the remaining time of the current track. DISC TIME : Select this to show the total elapsed playing time of the disc. REMAIN TIME:DISC : Select this to show the total remaining time of the disc. TRACK TIME : Select this to show the elapsed playing time of the current track. EN37-42TH-A30[UW].pm6 37 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,Disc Menu–Driven Playback (Only for VCD) Moving to a Particular Portion Directly
The Play Back Control function (PBC) allows you to operate the You can move to a particular portion (scene) on the track directly. VCD using menus. • PBC function is canceled when you use this function. When you start playing a VCD with PBC function, a menu will automatically appear on the TV screen. (“MENU” will also appear From the remote control ONLY: on the display.) 1 Press SEARCH during playback or pause. • A menu may be a list of items, divided screens, or some moving • Each time you press the button, the following indication pictures. (See “PBC operation concept” below.) appears on the TV screen. When a menu appears, you can select a desired item on the menu. • When a list of items is displayed on the TV screen, press the TIME – – : – – TRACK TIME – – : – – number buttons to select an item. • When “3” or “SELECT” is displayed on the TV screen, press Canceled 3/8 to start playback. TIME – – : – – : Select this to move to a particular portion on the current disc. To go to the next submenu UP TRACK TIME – – : – – Press ¢. FF : Select this to move to a particular portion on the current track. To return to the previous submenuDOWN
Press 4. 2 Press number buttons to select123REW a playing time you want to456To cancel the PBC playback search for. You can cancel the menu-driven operations (PBC function): The unit starts playback at the selected7891Press 7 to stop playback. elapsed playing time. (The on-screen02Press the number buttons to select a track. bar appears for a while.) Normal playback starts from the selected track. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING • You can also turn on and off the PBC function by pressing MENU • To input time “45:23,” press 4, 5, 2, 3. on the remote control. Each time • To input time “09:45,” press 9, 4, 5, then wait for about 5 you press the button, the PBC function turns on and off. seconds (or press ENTER). • To cancel a misentry, press CLEAR. Each time you press the button, the last entry will be erased. PBC operation conceptSearching for a Particular Point
You can search for a particular point while playing a disc—Variable Speed Forward/Reverse Search. • No sound comes out during Variable Speed Forward/Reverse Search on a VCD. To fast-forward the tracks—Variable Speed Forward Search Press ¡ during playback or pause. • Each time you press the button, the search speed changes as follows: F.SEARCH Note: While operating a VCD using menu, some of the functions such as x2 x4 repeat play may not work. PLAY (Normal play) x8 To reverse the tracks—Variable Speed Reverse Search Press 1 during playback or pause. • Each time you press the button, the search speed changes as follows: B.SEARCH x2 x4 PLAY (Normal play) x8 EN37-42TH-A30[UW].pm6 38 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,VCD/CD Playback
Note: When the on-screen bar is shown on the screen, Repeat mode indication also changes as follows: STANDBY/ONAUDIO
TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE REPEAT:ONE REPEAT:DISC DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME REPEAT OFFVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET 7 A–B Repeat 7 DOWN UP 3/8 While playing, you can also select a portion you want to repeat. REW FF VCR CHANNEL • An interval of more than 5 seconds is required between point ATUNING
and point B. B.SEARCH F.SEARCH23ENTER Example:ENTER
VOLUME REPEAT:A– TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGSOUND
123REPEAT:A–BSETTING
456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE From the remote control ONLY: REPEAT PROGRAMREPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM 1 Press A–B REPEAT to select the start A-B REPEAT CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP A–B REPEAT point. “RPT A–” appears on the display and “REPEAT:A–” appears on the TV screen. 2 Press A–B REPEAT again to select the A-B REPEAT end point.Repeating Playback “RPT A–” changes to “RPT A–B” and
“REPEAT:A–” changes to “REPEAT:A–B,” Repeat play cannot be used in the following cases: then A–B repeat begins. • When you play back a VCD using the PBC function The unit automatically locates point A and starts repeated • When you enjoy program play playback between points A and B. 7 Repeat Play To cancel A–B Repeat From the remote control ONLY: Press A–B REPEAT again. A-B REPEATREPEAT Press REPEAT repeatedly. “RPT OFF” appears on the display and “REPEAT OFF” The indication corresponding to the selected mode appears appears on the TV screen. on your TV. • Each time you press the button, repeat mode changes as follows: Note: REPEAT:ONE REPEAT:DISC When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Repeat mode indication also changes as follows: REPEAT OFF REPEAT:ONE : Current track will be repeated. REPEAT:DISC : All the tracks will be repeated. REPEAT OFF : Repeat play is canceled. (Normal play is resumed.) EN37-42TH-A30[UW].pm6 39 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,Programming the Playing Order of the 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to program other tracks Tracks—Program Play you want.
• After 10 steps are programed, “NEXT «” is selectedYou can arrange the track playback order before you start playing. (highlighted). If you want to program more steps, press You can program up to 20 steps. ENTER.
• Before making a program, make sure that the TV is turned on TUNER PRESET and the correct input is selected on the TV. 6 Press 3/8.The tracks are played in the order you have From the remote control ONLY: programed and the PROGRAM indicator
1 Load a disc. lights up. • If the current playing source is not the DVD player, press 3/8, then 7 before going to the next step. After all the tracks you programed are played back, thePROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV screen again.
2 Press PROGRAM. PROGRAMThe PROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV To stop during play
screen. TUNER PRESET • “PROGRAM” appears on the display. Press 7.The PROGRAM MENU screen appears on
PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER the TV screen. TRACK TRACK • If you press 3/8 while this screen is 1 – – 6 – – shown, the system starts program play. 2 – – 7 – – 3 – – 8 – – PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER 4 – – 9 – – TRACK TRACK 5 – – 10 – – 1761267– – PREVIOUS NEXT398– – 4139– – 51110 – – PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAM PREVIOUS NEXT 3 PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMPress ENTER.To exit from program play
PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER From the remote control ONLY: TRACK TRACK Press PROGRAM. PROGRAMENTER 1 – – 6 – – The PROGRAM MENU screen goes off, and the 2 – – 7 – – 3 – – 8 – – opening screen appears. (The program you made is 4 – – 9 – – still kept in memory.) 5 – – 10 – – CHOOSE : 1–17 • If you press 3/8 while this screen is shown, the unit starts normal PREVIOUS NEXT playback. PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMTrack numbers you can select in the
next step 4 DVD/Video CD/CD PLAYER Press 3 or 2 to select a track number, then ENTER. • 3 : Increases the number. • 2 : Decreases the number. • You can also select a track number ENTER To erase the stored program using the number buttons. Press 0 to eject the disc. • If you turn off the system or change the source, the program is also erased. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER TRACK TRACK176– – To check the program contents 2 – – 7 – – PROGRAM 3 – – 8 – – You can check the program contents by pressing 4 – – 9 – – PROGRAM. The PROGRAM MENU screen appears on 5 – – 10 – – the TV screen. PREVIOUS NEXT PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMTO BE CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
EN37-42TH-A30[UW].pm6 40 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,VCD/CD Playback Selecting Playback Channel
STANDBY/ON When you play back a karaoke VCD or CD, you can only selectAUDIO
either the left channel or right channel to listen to. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE Press AUDIO/FM MODE repeatedly. AUDIO/ AUDIO/ DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL STEP FM MODEThe on-screen bar appears on the screen for a while. FM MODE AUDIO/FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME • Each time you press the button, the sound mode changes as VCR follows: DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET / AUDIO:LEFT AUDIO:RIGHTDOWN UP38REW FF AUDIO:STEREO VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 3/2/5/∞ ENTER 1/35 00:12ENTER VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGSOUND
123SETTING AUDIO:STEREO (LR) : Select this to listen to both456PRO LOGIC channel sounds. 789SLOW AUDIO:LEFT (L) : Select this to listen to the leftSLOW SETUP TEST 0 channel sounds. ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE ZOOM AUDIO:RIGHT (R) : Select this to listen to the right REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM channel sounds. CLEAR CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP REMEMBER that after playing back a karaoke VCD or CD using “AUDIO:LEFT” or “AUDIO:RIGHT,” select “AUDIO:STEREO” to restore normal stereo playback.To modify the program
You can modify the program while the PROGRAM MENU screen is shown on the TV screen. • To erase a step: press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an unwanted program step, then press CLEAR. • To modify a step: press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an program step you want to modify, then perform steps 3 and 4. (Before entering a new number, press CLEAR repeatedly until “– –” appears on number entry position.) • To add a step: press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an empty program step, then perform steps 3 and 4. • To move to program step 10 from program step 11, press 5 when program step 11 is selected (highlighted) so that “PREVIOUS » ” is selected (highlighted). Then, press ENTER. • To move to program step 11 from program step 10, press ∞ when program step 10 is selected (highlighted) so that “NEXT « ” is selected (highlighted). Then, press ENTER. EN37-42TH-A30[UW].pm6 41 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,VCD Special Effect Playback 7 Zoom
You can zoom in on the picture while playing a VCD. 7 Still Picture/Frame-by-Frame Playback From the remote control ONLY: You can advance the still picture frame by frame while playing a VCD. 1 Press ZOOM to zoom in. ZOOM • Each time you press the button, the picture is From the remote control ONLY: enlarged as follows: 1 Press STEP once during playback. STEP A still picture appears on the TV screen. 8PAUSE2x Zoom Canceled 2 Press 3/2/5/∞ to move the enlarged portion you want to 2 watch. ENTERPress STEP repeatedly to advance the STEP picture frame by frame. • Each time you press the button, the picture advances ENTER frame by frame. 2383838383838ENTER To cancel the ZOOM To resume normal play TUNER PRESET Press ZOOM again. ZOOM Press 3/8. The normal size picture is resumed. 7 Slow Motion Playback You can enjoy slow motion playback while playing a VCD. From the remote control ONLY: Press SLOW repeatedly during playback or pause. SLOW • Each time you press the button, slow motion speed changes as follows: SLOW 1 /2 SLOW 1 /4 SLOW 1 /8 PLAY (Normal play) SLOW 1 /16 EN37-42TH-A30[UW].pm6 42 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,MP3 Introduction
This system is incorporated with an MP3 decoder. You can play back MP3 tracks (files) recorded on CD-Rs and CD-RWs. • Notice that “files” and “tracks” are used interchangeably. STANDBY/ONAUDIO What is MP3?
TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE MP3 is an abbreviation of Motion Picture Experts Group (or MPEG) Audio Layer 3. MP3 is simply a file format with a data compression DISPLAY DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL ratio of 1:10 (128 Kbps*). That means, by using MP3 format, one AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME CD-R or CD-RW can contain 10 times as much data volume as aVCR
regular CD can. DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL * Bit rate is the average number of bits that one second of audio data 4 TUNER PRESET ¢ will consume. The measuring unit used is Kbps (1000 bits per DOWN UP second). REW FF 7 VCR CHANNEL To get a better audio quality, choose a higher bit rate. The most TUNING 3/8 popular bit rate for encoding (recording) is 128 Kbps. B.SEARCH F.SEARCHMP3 File Compatibility ENTER ENTER
• This system can only read MP3 files that are recorded in the format that is compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1 or Level 2. • The system can read or play MP3 files only with the extension VOLUME code—“.mp3”. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING • ID3* tags cannot be shown on the display. * An MP3 file can contain file information called “ID3 Tag” where SOUND123its album name, performer, track title, etc. are recorded. There are SETTING two versions—ID3v1 (ID3 Tag version 1) and ID3v2 (ID3 Tag456PRO LOGIC version 2). 789SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODEDisc structure—How are MP3 files recorded
and played back? REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP “MP3 files (tracks)” can be recorded in “directories (or folders),” in PC terminology. During recording, the files and directories can be arranged in a way similar to arranging files and folder/directories of computer data. “Root” is similar to the root of a tree. Every file and directory can be linked to the root. In compliance with ISO 9660, the maximum allowable depth of For in-depth information about a disc to be played back, see nested directories—so-called “hierarchy”—is eight (inclusive of the “Disc Introduction—DVD/VCD/CD” on page 27. root). Playback order, files search order, and directory search order of the MP3 files recorded on a disc are determined by the writing (or encoding) application; therefore, playback order may be different from the one you have intended while recording the folders/ directories and the files. Note on MP3 discs MP3 discs (either CD-R or CD-RW) require a longer readout time. (It differs due to the complexity of the directory/file configuration.) EN43-46TH-A30[UW].pm6 43 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,MP3 Playback Starting Playback The on-screen bar
12345It is recommended to turn on your TV when playing back an MP3 disc. 1/35 128 00:22/03:48 1 Press 0 to load a disc. 1 : Disc type DVD VCD SVCD CD MP3 2 Press 3/8. TUNER PRESET After detecting the disc, playback starts. 2 : Current track (file) and total number of the tracks • The on-screen bar and the contents on the disc recorded on the MP3 disc will be shown • Ex.: 1st track is playing out of 35 tracks recorded. on the TV if it is turned on. 3 : Bit rate • Ex.: Bit rate used for recording the loaded disc is 5/135 ? ? 128 Kbps. (See the previous page.) 4 : Repeat mode indicator • Ex.: When repeat mode is turned off. SPRING See page 46 for more details.SUMMER
FALL 5 : Elapsed playing time and the total playing time ofWINTER
LIAR.MP3 the current track LOVE.MP3 6 : Sound indication • Indicates sound input level. (Only appears during playback.) 5/135 ? ?To go to another track SPRING
Press ¢ or 4 during playback. SPRING1.MP3 SPRING2.MP3 • ¢ : Skip to the beginning of the next track. UP SPRING3.MP3 SPRING4.MP3 FF SPRING5.MP3 • 4 : Skip to the beginning of the previous track. DOWNREW
Note: If the loaded disc is not recorded in the audio CD format or MP3 format, “WRONG DISC FORMAT” appears on the TV screen. To stop playback for a moment TUNER PRESET Press 3/8. To resume play, press 3/8 again or ENTER.To stop during playback TUNER PRESET
Press 7.To remove the disc
Press 0 on the front panel. The disc tray comes out. To close the disc tray, press 0 again. EN43-46TH-A30[UW].pm6 44 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,MP3 Playback Operations Using the On-Screen Display
STANDBY/ON AUDIO It is recommended to turn on your TV when playing back an MP3 disc. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVEWhen the loaded MP3 disc is recognized, the following on-screen
DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL display appears on the TV screen. (The contents of this on-screen AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME display varies according to the disc—the way MP3 tracks wereVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX recorded on the disc.)CONTROL • Only the first 8 letters of the titles appear on the TV screen. TUNER PRESET DOWN UPFrom the remote control ONLY:
REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH ButtonTo do∞ 5 ENTER
ENTER ENTER Start playback or go into a directory. ∞ / 5 Select a track or directory.VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGNumber SOUND
buttons123SETTING456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODEREPEAT
REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAMSEARCH CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP
5/135 ? ? MP3 On-Screen Display OperationsSPRING SUMMER FALL WINTER
LIAR.MP3 LOVE.MP3ENTER
5 ∞ 5 and ENTERSPRING
SPRING ENTER SUMMER SPRING1.MP3 ENTER FALL SPRING2.MP3 WINTER SPRING3.MP3 LIAR.MP3 SPRING4.MP3 LOVE.MP3 To “SUMMER” SPRING5.MP3 Start playing “SPRING1.MP3” 5 ∞ 5 ∞SPRING
SPRING ENTER SUMMER SPRING1.MP3 ENTER FALL SPRING2.MP3 WINTER SPRING3.MP3 LIAR.MP3 SPRING4.MP3 LOVE.MP3 To “FALL” SPRING5.MP3 Start playing “SPRING2.MP3” 5 ∞ 5 ∞SPRING SPRING
SUMMER ENTER SPRING1.MP3 ENTER FALL SPRING2.MP3 WINTER SPRING3.MP3 LIAR.MP3 SPRING4.MP3 LOVE.MP3 Start playing SPRING5.MP3 Start playing “LIAR.MP3” “SPRING3.MP3”Note: If you press 2, the cursor moves to current playback track.
EN43-46TH-A30[UW].pm6 45 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,Moving to a Particular Track Directly Repeating Playback
You can move to a particular track on the disc directly. On an MP3 disc, A–B Repeat cannot be used. You can enjoy only Repeat play. From the remote control ONLY: 1 SEARCHPress SEARCH during playback or pause. From the remote control ONLY: “TRACK – – – – ” appears on the TV screen. To repeat playback—Repeat Play Press REPEAT repeatedly. 2 REPEATPress the number buttons to123The indication corresponding to the selected mode appears select a track number you on the TV screen. 456want. • Each time you press the button, repeat mode changes as The system starts playback from the789follows: selected track. 0 REPEAT:RANDOM REPEAT:ONE • To select number 5, press 5 (then ENTER). REPEAT OFF REPEAT:DISC REPEAT:DIR • To select number 10, press 1, 0 (then ENTER). • To select number 23, press 2, 3 (then ENTER). • To select number 123, press 1, 2, 3. REPEAT:RANDOM : All tracks recorded on the disc will be played once at Note: random (random play), and random play will be repeated. REPEAT:ONE When you want to move to another file (track) directly, you can move to it simply by pressing the number buttons (without pressing : Current track will be repeated. SEARCH in step 1). REPEAT:DIR : Tracks in the current directory will be repeated. REPEAT:DISC : All tracks on the disc will be repeated. REPEAT OFF : Repeat play is canceled. (Normal play is resumed.) Note: When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Repeat mode indication also changes as follows: REPEAT:RANDOM REPEAT:ONE REPEAT OFF REPEAT:DISC REPEAT:DIR EN43-46TH-A30[UW].pm6 46 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,Tuner Operations Tuning in Stations
STANDBY/ON From the remote control:AUDIO
1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select the FM/AM TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE band. DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. AUDIO/ • Each time you press the button, the band alternates FM MODE AUDIO/FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME FM/AM between FM and AM.VCR
TUNER DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNERPRESET
TUNER PRESET PRESET DOWN DOWN UP UP 2 Press and hold TUNING + or – until you find TUNING – REW FF TUNING + the frequency you want. VCR CHANNELVCR CHANNEL TUNING TUNING• TUNING + : Increases the B.SEARCH F.SEARCH frequency. B.SEARCH F.SEARCH • TUNING – : Decreases the ENTER frequency. The system starts searching for stations and stops when a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in.VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING On the front panel: SOUND 1 Press SOURCE repeatedly until the123SOURCE SETTING desired band appears on the display. 456PRO LOGIC The last received station of the selected band is tuned789SLOW SETUP TEST in. 0 • Each time you press the button, the source changes as follows: ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM PROGRAMDVD player* AUX IN
CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEPAM FM
* “WAIT” appears on the display. 2 Press 7 so that “MANUAL” appears on the For basic tuner operations, see “Basic Tuner Operations” on page display. 15. • Each time you press the button, the operation mode of ¢ and 4 buttons alternates between “PRESET” and “MANUAL.”Setting the AM Tuner Interval Spacing PRESET : Select this for using ¢ and 4 as the
buttons to select the preset station. Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart, and other countries use MANUAL : Select this for using ¢ and 4 as the 10 kHz spacing. buttons to change the frequency manually. • 10 kHz interval spacing is the initial setting. • Each time you do the following procedure, the AM tuner interval spacing alternates between 9 kHz and 10 kHz. 3 Press and hold ¢ or 4 until 1 you find the frequency you want.Select AM as the band. • ¢ : Increases the frequency. • 4 : Decreases the frequency. 2 Press 9, 1, and 0 on the remote control. The new setting for the interval spacing appears on the display, and the band changes into FM. Notes: • When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the 3 Press FM/AM on the remote control to select AM indicator lights up on the display. as the band again. • When an FM stereo program is received, the indicator also lights up. • When you press the button repeatedly, the frequency changes step by step. EN47-48TH-A30[UW].pm6 47 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,Using Preset Tuning To tune in a preset station
From the remote control: Once a station is assigned to a channel number, the station can be 1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select the FM/AM quickly tuned. You can preset up to 15 FM and 15 AM stations. band. The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. To store the preset stations • Each time you press the button, the band alternates From the remote control ONLY: between FM and AM. 1 Tune in the station you want to preset (see “Tuning in Stations”). 2 Press TUNER PRESET UP or DOWN until the desired preset station TUNER PRESET appears on the DOWN UP display. REW FF 2 Press PROGRAM. PROGRAM • TUNER PRESET UP : Increases the preset number. The preset number appears on the display and the • TUNER PRESET DOWN : Decreases the preset number. PROGRAM indicator lights up. On the front panel: 1 Press SOURCE repeatedly until the SOURCE desired band appears on the display. Preset number 2 Press 7 so that “PRESET” appears on the 3 Press TUNER PRESET UP or DOWN to select a display. preset number. • Each time you press the button, the operation mode ofTUNER PRESET DOWN UP ¢ and 4 buttons alternates between “PRESET” and “MANUAL.” REW FF PRESET : Select this for using ¢ and 4 as the buttons to select the preset station. • TUNER PRESET UP : Increases the preset number. MANUAL : Select this for using ¢ and 4 as the • TUNER PRESET DOWN : Decreases the preset number. buttons to change the frequency manually. 4 Press PROGRAM to store the preset 3 Press ¢ or 4 repeatedly untilPROGRAM the desired preset station appears station. on the display. The PROGRAM indicator goes off, and the station is assigned to the selected preset number. • ¢ : Increases the preset number. • 4 : Decreases the preset number. 5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 until you store all the stations you want. Selecting the FM Reception Mode When an stereo FM program tuned currently is noisy, you can To erase a stored preset station change the FM reception mode to improve the reception. Storing a new station on a used number erases the previously stored one. Press AUDIO/FM MODE. AUDIO/FM MODE The indicator goes off from the display and the program loses the stereo effect. To resume the stereo effect, press AUDIO/FM MODE again. The stereo effect resumes. Note: The FM reception mode will also resume in the following case: • When you change the frequency or the preset number EN47-48TH-A30[UW].pm6 48 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,Setting up the DVD Preferences Setting the Initial Languages
STANDBY/ON You can select your favorite language you listen to or read on the TVAUDIO
screen. When you operate this system or watch a DVD, you will be able to TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE operate the system or to enjoy a DVD in the language you have DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL selected and stored. AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME On the language selection menu, you can select the following:VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET LANGUAGES SYSTEM DOWN UP REW FF OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH VCR CHANNEL TUNING AUDIO ENGLISH B.SEARCH F.SEARCH SUBTITLE ENGLISH ∞ 5 MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISHENTER ENTER
» « | \ : Move Setup : ExitVOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING RETURN OSD LANGUAGE : Select the indication language shown on the TV screen while operating the SOUND system. (ex. PLAY, STOP, PAUSE, etc.) 123SETTING AUDIO : Select the language you listen to while456PRO LOGIC watching a DVD. 789SLOW SETUP TEST SETUP 0 SUBTITLE : Select the subtitle language you read ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE while watching a DVD. REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM MENU LANGUAGE : Select the menu language recorded on a CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP DVD which you use while operating the DVD’s own menu.Languages you can select on this menu
On the Setup menu, you can do the two main important settings— You can select the following languages separately for each listed language selection (LANGUAGES) menu and system setting item on the menu. (SYSTEM) menu. • For “OSD LANGUAGE”: • Setup menu can only be displayed while a disc is not playing. English, Chinese, Spanish, French, German, Japanese, and (The DVD player must be selected as the source.) Korean. • You can only use the remote control for Setup menu operations. • For “AUDIO,” “SUBTITLE,” and “MENU LANGUAGE”: English, Chinese, French, German, Japanese, Russian, Spanish, Portuguese, Korean and Original*. * Available only for “AUDIO” and “SUBTITLE.” When you want to operate the disc or enjoy its playback in the originally recorded (default) language, select “ORIGINAL.” Note: The original language will be selected as the initial language regardless of your setting in the following cases: • If the language you have selected is not recorded on the disc. • If the disc is programed to be played back in the original language. EN49-53TH-A30[UW].pm6 49 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,Basic language selecting procedure Introducing the DVD Preference (System)
Ex. : To select the desired language as the initial language for “AUDIO.” You can set the DVD preference to match it to your usage and From the remote control ONLY: operating circumstances. 1 Press SETUP. SETUP On the system setting menu, you can set the following: Language selection menu of the Setup menu appears on LANGUAGES SYSTEM the TV screen. LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB RATING LEVEL OFF OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH AUDIO ENGLISH SUBTITLE ENGLISH MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISH » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit TV SCREEN: Select the TV screen size for playing back a DVD 2 recorded with 16:9 wide screen video signal.Press ∞ (or 5) to select • 4:3 LB : Select “4:3 LB (Letter Box)” (highlight) one of the language when the aspect ratio of your TV items. is 4:3. While viewing a wideENTER
LANGUAGES SYSTEM screen picture, the black bars appear on the top and the bottom OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH of the screen. AUDIO ENGLISH SUBTITLE ENGLISH • 4:3 PS : Select “4:3 PS (Pan-Scan)” when MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISH the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3. While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit appear, however, the left and right edge sides of the pictures will not 3 Press ENTER. be shown on the screen. Pop-up window appears (where the • 16:9 : Select “16:9” when the language names are listed). aspect ratio of the TV is ENTER 16:9. (Set the screen size to “ ” indicates the current full on your TV.) setting. LANGUAGES SYSTEM RATING LEVEL :You can select this to restrict playback of DVDs OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH containing violent scenes and those not suitable AUDIO EENNGGLILSIHSH for your family members. (See page 52 for SUBTITLE ECNHGLINISEHSE FRENCH detailed operations.)MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISHGERMAN JAPANESE RUSSIAN
» « | \ : Move Setup : Exit indicates that more languages are listed, but not shown. 4 Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) the language you want, then press ENTER.ENTER
The setting is stored (and the pop-up window goes off). • When you want to cancel the setting you have just made, press RETURN without pressing ENTER. (Pop-up menu also goes off.) 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to select the other language items listed.To erase the Setup menu SETUP
Press SETUP. EN49-53TH-A30[UW].pm6 50 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,Setting up the DVD Preferences
3 Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) one of the system STANDBY/ON AUDIO setting items listed on the menu. ENTER TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE LANGUAGES SYSTEM DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME RATING LEVEL OFFVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 3/2/5/∞ 4 Press ENTER.ENTER Pop-up window appears (where the ENTER
selectable settings are listed). ENTER indicates the current setting.VOLUME
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING RETURN TV SCREEN 4:43 :L 3B LBNumber SOUND RATING LEVEL O4F F: 3 PS
buttons12316 : 9SETTING
456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST SETUP ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM 5 Press ∞ (or 5) to select CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP (highlight) the proper setting, then press ENTER.The setting is stored (and the pop-up ENTER
window goes off).Setting the TV screen size • When you want to cancel the setting
you have just made, press RETURN without pressing ENTER. (Pop-upFrom the remote control ONLY:
SETUP menu also goes off.)1 Press SETUP.Language selection menu of the setup menu appears on • Even if “4:3 PS” is selected, the screen size may become
the TV screen. “4:3 LB” while playing some DVDs. This depends on how LANGUAGES SYSTEM the DVD is programed and recorded. • If a disc (or some portions of the disc) is recorded with OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH the video signals of 4:3 aspect ratio, this setting does not AUDIO ENGLISH take effect. The pictures are displayed with full 4:3 aspect SUBTITLE ENGLISH MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISH ratio or with 4:3 Letter Box. » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit To erase the Setup menu 2 Press ENTER (or 3/2) to Press SETUP. SETUP select (highlight) the system setting menu.ENTER
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB RATING LEVEL OFF » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit EN49-53TH-A30[UW].pm6 51 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,Setting the Parental (Rating) Level 5 Press the number buttons to enter the password
(4 digits).Using this function, you can restrict playback of DVD containing • When shipped from the factory, password is “7890.”
violent scenes and those not suitable for your family members. • If you enter a wrong password, your setting will be canceled.Nobody can play such a disc unless this function is canceled.
(“WRONG PARENTAL LEVEL” appears on the TV screen if you LANGUAGES SYSTEM try to play back such a disc.) TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB • This setting takes effect only for the DVDs containing the rating ENTER PASSWORD *** level information—Level 1 (most restrictive) to Level 8 (least DIGITAL OUTPUT restrictive).From the remote control ONLY:
1 » « | \ : Move Setup : ExitPress SETUP. SETUPLanguage selection menu of the setup menu appears on
the TV screen. 2 Press ENTER (or 3/2) to select (highlight) the system LANGUAGES SYSTEM setting menu. TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB ENTER RATING LEVEL OFOFF BILTESVTERLE 1AM LANGUAGES SYSTEM LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB LEVEL 4 RATING LEVEL OFF LEVEL 5 » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit 6 Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) the level you want, 3 Press ∞ (or 5) to select then press ENTER.ENTER
(highlight) “RATING LEVEL.”ENTER
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB RATING LEVEL OFFTo erase the Setup menu SETUP
» « | \ : Move Setup : ExitPress SETUP again.
4 Press ENTER. “RATING LEVEL” now changes to “ENTER PASSWORD” on the menu.ENTER
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB ENTER PASSWORD » « | \ : Move Setup : ExitTO BE CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
EN49-53TH-A30[UW].pm6 52 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,Setting up the DVD Preferences
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB STANDBY/ON RATING LEVEL OLFEFVEL 4 AUDIO BILTESVTERLE 5AM LEVEL 6 TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE LEVEL 7 LEVEL 8 DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL NEW PASSWORD » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUMEVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
LANGUAGES SYSTEM B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 5/∞ TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LBENTER NEW PASSWORD - ENTER VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING » « | \ : Move Setup : ExitNumber SOUND
123• If “NEW PASSWORD” is the last item listed on the pop-up buttons SETTING window and is not shown, pressing ∞ repeatedly will show it456PRO LOGIC in the pop-up window. 789SLOW SETUP TEST SETUP ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE 3 Press the number buttons to REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM enter a new password, then CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP ENTER.Your new password is now stored. ENTER SETUP To change the password To erase the Setup menu Press SETUP again.
1 Repeat steps 1 to 5 of “Setting the Parental (Rating) Level” procedure. To reset the passwordYou can reset the password to the initial setting “7890.”
2 Press ∞ (or 5) to select REMEMBER all the other preset settings such as the speaker (highlight) “NEW settings, preset stations, Sleep Timer, DVD setup menu settings are also reset to the factory settings.PASSWORD,” then ENTER. ENTER While the source is DVD player and playback stops, press and
hold 7 on the front panel until the “INITIAL” appears on the display. EN49-53TH-A30[UW].pm6 53 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,Operating JVC’s Components You can use the remote control to operate not only this unit but also other JVC products.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied for the other products. — This remote control can operate a VCR whose remote control code is set to A code. • To operate the other products, aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on the target product. ❏ To operate a JVC’s TVYou can perform the following operations on the TV.
STANDBY/ON AUDIO TV : Turn on or off the TV.TV VOLUME +/– : Adjust the volume. TV TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE TV/VIDEO TV/VIDEO : Set the input mode (either TV or
DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNELTV CHANNEL TV VOLUME VIDEO).
AUDIO/ +/– FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME +/– TV CHANNEL +/– : Change the channels.VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF ❏ To operate a JVC’s VCRAfter pressing VCR CONTROL on the remote VCR CONTROL
control, you can perform the following operations STANDBY/ON AUDIO on the VCR.VCR TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE STEP DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL VCR : Turn on or off the VCR.
AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME VCR CHANNEL +/– : Change the channels.VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL VCR CONTROL 1 – 9, 0 : Select TV channel on the VCR. TUNER PRESET 3/8 : Start playback.4 DOWN UP ¢ 7 : Stop playback. REW FFVCR CHANNEL VCR CHANNELTUNING VCR CHANNEL STEP : Pause playback. To release it,
– +B.SEARCH F.SEARCH press 3/8. 7 3/8 FF (¢) : Fast-wind a tape. ENTER REW (4) : Rewind a tape. VOLUME After operating the VCR, press DVD FM/AM TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING DVD or FM/AM.Number SOUND
123buttons SETTING456IMPORTANT: PRO LOGIC789When you press VCR CONTROL, some buttons on the SLOW SETUP TEST 0 remote control cannot work for operating this unit. ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODETo operate this unit, press DVD or FM/AM.
REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP EN54-58TH-A30[UW].pm6 54 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,Operating Other Manufacturers’ TV
❏ To change the transmittable signals for operating a You can use the remote control to operate other TV manufactures’ TV. • Refer also to the manuals supplied for the other products. 1. Press and hold TV . • To operate the other products, aim the remote control 2. Enter manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9, and 0. directly at the remote sensor on the target product. 3. Release TV . Now, you can perform the following operations on the TV. TV : Turn on or off the TV. STANDBY/ON TV VOLUME +/– : Adjust the volume.AUDIO
TV/VIDEO : Set the input mode (either TV or TV TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE TV/VIDEO VIDEO) DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL TV VOLUME TV CHANNEL +/– : Change the channels. TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME +/–+/–VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL 4. Try to operate your TV by pressing TV . When your TV turns on or off, you have entered the correct TUNER PRESET DOWN UP code. REW FF VCR CHANNEL TUNING If there are more than one code listed for your brand of TV, B.SEARCH F.SEARCH try each one until the correct one is entered. ENTER Manufacturers’ codes for TV Manufacturer Codes JVC 01VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING Hitachi 10 Magnavox 04 Number SOUND Mitsubishi 13 buttons123Panasonic 12, 24SETTING
456RCA 07, 29 PRO LOGIC789Samsung 11 SLOW SETUP TEST 0 Sanyo 05, 20 ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE Sharp 02, 16, 22 REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM Sony 03 CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP Toshiba 09 Zenith 17 Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment. EN54-58TH-A30[UW].pm6 55 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,Maintenance
To get the best performance of the unit, keep your discs and mechanism clean. General Notes Cleaning the unit In general, you will have the best performance by keeping your • Stains on the unit discs, and the mechanism clean. Should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the unit is heavily stained, • Store discs in their cases, and keep them in cabinets or on shelves. wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-diluted neutral detergent and • Keep the disc tray closed when not in use. wrung well, then wipe clean with a dry cloth. • Since the unit may deteriorate in quality, become damaged or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following. — DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth. Handling Discs — DO NOT wipe it strong. — DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine. — DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides to it. • Remove the disc from its case by — DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact with holding it at the edge while it for a long time. pressing the center hole lightly. • Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc. • Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping. • Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc when placing it back in its case. • Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes, and moisture. To clean the disc Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge. DO NOT use any solvent—such as conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner, or benzine—to clean the disc. EN54-58TH-A30[UW].pm6 56 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,Troubleshooting
Use this chart to help you solve daily operational problems. If there is any problem you cannot solve, contact your JVC service center. PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION Power does not come on. The power cord is not connected correctly. Insert the plug into the socket. The remote control does not work. • It is too far from the center unit, or is not • Come close to the center unit. facing the center unit. • There is something obstructing the remote • Avoid any obstacles. sensor. • The VCR CONTROL button has been • Press DVD or FM/AM to operate the pressed. system. (See page 54.) • The battery is flat. • Replace the battery. • The battery has been inserted the wrong • Insert the battery correctly. way round (+/–). • Sunlight is falling directly on the detector. • Shade the remote control from direct sunlight. No sound. • There is a short in the speaker cord. • Reconnect the speaker cord. • The audio cord is not connected properly. • Connect the cord properly. (See page 9.) • An incorrect source has been selected. • Select the correct source. (See pages 11 to 16.) • Muting is on. • Press MUTING to cancel muting. • The disc is copy–protected CD. • Replace the disc. Sound is emitted from only one speaker. • The speaker cord is not connected correctly. • Connect the cord properly. (See page 8.) • Left-right balance is incorrect. • Adjust balance. (See pages 22 to 26.) No video. • The video cord is not connected properly. • Connect the cord properly. (See page 10.) • TV input selection is incorrect. • Select the correct input. No picture is displayed on the TV screen, the • The color system of the disc does not match • Change the color system, or replace the picture is blurred, or the picture is divided the system. disc.(See page 17.) into two parts. • The scanning mode is set to “P–SCAN • Change the scanning mode to “I–SCAN MODE” though the system is connected to MODE.” (See page 17.) the TV which does not support the progressive video input such as a conventional TV. A disc cannot be played. • The system and disc region code numbers • Replace the disc. (See page 27.) are incompatible. • The disc causes the parental (rating) error. • Enter password to change the parental (rating) level. (See page 52.) “WRONG DISC FORMAT” appears on the • The CD–R/CD–RW does not contain any • Replace the disc. TV screen. MP3 files. Pictures and sounds are distorted. • The disc is dirty. • Clean the disc. • A VCR is connected between the center unit • Connect the center unit and TV directly. and the TV. Pictures are distorted when progressive mode • “Progressive Mode ” may not be set • Change “Progressive Mode” is selected. appropriately for the current disc. (See page 16.) The edge is missing on the picture image. • Initial setup (TV screen size) was incorrect. • Set TV screen size correctly. (See pages 50 and 51.) Continuous static during FM broadcasts. • The received signal is too weak. • Connect an external FM antenna (see page 6), or contact your dealer. • The station is too far away. • Select another station. • The antenna is not connected correctly. • Check the connection. (See page 6.) The system does not work correctly. • Lightning or electronic noise interferes with • Switch power off, and remove and re-insert operation of the microcomputer. the power plug in the socket. • Immediately after heating the room, the unit • Turn off the power, plug off and leave the was moved to a cold location causing unit a few hours before switching power on condensation to form inside. again. The VCR cannot be operated using this • The remote control is not set for VCR • Press VCR CONTROL to operate the VCR. remote control. operations. (See page 54.) • The VCR is not a JVC’s product. • This remote control can operate a JVC’s VCR whose remote control code is set to A code. EN54-58TH-A30[UW].pm6 57 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,Specifications
Center unit (XV-THA30) Subwoofer (SP-WA30) Amplifier section Speaker: 20 cm Front/Center/Rear: Bass-reflex, Magnetically Shielded 25 watts per channel, min. RMS at 6 ohms as 1 kHz, Power Handling Capacity: 110 W with no more than 10 % total harmonic distortion. Impedance: 4 Ω (min) Subwoofer: Frequency Range: 25 Hz to 200 Hz 110 watts, min. RMS at 4 ohms as 100 Hz, Dimensions (W × H × D): 249 mm × 404 mm × 335 mm with no more than 10 % total harmonic distortion. Mass: 6.5 kg (except cords) Audio section Audio input sensitivity/Impedance (at 1 kHz) Satellite Speakers (SP-XA30) AUX IN: 500 mV/47 kΩ Speakers: 8 cm Bass-reflex, Magnetically Shielded Video section Power Handling Capacity: 35 W Color System: NTSC/PAL Impedance: 6 Ω (min) For NTSC discs, the scanning mode can be selected between Frequency Range: 90 Hz to 20 kHz interaced scanning and progressive scanning. For PAL discs, Length of cords: 6 m only interaced scanning mode is available. Dimensions (W × H × D): 105 mm × 119 mm × 126 mm Horizontal Resolution: 480 lines Mass: 600 g (except cords) Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 68 dB Output Level VIDEO OUT VIDEO (Composite): 1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω Rear Satellite Speakers (SP-XSA30) S-VIDEO (Y): 1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω (C): 0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω Speakers: 8 cm COMPONENT OUT Bass-reflex, Magnetically Shielded Y: 1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω Power Handling Capacity: 35 W PB/PR: 0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω Impedance: 6 Ω (min) Frequency Range: 90 Hz to 20 kHz Tuner section Length of cords: 10 m Tuning Range FM : 87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz AM : 531 kHz – 1 602 kHz Dimensions (W × H × D): 105 mm × 119 mm × 126 mm (at 9 kHz intervals) Mass: 600 g (except cords) 530 kHz – 1 600 kHz (at 10 kHz intervals) Usable Sensitivity FM: 8.0 dBf (0.9 µV/75 Ω) Designs & specifications are subject to change without notice. AM loop antenna: 650 µV/m General Readable discs: DVD VIDEO, Video CD, Super Video CD, Audio CD, CD–R/RW (Audio CD, Video CD, Super Video CD, MP3 disc), DVD–R (Video format) Power Requirements: AC 110 V – 127 V/220 V – 240 V , adjustable with the voltage selector, 50 Hz/60 Hz Power Consumption: 120 W (at operation) 2 W (in standby mode) Dimensions (W × H × D): 350 mm × 80 mm × 365mm Mass: 6.5 kg EN54-58TH-A30[UW].pm6 58 02.8.23, 5:31 PM,Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A., Canada, Australia
and U.K.)Instrucción sobre la línea de la red (CA) (no aplicable para Europa, EE.UU., Canadá, Australia, ni el Reino Unido) Instrução sobre a tensão da rede eléctrica (CA) (não aplicável para a Europa, os E.U.A., o Canadá, a AustráliaeoReino Unido)
COMPONENT OUT PR PB Y MIN MIN 4 MIN MIN CAUTION for mains (AC) line BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your mains PRECAUÇÃO para a ligação à tensão da rede (CA) (AC) line voltage corresponds with the position of the ANTES DE LIGAR O APARELHO A UMA TOMADA voltage selector switch provided on the outside of this DA REDE, verifique se a tensão da rede CA corresponde equipment and, if different, reset the voltage selector à posição do selector de voltagem localizado na parte switch, to prevent from a damage or risk of fire/electric externa deste equipamento. Caso não corresponda, reajuste shock. o selector de voltagem a fim de evitar avarias ou riscos de incêndio e choque eléctrico. PRECAUCIÓN para la línea de la red (CA) ANTES DE ENCHUFAR EL EQUIPO, compruebe si la tensión de la línea de la red (CA) corresponde con la posición del selector de tensión situado en la parte exterior del equipo, y si es diferente, reajuste el selector de tensión para evitar el riesgo de incendios/ descargas eléctricas. VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED EN, SP, PR JVC 0802KSMMDWSAM TH-A30[UW]cover.pm6 2 02.8.19, 6:25 PM,DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30 Consists of XV-THA30, SP-XA30, SP-XSA30 and SP-WA30
STANDBY/ONAUDIO
TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUMEVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCHENTER VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGSTANDBY
AUDIO/FM MODE STANDBY/ON DSP VOLUME SOURCE DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30DIGITALRM-STHA30U DVD CINEMA SYSTEMINSTRUCTIONS
For Customer Use: Enter below the Model No. and Serial No. which are located either on the rear, bottom or side of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference. Model No. Serial No.LVT0945-006A
[UG] TH-A30[UG]cover.pm6 1 02.8.19, 11:01 AM,Warnings, Cautions and Others /
Caution –– STANDBY/ON switch! Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely. The STANDBY/ON switch in any position does not disconnect the mains line. The power can be remote controlled.CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.: 1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet. 2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.CAUTION
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes. (If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.) • Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted candles, on the apparatus. • When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be considered and local rules or laws governing the disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly. • Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus. Caution: Proper Ventilation To avoid risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from damage. Locate the apparatus as follows: Front: No obstructions open spacing. Sides: No obstructions in 10 cm from the sides. Top: No obstructions in 10 cm from the top. Back: No obstructions in 15 cm from the back Bottom: No obstructions, place on the level surface. In addition, maintain the best possible air circulation as illustrated. Spacing 15 cm or more XV-THA30 Wall or obstructions Front Stand height 15 cm or more FloorG-1
TH-A30[UG]safety.pm6 1 02.8.10, 6:12 PM,IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS /
REPRODUCTION OF LABELS / 1 CLASSIFICATION LABEL, PLACED ON EXTERIOR 2 WARNING LABEL, PLACED INSIDE THE UNITSURFACE
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASER LAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1 1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT 2. CAUTION: Invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam. 3. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.G-2
TH-A30[UG]safety.pm6 2 02.8.10, 6:12 PM,Table of Contents
Parts Identification ... 2 DVD Playback ... 29 Center Unit ... 2 Showing the On-Screen Bar ... 29 Remote Control ... 3 Selecting the Subtitles ... 30 Getting Started... 5 Selecting the Audio Languages ... 30 Selecting the Multi-Angle Views ... 30 Before Installation ... 5 Checking the Remaining Time ... 31 Checking the Supplied Accessories ... 5 Disc Menu-Driven Playback ... 31 Adjusting the Voltage Selector ... 5 Moving to a Particular Portion Directly ... 32 Putting Batteries in the Remote Control ... 5 Searching for a Particular Point ... 32 Connecting the FM and AM Antennas ... 6 Repeating Playback ... 33 Speaker Layout Diagram ... 7 7 Repeat Play ... 33 Connecting the Speakers ... 8 7 A–B Repeat ... 33 Connecting Audio/Video Component ... 9 Programming the Playing Order of the Chapters Basic DVD Operations ... 11 —Program Play ... 34 1 Turn On the Power ... 11 DVD Special Effect Playback ... 36 2 Select the source ... 11 7 Still Picture/Frame-by-Frame Playback ... 36 3 Load a DVD ... 11 7 Slow Motion Playback ... 36 4 Start Playback ... 11 7 Zoom ... 36 5 Adjust the Volume ... 11 VCD/CD Playback... 37 6 Select an Appropriate Progressive Mode ... 12 Showing the On-Screen Bar ... 37 7 Activate Surround or DSP Mode ... 12 Checking the Remaining Time ... 37 8 Stop Playback ... 12 Disc Menu-Driven Playback (Only for VCD) ... 38 Basic VCD/CD Operations ... 13 Moving to a Particular Portion Directly ... 38 Searching for a Particular Point ... 38 1 Turn On the Power ... 13 Repeating Playback ... 39 2 Select the source ... 13 7 Repeat Play ... 39 3 Load a VCD/CD ... 13 7 A–B Repeat ... 39 4 Start Playback ... 13 Programming the Playing Order of the Tracks 5 Adjust the Volume ... 14 —Program Play ... 40 6 Activate DSP Mode ... 14 Selecting Playback Channel ... 41 7 Stop Playback ... 14 VCD Special Effect Playback ... 42 Basic Tuner Operations ... 15 7 Still Picture/Frame-by-Frame Playback ... 42 1 Turn On the Power ... 15 7 Slow Motion Playback ... 42 2 Select the Band ... 15 7 Zoom ... 42 3 Adjust the Volume ... 15 MP3 Introduction ... 43 4 Tune in to a Station ... 15 MP3 Playback ... 44 Other Basic Operations ... 16 Starting Playback ... 44 Enjoying Sounds from the External Component ... 16 Operations Using the On-Screen Display ... 45 Selecting an Appropriate Progressive Mode ... 16 Moving to a Particular Track Directly ... 46 Turning Off the Power with the Timer ... 16 Repeating Playback ... 46 TV Settings... 17 Tuner Operations ... 47 Changing the Color System ... 17 Setting the AM Tuner Interval Spacing ... 47 Changing the Scanning Mode ... 17 Tuning in Stations ... 47 Using Preset Tuning ... 48 Speaker Settings... 18 Selecting the FM Reception Mode ... 48 Setting the Delay Time ... 18 Setting up the DVD Preferences ... 49 Creating Realistic Sound Fields ... 20 Setting the Initial Languages ... 49 7 Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround... 20 Introducing the DVD Preference (System) ... 50 7 Dolby Surround ... 20 Setting the Parental (Rating) Level ... 52 7 DSP (Digital Signal Processor) Modes ... 21 Adjusting Stereo Sound ... 22 Operating JVC’s Components ... 54 Adjusting Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround ... 23 Operating Other Manufacturers’ TV ... 55 Activating Dynamic Range Compression ... 24 Maintenance ... 56 Adjusting Dolby Surround ... 24 Adjusting DSP Modes ... 25 Troubleshooting ... 57 Disc Introduction—DVD/VCD/CD ... 27 Specifications... 58 Basic Disc Operations ... 28 EN01-10TH-A30[UG].pm6 1 02.8.19, 1:40 PM,Parts Identification Center Unit Front Panel
12345678STANDBY
AUDIO/FM MODE STANDBY/ON DSP VOLUME SOURCE DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30DIGITAL9pqwSee pages in the parentheses for details.Front Panel
1 STANDBY/ON button and STANDBY lamp (11 – 15) 7 Remote sensor 2 AUDIO/FM MODE button (30, 41, 48) 8 3/8 (play/pause) button (11 – 14, 28, 44) 3 Multi operation buttons • Pressing this button also turns on the power and • 4, ¢, and 7 changes the source to the DVD player. 4 Disc tray (11, 13) 9 DSP button (12, 14, 22, 25) 5 0 (open/close) button (11 – 14, 35, 40, 44) p VOLUME + and – buttons (11, 14, 15) • Pressing this button also turns on the power and q SOURCE button (15, 16, 47, 48) changes the source to the DVD player. w Illumination lamp (11 – 15) 6 Display windowDisplay Window
1234567TUNED ST PROGRAM PBC MHz TITLE DSP kHz LINEAR PCMLCRLFE
LS S RS89See pages in the parentheses for details.Display Window
1 Sound signal indicators (12, 14, 16, 20) 5 DSP indicator (21, 25) • PRO LOGIC, DOLBY DIGITAL, DTS, 6 PBC (Play Back Control) indicator (37) and LINEAR PCM 7 Frequency unit indicators 2 TITLE indicator (28) • MHz (for FM station) and kHz (for AM station) 3 Tuner mode indicators (15, 47, 48) 8 Audio channel indicators • TUNED and ST (stereo) • Indicates audio channels currently being played back. 4 PROGRAM indicator (34, 40, 48) 9 Main display EN01-10TH-A30[UG].pm6 2 02.8.19, 1:40 PM,Parts Identification Remote Control
See pages in the parentheses for details.Remote Cotrol Remote Control
1 STANDBY/ON AUDIO button (11 – 15) 2 VCR button (54) 3 TV button (11, 13, 54, 55) STANDBY/ON 4 STEP button (36, 42, 54) 1 AUDIO 5 DISPLAY button (29, 37) 6 AUDIO/FM MODE button (30, 41, 48) 2t7SUBTITLE button (30) TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE3y8Source selecting buttons (11, 13, 15, 16, 24, 47) • DVD, FM/AM, AUX 4 DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL u • Pressing one of these buttons also turns on the power. 5 AUDIO/ 9 4, 7, 3/8, and ¢ buttons FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME6iTUNER PRESET UP and DOWN buttons (48) 7 VCR FF (Fast-forward) and REW (Rewind) buttonsDVD FM/AM AUX CONTROLopVCR CHANNEL + and – buttons (54)8 TUNING + and – buttons (15, 47) TUNER PRESET DOWN UP ¡ F. (Forward) SEARCH and 1 B. (Back) SEARCH 9 buttonsREW FF q Menu operation buttons VCR CHANNELTUNING
p • 3, 2, 5, and ∞ buttons • ENTER button B.SEARCH F.SEARCH w VOLUME + and – buttons (11, 14, 15) e TOP MENU button (31) r MENU button (31, 38) q ENTER t TV/VIDEO button (11, 13, 54, 55) y PROGRESSIVE button (12, 16, 17) u TV CHANNEL + and – buttons (54, 55) i TV VOLUME + and – buttons (54, 55) w VOLUME o VCR CONTROL button (54) TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING e ; IMPORTANT: If you press VCR CONTROL , this remote control will workraONLY for the JVC’s VCR. When you want to operate the system again, press DVD or FM/AM. ; MUTING button (11, 14) a RETURN button (38, 50, 51) RM-STHA30U DVD CINEMA SYSTEM EN01-10TH-A30[UG].pm6 3 02.8.19, 1:40 PM, nInside the Cover Inside the Cover
1 Number buttons (32, 38, 46, 54, 55) 2 SLOW button (36, 42) TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING 3 ZOOM button (36, 42) 4 ANGLE button (30) 5 REPEAT button (33, 39, 46) SOUND 6 A–B REPEAT button (33, 39) 12397CLEAR button (32, 38, 41) SETTING 8 SEARCH button (32, 38, 46) 1456p9SOUND button (22 – 26) PRO LOGIC p SETTING button (18, 19) 789qqPRO LOGIC button (16, 19, 22, 24) 2 SLOW SETUP TESTwwSETUP button (50 – 53) 0e3eTEST button (21)ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODErrD.R.C button (24) 4ttDSP MODE button (12, 14, 22, 25) REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM5yPROGRAM button (34, 35, 40, 48)y6uSLEEP button (16)CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEPuiREMAIN button (31, 37) 8 iTo open the cover of the remote control, push here then
slide downward. VOLUMEDEFM/A TM V VOLUME T AU UX TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING NERCOVP CR NTRRESE OT L B.SE VA CR RCH T CU HN AIN NG NEL ENT F.E SR EARCH TOP MENU M VOE LN UU MERETURN
1 MUTING42753SLO SW86OUND ANG SEL +E 10 9 TTING RE NTS SE PP Z RE O OAT OM C/PTUAL PLOGIC
CL TE AA < REP D E–> E IGA ES
S TRBTTTONE G PRO DO TO GS
R PA MM ODE REM EA FI FN ECTSLEEP
D RV MD -C SIN TE HM AA3S0Y USTEM RM-STHA30U DVD CINEMA SYSTEM EN01-10TH-A30[UG].pm6 4 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Getting Started Before Installation Putting Batteries in the Remote Control
General Precautions Before using the remote control, put two supplied batteries first. • DO NOT insert any metal object into the center unit. • When using the remote control, aim the remote control directly at • DO NOT disassemble the center unit or remove screws, covers, or the remote sensor on the center unit. cabinet. • DO NOT expose the center unit to rain or moisture. 1. On the back of the remote control, remove the battery cover. Locations • Install the center unit in a location that is level and protected from moisture. • The temperature around the center unit must be between 5˚C and 35˚C. • Make sure there is good ventilation around the center unit. Poor ventilation could cause overheating and damage the center unit. Handling the center unit • DO NOT touch the power cord with wet hands. 2. Insert batteries. Make sure to match the polarity: • DO NOT pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When (+) to (+) and (–) to (–). unplugging the cord, always grasp the plug so as not to damage the cord. • Keep the power cord away from the connecting cords and the antenna. The power cord may cause noise or screen interference. It is recommended to use a coaxial cable for antenna connection, since it is well-shielded against interference. • When a power failure occurs, or when you unplug the power cord, the preset settings such as preset FM/AM channels and sound adjustments may be erased in a few days. 3. Replace the cover.Checking the Supplied Accessories
Check to be sure you have all of the following supplied accessories. The number in the parentheses indicates the quantity of the pieces supplied. • Remote Control (1) • Batteries (2) • AM loop antenna (1) If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases, replace • FM antenna (1) the batteries. Use two UM-4“AAA”/IEC “R03” type dry-cell • AC Plug Adaptor (1) batteries. • Video cord (1) CAUTION: If anything is missing, contact your dealer immediately. Follow these precautions to avoid leaking or cracking cells: • Place batteries in the remote control so they match the polarity: (+) to (+) and (–) to (–).Adjusting the Voltage Selector • Use the correct type of batteries. Batteries that look similar may
differ in voltage. • Always replace both batteries at the same time. Before connections, always do the following first if necessary. • Do not expose batteries to heat or flame. Set the correct voltage for your area with the voltage selector switch on the rear panel. Slide the voltage selector using a screw driver, so the voltage number the voltage mark is set at is the same as the voltage where you are plugging in the system. EN01-10TH-A30[UG].pm6 5 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Connecting the FM and AM Antennas
If AM reception is poor, connect single vinyl-covered wire (not supplied). 123AM loop antenna (supplied) If FM reception is poor, connect outdoor FM antenna (not supplied). Snap the tabs on the loop into FM antenna (supplied) the slots of the base to assemble the AM loop antenna. COMPONENT OUT PR PB Y MIN MIN4 MIN MIN Center unit Cooling fan (See “About the cooling fan” below.) FM antenna connection AM antenna connection Connect the supplied FM antenna to the FM 75 Ω COAXIAL Connect the supplied AM loop antenna to the AM and H terminals. terminal as temporary measure. Turn the loop until you have the best reception. Extend the supplied FM antenna horizontally. • If reception is poor, connect an outdoor single vinyl-covered wire • If reception is poor, connect an outdoor antenna. Before attaching to the AM terminal. (Keep the AM loop antenna connected.) a 75 Ω coaxial cable (with a standard type connector), disconnect the supplied FM antenna. Note: If the AM loop antenna wire is covered with vinyl, remove the vinyl by twisting it as shown in the diagram. About the cooling fan A cooling fan is mounted on the rear panel of the center unit to For safety, observe the following carefully. prevent abnormal temperature inside the center unit, thus assuring • Make sure there is good ventilation around the center unit. Poor normal operation of the unit. The cooling fan automatically starts ventilation could overheat and damage the center unit. rotating to supply external cool air to the inside of the center unit • DO NOT block the cooling fan and the ventilation openings or when the internal temperature goes up. holes. (If they are blocked by a newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.) • DO NOT touch the speaker cords to the cooling fan. EN01-10TH-A30[UG].pm6 6 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Getting Started Speaker Layout Diagram Center unit STANDBY
AUDIO/FM MODE STANDBY/ONDIGITALDSP VOLUME SOURCESURROUNDDVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30DIGITALRight front Subwoofer
speakerLeft front
speakerCenter speaker Left rear Right rear
speaker speaker COMPONENT OUT PR PB Y MIN MIN 4 MIN MINTo right rear To center speaker To left front speaker
speakerTo left rear To subwoofer To right front speaker
speaker EN01-10TH-A30[UG].pm6 7 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Connecting the Speakers When setting the speakers
To obtain the best possible sound from this system, you need to Connect the satellite speakers and subwoofer to the terminals on the place all the speakers except the subwoofer at the same distance rear panel using speaker cords supplied. from the listening position with each front faced toward the listener. Labels are attached to the speaker cords to indicate the terminals to Since bass sound is non-directional, you can place a subwoofer be connected. wherever you like. Normally place it in front of you. • Connect the red cord to the red (+) terminal, and the black cord to Left front Center speaker Right front speaker speaker the black (–) terminal respectively. CAUTION: Subwoofer Use speakers with the SPEAKER IMPEDANCE indicated by the speaker terminals.Connecting speaker cords to the terminals
123Left rear Right rear speaker speaker If your speakers cannot be placed at the same distance from the listening position You can adjust the delay time of the center speaker and rear speakers. For in-depth information about adjusting the delay time, see “Setting the Delay Time” on page 18 and 19. 1 Press and hold the terminal clamp. Note: 2 Insert the speaker cord. You can change the phase of subwoofer sounds by connecting the speaker cords to the terminals inversely—the red cord to the black 3 Release the finger from the clamp. terminal, and the black cord to the red terminal. You may get the more effective bass sounds by changing the phase. Notes: • If the speaker cord is covered with vinyl, remove the CAUTION: vinyl by twisting it as shown in the diagram. • Make sure the core wire of speaker cords do not expose • When attaching the satellite speakers on the wall, have them to out of the terminals.This could cause short-circuit. attached to the wall by a qualified person. DO NOT attach the satellite speakers on the wall by yourself to avoid an unexpected damage of their falling from the wall, caused by incorrect attachment or weakness in the wall. • Care is required in selecting a location for attaching speakers to the wall. Injury to personnel, or damage to equipment, may result if the speakers are attached in a location which interferes with daily activities. EN01-10TH-A30[UG].pm6 8 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Getting Started Connecting Audio/Video Component
Turn the power off to all components before connections. Audio component connection Connect another component to the center unit with the Illustrations of the input/output terminals below are typical audio cords. examples. Use the cords supplied with another component or purchase When you connect another component, refer also to its them at an electric appliance store. manuals since the terminal name actually printed on the rear vary among the components. Audio cord (not supplied) If you connect a sound-enhancing device such as a graphic equalizer between the source component and the center unit, the sound output through this system may be distorted. DBS Tuner Center unit COMPONENT OUT PR PB Y MD RecorderMIN
Cassette DeckAUDIO LEFT RIGHT VCR OUT TV
EN01-10TH-A30[UG].pm6 9 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,TV connection
The S-video cord and the component video cord are not supplied with this system. Use the cords supplied with another components or purchase them at an electric appliance store.A Composite video cord (supplied) C Component video cord (not supplied)
Red BlueB
S-video cord (not supplied) Green You can select one of three connection types— A , B , and C . Illustrations below are typical examples. • If your TV has S-video (Y/C-separation) and/or component video When you connect the TV, refer also to its manual since the (Y, P , P ) jacks, connect them using an S-video cord (not terminal names actually printed on the rear vary among theR B supplied) B and/or component video cord (not supplied) C . components. By using these jacks, you can get a better picture quality—in the order : Component video > S-video > Composite video. • If your TV supports the progressive video input, you can enjoy a high quality picture by making the progressive scanning mode active (see page 17.)A B Center unit TV
CONPONENT OUT PR PB Y MIN MIN MIN MIN CONPONENT OUT PR PB Y Green YC
Red Green Blue PB/CB PR/CR Blue RedNow, you can plug the power cord of the center unit into the AC outlet.
Note: Keep the power cord away from the connecting cords and the antenna cables. The power cord may cause noise or screen interference. EN01-10TH-A30[UG].pm6 10 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Basic DVD Operations
This manual mainly explains operations using the buttons on 2 Select the Source the remote control. You can also use the buttons on the center DVD unit if they have the similar names (or marks) as those on the Press DVD. remote control. The source changes to DVD. If operations using the center unit are different from those using the remote control, they are then explained. 1 3 Load a DVDSTANDBY/ON AUDIO STANDBY/ON AUDIO On the front panel ONLY: Press 0 to open the disc tray, then place a DVD correctly TV TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE 6 PROGRESSIVE with its label side up. DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL TV/VIDEO AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME 2 DVD VCR DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL 8 TUNER PRESET7 DOWN UP 4 3/8 CORRECT INCORRECT REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH ENTER 4 Start Playback TUNER PRESET55VOLUME + Press 3/8.VOLUME – VOLUME The disc tray closes. “LOADING” appears for TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING MUTING a while. • You can also start playback by closing theSOUND
123disc tray using 0 on the front panel.SETTING
456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST05Adjust the Volume ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE 7 DSP MODE REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM To increase the volume, press and hold VOLUME +. CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP To decrease the volume, press and hold VOLUME –.VOLUME
• Before playing the disc, select the color system to match the your TV. See “Changing the Color System” on page 17. CAUTION: • For in-depth information about DVD operations, see Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any source. If pages 27 to 36. the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound energy can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin your speakers. 1 Turn On the Power Notes: Before turning on the system, turn on your TV and select the correct • By pressing VOLUME + or – repeatedly, you can adjust the volume video input. (See the manual supplied with your TV.) level step by step. • When you use a JVC’s TV, you can turn on your TV by pressing • The volume level can be adjusted within 51 steps—“MIN (minimum),” TV on the remote control, and select the video input by 01 to 49, and “MAX (maximum).” pressing TV/VIDEO. (If your TV is not a JVC’s, see “Operating Other Manufacturers’ TV” on page 55.) To turn off the sounds temporarily • For changing the OSD messages—the information on the TV screen—into the desired language, see “Setting the Initial From the remote control ONLY: Languages” on pages 49 and 50. Press MUTING. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON To restore the sound, press STANDBY/ON on the front panel). AUDIO MUTING again. The STANDBY lamp goes off and the illumination • Pressing VOLUME + or – also restores the sound. lamp on the center unit lights up. The source indication selected previously appears on the display. EN11-19TH-A30[UG].pm6 11 02.8.19, 1:41 PM, ns 6 Select an Appropriate Progressive Mode To activate DSP modes Press DSP MODE (or DSP on the front panel). DSP MODE You can select the progressive mode according to the picture type The DSP indicator lights up and the current DSP mode (film or video source). appears on the display for a while. • Each time you press the button, DSP mode changes Press PROGRESSIVE repeatedly until the PROGRESSIVE as follows: progressive mode you want appears. • Each time you press the button, the progressive THEATER HALL LIVE CLUB mode changes as follows: Normal VIDEO MODE FILM MODE indication DANCE CLUB (canceled) AUTO MODE — For in-depth information about DSP modes, see “Creating Realistic Sound Fields” on pages 21, 25, and 26. Notes: • This mode is available only when progressive scanning mode is selected. Note: • For in-depth information about each progressive mode, see page 16. Before activating surround or DSP mode, adjust the speaker setting to bring out the best performance from this system. 7 For in-depth information about adjusting the speaker setting, see Activate Surround or DSP Mode “Speaker Settings” on pages 18 and 19. You can enjoy two kinds of surround—Digital Multichannel Surround (Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround) and DSP modes. 8 Stop Playback Digital Multichannel Surround—Dolby Digital Press 7 twice. TUNER PRESET and DTS Digital Surround Playback stops completely and “DVD” appears on the display. (The DVD player goes on Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround takes effect only when you working for 3 minutes after playback stops.) enjoy a disc encoded with its signals—the DOLBY DIGITAL or • This system can memorize the end point even DTS indicator lights up on the display. when you press 7 once. When you start playback again by pressing 3/8, playback begins from where it has been stopped— Sound signal Resume play. indicators on the display To remove the loaded disc Press 0. “OPEN” appears on the display and the disc tray comes out. To activate Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround To close the disc tray, press 0 again. When a disc encoded with the Dolby Digital or DTS Digital • If you do not press the button, the disc tray closes Surround is loaded, the system detects it and starts playing the disc automatically after 3 minutes. automatically with Multichannel Surround activated. – For in-depth information about surround modes, see “Creating Realistic Sound Fields” on pages 20 and 23 . To turn off the power (into standby) STANDBY/ON Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (orAUDIO
DSP modes—THEATER, HALL, LIVE CLUB, STANDBY/ON on the front panel). DANCE CLUB The illumination lamp goes off and the STANDBY lamp lights up. DSP modes take effect only when you enjoy a disc recorded using • If you press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON Linear PCM—the LINEAR PCM indicator lights up on the display. on the front panel) while the disc tray is kept open, the disc tray closes automatically, then the system is turned off. • A small amount of power is consumed even in standby mode. To Sound signal turn the power off completely, unplug the AC power cord. indicators on the display EN11-19TH-A30[UG].pm6 12 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Basic VCD/CD Operations
2 Select the Source 1 STANDBY/ON AUDIO STANDBY/ON DVD AUDIO Press DVD. TV TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL TV/VIDEO 3 Load a VCD/CD AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME 2 VCR DVD DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL On the front panel ONLY: 7 Press 0 to open the disc tray, then place a disc correctly7 TUNER PRESETDOWN UP 4 3/8 with its label side up. REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCHENTER
CORRECT INCORRECT 5 VOLUME – 5 VOLUME +VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING MUTING • When using a CD single (8 cm), place it on the inner circle of the SOUND disc tray. 123SETTING • Continued use of irregular shape CDs (heart-shape, octagonal, 456PRO LOGIC etc.) can damage the center unit. 789SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE 6 DSP MODE REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM 4 Start Playback CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP Press 3/8. TUNER PRESET The disc tray closes. “LOADING” appears for a while. • You can also start playback by closing the • Before playing the disc, select the color system to disc tray using 0 on the front panel. match the your TV. See “Changing the Color System” on page 17. • SVCD can be operated by using the VCD operation procedure. • For in-depth information about VCD/CD operations, see pages 27, 28, and 37 to 42. 1 Turn On the Power Before turning on the system, turn on your TV if necessary and select the correct video input. (See the manual supplied with your TV.) • When you use a JVC’s TV, you can turn on your TV by pressing TV on the remote control, and select the video input by pressing TV/VIDEO. (If your TV is not a JVC’s, see “Operating Other Manufacturers’ TV” on page 55.) • For changing the OSD messages—the information on the TV screen—into the desired language, see “Setting the Initial Languages” on pages 49 and 50. Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON STANDBY/ON on the front panel). AUDIO The STANDBY lamp goes off and the illumination lamp on the center unit lights up. The source indication selected previously appears on the display. EN11-19TH-A30[UG].pm6 13 02.8.19, 1:41 PM, 5 Note: Adjust the Volume Before activating DSP mode, adjust the speaker setting to bring out the best performance from this system. To increase the volume, press and hold VOLUME +. For in-depth information about adjusting the speaker setting, see To decrease the volume, press and hold VOLUME –. “Speaker Settings” on pages 18 and 19. VOLUME 7 Stop Playback CAUTION: Press 7 twice. TUNER PRESET Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any source. If Playback stops completely and “VCD” or “CD” the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound energy appears on the display. (The DVD player goes can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin your speakers. on working for 3 minutes after playback stops.) • This system can memorize the end point even when you press 7 Notes: once. When you start playback again by pressing 3/8, playback begins from where it has been stopped—Resume play. • By pressing VOLUME + or – repeatedly, you can adjust the volume level step by step. • The volume level can be adjusted within 51 steps—“MIN (minimum),” To remove the loaded disc 01 to 49, and “MAX (maximum).” Press 0. “OPEN” appears on the display and the disc tray comes out. To turn off the sounds temporarily To close the disc tray, press 0 again. From the remote control ONLY: • If you do not press the button, the disc tray closes Press MUTING. automatically after 3 minutes.TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING To restore the sound, press MUTING again. To turn off the power (into standby) • Pressing VOLUME + or – also restores the sound. Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON STANDBY/ON on the front panel). AUDIO 6 The illumination lamp goes off and the STANDBYActivate DSP Mode lamp lights up. You can enjoy DSP modes. • If you press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) while the disc tray is kept open, the disc tray DSP modes—THEATER, HALL, LIVE CLUB, closes automatically, then the system is turned off. DANCE CLUB • A small amount of power is consumed even in standby mode. To turn the power off completely, unplug the AC power cord. DSP modes take effect only when you enjoy a disc recorded using Linear PCM—the LINEAR PCM indicator lights up on the display. Sound signal indicators on the display To activate DSP modes Press DSP MODE (or DSP on the front panel). DSP MODE The DSP indicator lights up and the current DSP mode appears on the display for a while. • Each time you press the button, DSP mode changes as follows: THEATER HALL LIVE CLUB Normal indication DANCE CLUB (canceled) — For in-depth information about DSP modes, see “Creating Realistic Sound Fields” on pages 21, 25, and 26. EN11-19TH-A30[UG].pm6 14 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Basic Tuner Operations
1 3 Adjust the VolumeSTANDBY/ON AUDIO STANDBY/ON To increase the volume, press and hold VOLUME +.AUDIO
To decrease the volume, press and hold VOLUME –. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVEVOLUME
DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME 2 FM/AM VCR CAUTION:DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any source. If TUNER PRESET DOWN UP the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound energy44can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin your speakers.TUNING – REW FFVCR CHANNEL TUNING +TUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH Notes: • By pressing VOLUME + or – repeatedly, you can adjust the volume level step by step.ENTER
• The volume level can be adjusted within 51 steps—“MIN (minimum),” 3 3 01 to 49, and “MAX (maximum).”VOLUME – VOLUME + • You can turn off the sounds temporarily by pressing MUTING.VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING MUTING 4 Tune in to a Station From the remote control: • For in-depth information about tuner operations, see Press and hold TUNING + VCR CHANNEL “Tuner Operations” on pages 47 and 48. or – until the station TUNING • 9 kHz interval spacing is the initial setting for AM frequency starts changing B.SEARCH F.SEARCH tuner. You can change the interval spacing. See continuously on the display. “Setting the AM Tuner Interval Spacing” on page 47. The system starts searching for a station. On the front panel: 1 Turn On the Power 1) Press 7 so that “MANUAL” appears on the display. 2) Press and hold ¢ or 4 until the station frequency starts Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or changing continuously on the display. STANDBY/ON on the front panel). STANDBY/ON The system starts searching for a station.AUDIO
The STANDBY lamp goes off and the illumination lamp lights up on the center unit. Notes: The source indication selected previously appears • When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the system on the display. stops searching, and the indicator lights up on the display. • When an FM stereo program is received, the indicator also 2 lights up. Select the Band • When you press the button repeatedly, the frequency changes step by step. From the remote control: Press FM/AM. To turn off the power (into standby) FM/AM The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON • Each time you press the button, the band alternates STANDBY/ON on the front panel) again. AUDIO between FM and AM. The illumination lamp goes off and the STANDBY lamp lights up. On the front panel: • A small amount of power is consumed even in Press SOURCE repeatedly until the desired band (FM or AM) standby mode. To turn the power off completely, unplug the AC appears on the display. SOURCE power cord. The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. • Each time you press the button, the source changes as follows:DVD player* AUX IN AM FM
* “WAIT” appears on the display. EN11-19TH-A30[UG].pm6 15 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Other Basic Operations
• When Dolby Surround activates, the PRO LOGIC indicator TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE PROGRESSIVE lights up on the display. DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL – For in-depth information about Pro Logic modes, see “Creating AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME Realistic Sound Fields” on pages 20 and 24.VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL AUX TUNER PRESET Selecting an Appropriate Progressive Mode DOWN UP REW FF You can select an appropriate progressive mode according to the VCR CHANNEL TUNING picture type (film or video source). B.SEARCH F.SEARCH From the remote control ONLY: Press PROGRESSIVE repeatedly during playback PROGRESSIVEENTER
until the progressive mode you want appears. • Each time you press the button, the progressive mode changes as follows:VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING VIDEO MODE FILM MODESOUND
123AUTO MODESETTING
456PRO LOGIC VIDEO MODE : Suitable for playing back a video source disc.PRO LOGIC789FILM MODE : Suitable for playing back a film or progressive SLOW SETUP TEST 0 source disc. ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE AUTO MODE : Normally select this. Used to play a disc REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM containing both video and film source CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP SLEEP materials. This system recognizes the picture type (film or video source) of the current chapter.Enjoying Sounds from the External • If the playback picture is unclear or noisy, or the oblique lines of Component the picture are rough, try to change to other modes.
You can enjoy sounds from the external component connected to the Notes: AUX IN jacks on the rear panel of the center unit. • This mode is available only when progressive scanning mode is selected (see page 17). 1 • For VCD/SVCD playback, VIDEO MODE is selected automatically Select AUX as the source. and cannot be changed. From the remote control: Press AUX. AUX Turning Off the Power with the Timer Source changes to the external component connected to the AUX IN jacks. You can fall asleep while listening to music—Sleep Timer. On the front panel: From the remote control ONLY: Press SOURCE repeatedly until “AUX IN” Press SLEEP.SOURCE SLEEP appears on the display. • Each time you press the button, the shut-off time • Each time you press the button, the source changes as follows: changes as follows:DVD player* AUX IN 10 20 30 60 AM FM OFF 150 120 90
(Canceled) * “WAIT” appears on the display. When the shut-off time comes, the system turns off automatically. 2 Start playback on the external component. • For in-depth information about the external equipment, see the manual supplied for it. To check or change the time remaining until the shut-off time When you listen to analog sounds encoded with Dolby Press SLEEP once. Surround, you can enjoy Dolby Surround. SLEEPThe remaining time (in minutes) appears on the display. To activate Dolby Surround, go to step 3. • By pressing SLEEP, you can change the shut-off time. 3 Press PRO LOGIC to activate Dolby PRO LOGICSurround. To cancel the Sleep Timer
• Each time you press the button, Dolby Surround Press SLEEP repeatedly until “OFF” appears on the mode changes as follows: SLEEPdisplay.PRO LOGIC 3 STEREO • Turning off the power also cancels the Sleep Timer. STEREO
(canceled) EN11-19TH-A30[UG].pm6 16 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,TV Settings Changing the Color System Notes
• Progressive scanning mode is available only when color system of NTSC is selected. This system is compatible with the PAL and NTSC systems. Select • Some progressive TVs and High-Definition TVs are not fully the color sytem to match the color system of your TV. Make sure compatible with this system, resulting in the unnatural picture when that the color system of a DVD, Video CD, or SVCD disc labeled on playing back a DVD in the progressive scanning mode. the package matches your TV. In such a case, change the scanning mode to “I–SCAN MODE.” • You can change the color system only when the unit is on To check the compatibility of your TV, contact your local JVC standby. customer service center. • All JVC progressive TVs and High-Definition TVs are fully compatible with this system. On the front panel ONLY: 1 Press and hold ¢ for a while. • During holding the button, the color system To select an appropriate progressive mode for playback pictures, see alternates between “NTSC” and “PAL.” “Selecting an Appropriate Progressive Mode” on page 16. 2 Release ¢ to select the color system you want. About scanning system The conventional scanning method to display video signals on the TV screen is called “Interlaced scanning.” With this method,Changing the Scanning Mode only half of the horizontal lines (called a “field”) are displayed at
a time. So two fields complete a single picture (frame); i.e., the This system supports the progressive scanning system (525p*) as first field, containing all the odd-numbered lines, is followed by well as the conventional interlaced scanning system (525i*). the second field, containing all the even-numbered lines. If your TV equipped with component video jacks supports the On the other hand, the Progressive scanning system scans all progressive video input, you can enjoy a high quality picture by horizontal lines at a time, so you can double the number of activating the progressive scanning mode. scanning lines displayed at a time, resulting in a flicker-free, • Refer also to the instruction manuals supplied with your TV. high-density picture. • If your TV equipped with component video jacks does not support To enjoy the progressive scanned picture, a monitor (or TV or the progressive video input, do not change the scanning mode to projector) connected to the system must support the progressive the progressive scanning mode (P–SCAN MODE.) video inputs. Depending on the material source format, DVD video can be * 525p and 525i indicate the number of scanning lines and scanning classified into two types; film source and video source (note that format of a video signal. some DVD video contain both film source and video source). • 525p indicates 525 scanning lines with progressive format. Film sources are recorded as 24-frame-per-second data, while • 525i indicates 525 scanning lines with interlaced format. (NTSC) video sources are recorded as 30-frame-per-second (60- field-per-second interlaced). From the remote control ONLY: When this system plays back a film source data, uninterlaced progressive output signals are created using the original data. 1 Press DVD. When a video source is played back, the unit interleaves linesDVD between the interlaced lines to create the pseudo uninterlaced You can change the scanning mode only when DVD is selected as the source and playback stops. picture and outputs as the progressive signals. If a disc is no loaded, go to step 3. 2 Press . TUNER PRESET7 Playback stops. 3 Press and hold PROGRESSIVE for a PROGRESSIVE while. • Each time you press and hold the button, the scanning mode alternates between “I–SCAN MODE” and “P–SCAN MODE”. I (Interlace)–SCAN MODE : Select this if your TV equipped with component video jacks does not support the progressive video input (conventional TV). P (Progressive)–SCAN MODE : Select this if your TV equipped with component video jacks supports the progressive video input. EN11-19TH-A30[UG].pm6 17 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Speaker Settings Setting the Delay Time
Adjust the delay time of the sounds from the center speaker and the STANDBY/ON AUDIO rear speakers, comparing to that of the sounds from the front speakers. If the distance to the center speaker* and/or the rear TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE speakers** from your listening point is almost the same as from the DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL front speakers, select “00 MS (msec).” * You can adjust the delay time only when the DOLBY DIGITAL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME or DTS indicator is lit on the display.VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL ** You can adjust the delay time only when the DOLBY DIGITAL, DTS, or PRO LOGIC indicator is lit on the display. TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF VCR CHANNEL TUNING For Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround: B.SEARCH F.SEARCH Before you start, remember... 2 3 There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is ENTER canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again. 1 Select and play a DVD encoded with Dolby VOLUME Digital or DTS Digital Surround. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGSOUND
123SETTING 2 Press SETTING repeatedly until one of SETTINGSETTING
456delay time indications (with the current PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC789setting*) appears on the display. SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP • Each time you press the button, the indication in the main display changes as follows:C–DLY R–DLY Normal indication
(canceled) C–DLY (Center delay) : To register delay time for center speaker—from 0 msec to 5 msec R–DLY (Rear delay) : To register delay time for rear speakers—from 0 msec to 15 msec * The initial setting for the center speaker is “00 MS.” The initial setting for the rear speakers is “00 MS.” If you have already changed the setting, a different value will be shown. 3 Press 3 or 2 to adjust delay time. • 3 : Increases delay time. • 2 : Decreases delay time. ENTER • 1 msec increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to 30 cm increase (or decrease) in distance. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other delay time. EN11-19TH-A30[UG].pm6 18 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Speaker Settings
For Dolby Pro Logic: Left front Center speaker Right front Before you start, remember... speaker speaker There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is Subwoofer canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again. 1 Press AUX to select the external AUX 3.0 m component as the source. 2.7 m 2.4m2Start playing a source encoded with Dolby 2.1 mSurround.
3 Press PRO LOGIC repeatedly on the PRO LOGIC remote control to select Dolby Pro Left rear Right rearspeaker speakerLogic.
4 Press SETTING repeatedly until one of SETTING delay time indications (with the current 1 msec increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to setting*) appears on the display. 30 cm increase (or decrease) in distance. Ex. : In this case, set C–DLY to “01 MS” and R–DLY to “03 MS” • Each time you press the button, the indication in the main display changes as follows: R–DLY Normal indication(canceled) R–DLY (Rear delay) : To register delay time for rear speakers—from 15 msec to 30 msec. * The initial setting for the rear speakers is “15 MS.” If you have already changed the setting, a different value will be shown. 5 Press 3 or 2 to adjust delay time. • 3 : Increases delay time. • 2 : Decreases delay time. ENTER • 1 msec increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to 30 cm increase (or decrease) in distance. EN11-19TH-A30[UG].pm6 19 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Creating Realistic Sound Fields
You can use the following surround to reproduce a realistic sound Dolby Pro Logic and Dolby 3 Stereo field. Dolby Surround encoding format records the left front channel, • Digital Multichannel Surround—Dolby Digital and DTS Digital right front channel, center channel, and rear channel signals (total 4 Surround channels) into 2 channels. • Dolby Surround The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built in this system decodes these 2 • DSP (Digital Signal Processor) modes channel signals into original 4 channel signals—matrix-based multichannel reproduction, and allows you to enjoy a realistic stereo sound in your listening room. Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround To enjoy surround effectively, all the speakers need to be When one of Dolby Surround is selected, the PRO LOGIC indicator connected and activated. lights up on the display. Dolby Digital* Used to reproduce multichannel sound tracks of the software Indications on the display for each surround encoded with Dolby Digital ( ). • Dolby Digital Dolby Digital encoding method (so-called discrete 5.1 channel digital audio format) records and digitally compresses the left front channel, right front channel, center channel, left rear channel, right rear channel, and LFE channel signals (total 6 channels, but LFE channel is counted as 0.1 channel. Therefore, called 5.1 channel). Since each channel is completely independent from the other • DTS Digital Surround channel signals to avoid interference, you can obtain much better sound quality with much stereo and surround effects. In addition, Dolby Digital enables stereo rear sounds, and sets the cutoff frequency of the rear treble at 20 kHz, compared to 7 kHz for Dolby Pro Logic. These facts enhance the sound movement and being-there feelings much more than Dolby Pro Logic. • Dolby Pro Logic When the system detects Dolby Digital signals, the DOLBY DIGITAL indicator lights up on the display. DTS Digital Surround** • Dolby 3 Stereo Used to reproduce multichannel sound tracks of the software encoded with DTS Digital Surround ( ). DTS Digital Surround is another discrete 5.1 channel digital audio format available on CD, LD, and DVD software. Compared to Dolby Digital, audio compression rate is relatively low. • DSP* This fact allows DTS Digital Surround format to add breadth and depth to the reproduced sounds. As a result, DTS Digital Surround features natural, solid and clear sound. When the system detects DTS Digital Surround signals, the DTS indicator lights up on the display. * When you select FM/AM or AUX as the source, the Linear PCM indicator ( ) does not light up. — According to the speaker settings, some audio channel indicators do not light up. In this case, set the speaker setting appropriately. Dolby Surround* Used to reproduce sound tracks of the VCR tapes encoded with Dolby Surround ( DOLBY SURROUND ). This is only used for the sound sources coming through the AUX IN jacks. * Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro **Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Logic,” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992–1997 Dolby pending. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of Laboratories. All rights reserved. Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ©1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. EN20-26TH-A30[UG].pm6 20 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Creating Realistic Sound Fields
DSP (Digital Signal Processor) Modes To check the speaker connections and settings using the test DSP modes have been designed to create important acoustic tone surround elements. 1. Select and play a DVD encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS The sound heard in a theater, a hall, a live club, or a dance club Digital Surround. consists of direct sound and indirect sound—early reflections and 2. Press TEST on the remote control. TEST reflections from behind. Direct sounds reach the listener directly The test tone comes out from the speakers (except without any reflection. On the other hand, indirect sounds are the subwoofer) in the order. delayed by the distances of the ceiling and walls. • If there is a speaker from which no sounds comes out, check These indirect sounds are important elements of the acoustic the speaker’s connection (see pages 7 and 8). surround effects. 3. Press TEST again to stop the test tone. The following DSP modes are provided with this unit. THEATER : Gives the feeling of a theater. HALL : Gives clear vocal and the feeling of a concert hall. LIVE CLUB : Gives the feeling of a live music club with a low ceiling. DANCE CLUB : Gives a throbbing bass beat. These DSP modes can be used to add the acoustic surround effects while reproducing stereo analog software or Linear PCM digital software, and can give you a real “being there” feeling. When one of the DSP modes is selected, the DSP indicator lights up on the display. Available surround according to the input signal format : Possible : Impossible Multichannel Pro Logic* DSP (canceled)Surround Surround Pro Logic 3 Stereo THEATER HALL LIVE CLUB DANCE CLUB STEREO Analog Linear PCM Dolby Digital Multichannel Dolby Surround DTS Digital Surround * You can use Pro Logic mode for all 2 channel sources, but surround effect does not work sufficiently except Dolby Surround encoded source. EN20-26TH-A30[UG].pm6 21 02.8.19, 1:41 PM Input Signal format, 3 To adjust the output balance for the front speakers REW FF VCR CHANNEL TUNING 1) Press SOUND repeatedly until the SOUND B.SEARCH F.SEARCH adjustment indication for the front speakers appears on the display.2 3 ENTER • Each time you press the button, the adjustment indication on the display changes as follows: 00 F 00 00 R 00 CENVOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING Normal indication SW REAR SOUND SOUND (canceled) 123SETTING
456PRO LOGIC 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust thePRO LOGIC789output balance. SLOW SETUP TEST DSP MODE 3 : Decreases the left speakerANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE output, or restores the right ENTER REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM speaker output. CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP 2 : Decreases the right speaker output, or restores the left speaker output. • The output balance changes from OFF (silence), –06 (most reduction) to 00 (no reduction). • “00 F 00” is the initial setting (the output balance is at theAdjusting Stereo Sound center position). If you have already changed the setting,
another value will appear. You can adjust the following settings. It is recommended that you make adjustments from your actual 4 To adjust the output level for the subwoofer listening point while listening to reproduced sounds. 1) Press SOUND repeatedly to select SOUND – Output balance for the front speakers “SW.” – Output level for the subwoofer • Each time you press the button, the adjustment Once you adjust these items, the adjustments take effect for all the indication on the display changes as follows: surround modes. 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN Before you start, remember... Normal indication SW REAR • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is (canceled) canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again. 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the 1 Select and play any source except Dolby Digital output level. or DTS Digital Surround. 3 : Increases the output level. 2 : Decreases the output level. 2 • The output level changes from ENTERCancel Dolby Surround or DSP modes if they are –6 to +6. activated. • “SW 0dB” is the initial setting. If For deactivating Dolby Surround: PRO LOGIC you have already changed the Press PRO LOGIC on the remote control until settings, another value will appear. “STEREO” appears on the display. For deactivating DSP modes: DSP MODE Press DSP MODE (or DSP on the front panel) until the DSP indicator goes off from the display. Now, you are ready to start adjustments. • To adjust the output balance for the front speakers, go to the next step. • To adjust the output level for the subwoofer, go to step 4. EN20-26TH-A30[UG].pm6 22 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Creating Realistic Sound Fields
• Each time you press the button, the adjustment indicationVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL AUX on the display changes as follows: TUNER PRESET 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN DOWN UP REW FF VCR CHANNEL Normal indication TUNING SW REAR (canceled) B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 00 F (Front) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the front23ENTER speakers. 00 R (Rear) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the rear speakers.VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING • “00 F 00” and “00 R 00” are the initial setting (the output balances are at the center position). If you have already SOUND SOUND changed the setting, another value will appear. 123SETTING
456PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the789output balance. SLOW SETUP TEST D.R.C DSP MODE 3 : Decreases the left speakerANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE output, or restores the right ENTER REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM speaker output. CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP 2 : Decreases the right speaker output, or restores the left speaker output. • Each output balance changes fromAdjusting Dolby Digital and OFF (silence), –06 (most reduction) to 00 (no reduction). DTS Digital Surround
3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the other speaker. You can adjust the following settings while activating Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround. 3 To adjust the output levels for the center speaker, It is recommended that you make adjustments from your actual the rear speakers, and the subwoofer listening point while listening to reproduced sounds. 1) Press SOUND repeatedly to select the – Output balance for the front speakers “CEN,” “REAR,” or “SW.” SOUND – Output balance for the rear speakers • Each time you press the button, the adjustment – Output level for the center speaker* indication on the display changes as follows: – Output level for the rear speakers* – Output level for the subwoofer* 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN * The adjustment is separately memorized for Digital Multichannel Surround (Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround), and for Normal indication SW REAR (canceled) Dolby Pro Logic. Before you start, remember... CEN (Center) : To adjust the output level for center • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is speaker (from –6 dB to +6 dB). canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again. REAR : To adjust the output level for rear speakers (from –6 dB to +6 dB). 1 Select and play a DVD encoded with Dolby SW (Subwoofer) : To adjust the output level for subwooferDigital or DTS Digital Surround. (from –6 dB to +6 dB).
Now, you are ready to start adjustments. • “CEN 0dB,” “REAR 0dB,” and “SW 0dB” are the initial • To adjust the output balance for the front speakers and the rear settings. If you have already changed the settings, another speakers, go to the next step. value will appear. • To adjust the output level for the center speaker, the rear speakers, and the subwoofer, go to step 3. 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the output level. 2 3 : Increases the output level.To adjust the output balance for the front ENTER2 : Decreases the output level. speakers and the rear speakers 1) Press SOUND repeatedly until one of SOUND 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the following adjustment indications the other speakers. appears on the display. EN20-26TH-A30[UG].pm6 23 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Activating Dynamic Range Compression 4 To adjust the output balance for the front
speakers and the rear speakers You can enjoy a powerful sound even at a low volume level by 1) Press SOUND repeatedly until one of SOUND compressing the dynamic range (difference between the maximum the following adjustment indications and minimum sounds). appears on the display. • This function takes effect only when Dolby Digital is activated. • Each time you press the button, the adjustment indication From the remote control ONLY: on the display changes as follows: Press D.R.C. D.R.C 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN • Each time you press the button, the dynamic range compression mode alternates between on and off. Normal indication SW REAR Select “DRC ON” while watching the DVD at night. (You can (canceled) obtain a powerful sound at a low volume.) 00 F (Front) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the front speakers. 00 R (Rear) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the rearAdjusting Dolby Surround speakers.
You can adjust the following settings while activating Dolby • When selecting “3 STEREO,” you cannot adjust the output Surround. balance for the rear speakers. It is recommended that you make adjustments from your actual • “00 F 00” and “00 R 00” are the initial settings (the output listening point while listening to reproduced sounds. balances are at the center position). If you have already – Output balance for the front speakers changed the setting, another value will appear. – Output balance for the rear speakers – Output level for the center speaker* 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the – Output level for the rear speakers* output balance. – Output level for the subwoofer* 3 : Decreases the left speaker • When Dolby 3 Stereo is activated, you cannot adjust the rear output, or restores the right ENTER speakers. speaker output. * The adjustment is separately memorized for Digital Multichannel 2 : Decreases the right speaker Surround (Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround), and for output, or restores the left Dolby Pro Logic. speaker output. • Dolby Surround cannot be used with DSP modes. Once one of • Each output balance changes from Dolby Surround is activated, DSP modes in use will be canceled. OFF (silence), –06 (most reduction) to 00 (no reduction). Before you start, remember... • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the other speakers. canceled before you finish, start from step 3 again. 1 Press AUX to select the external AUX component as the source. 2 Start playing a source encoded with DolbySurround.
3 Press PRO LOGIC repeatedly on the PRO LOGIC remote control to select Dolby ProLogic or Dolby 3 Stereo.
The PRO LOGIC indicator lights up on the display. • Each time you press the button, the indication changes as follows: PRO LOGIC 3 STEREOSTEREO
(canceled) Now, you are ready to start adjustments. • To adjust the output balance for the front speakers and the rear speakers, go to the next step. • To adjust the output level for the center speaker, the rear speakers, and the subwoofer, go to step 5 on the next page. TO BE CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE EN20-26TH-A30[UG].pm6 24 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Creating Realistic Sound Fields Adjusting DSP Modes
REW FF VCR CHANNEL You can adjust the following settings while activating DSP modes.TUNING
It is recommended that you make adjustments from your actual B.SEARCH F.SEARCH listening point while listening to reproduced sounds. 2 3 – Output balance for the front speakers ENTER – Output balance for the rear speakers – Output level for the rear speakers* – Output level for the subwoofer*VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING * The adjustment is separately memorized for DSP modes. • DSP modes cannot be used with Dolby Surround. Once one of SOUND SOUND123DSP modes is activated, Dolby Surround in use will be canceled. SETTING • When you play back a DVD encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS456PRO LOGIC Digital Surround, DSP MODE button (or DSP button on the center789SLOW SETUP TEST unit) does not work. 0 DSP MODE ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE Before you start, remember... REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again. 1 Select and play any source except Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround. 5 To adjust the output level for the center speaker, 2 Press DSP MODE (or DSP on the front DSP MODE the rear speakers, and the subwoofer panel) repeatedly to select the desired 1) Press SOUND repeatedly to select the SOUND DSP mode. “CEN,” “REAR,” or “SW.” The DSP indicator lights up on the display while the DSP modes • Each time you press the button, the adjustment are activated. indication on the display changes as follows: • Each time you press the button, DSP mode changes as follows: THEATER HALL LIVE CLUB 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN Normal Normal indication indication DANCE CLUBSW REAR (canceled) (canceled) Now, you are ready to start the adjustment. • To adjust the output balance for the front speakers and the rear CEN (Center) : To adjust the output level for center speakers, go to the next step. speaker (from –6 dB to +6 dB). • To adjust the output level for the rear speakers and the subwoofer, REAR : To adjust the output level for rear go to step 4 on the next page. speakers (from –6 dB to +6 dB). SW (Subwoofer) : To adjust the output level for subwoofer (from –6 dB to +6 dB). • When selecting “3 STEREO,” you cannot adjust the output levels for the rear speakers. • “CEN 0dB,” “REAR 0dB,” and “SW 0dB” are the initial settings. If you have already changed the settings, another value will appear. 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the output level. 3 : Increases the output level. ENTER 2 : Decreases the output level. 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the other speakers. EN20-26TH-A30[UG].pm6 25 02.8.19, 1:41 PM, 3 To adjust the output balance for the front 4 To adjust the output level for the rear speakers speakers and the rear speakers and the subwoofer 1) Press SOUND repeatedly until one of 1) Press SOUND repeatedly to select the SOUNDSOUND
the following adjustment indications “REAR” or “SW.” appears on the display. • Each time you press the button, the adjustment • Each time you press the button, the adjustment indication on the display changes as follows: indication on the display changes as follows: 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN Normal indication SW REAR Normal indication (canceled)SW REAR (canceled) 00 F (Front) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the front REAR : To adjust the output level for rear speakers. speakers (from –6 dB to +6 dB). 00 R (Rear) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the rear SW (Subwoofer) : To adjust the output level for subwoofer speakers. (from –6 dB to +6 dB). • “00 F 00” and “00 R 00” are the initial setting (the output • “REAR 0dB” and “SW 0dB” are the initial settings. If balances are at the center position). If you have already you have already changed the settings, another value will changed the setting, another value will appear. appear. 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the output balance. 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the 3 : Decreases the left speaker output level. output, or restores the right 3 : Increases the output level.ENTER ENTER speaker output. 2 : Decreases the output level. 2 : Decreases the right speaker output, or restores the left speaker output. 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting • Each output balance changes from the other speaker. OFF (silence), –06 (most reduction) to 00 (no reduction). 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the other speaker. EN20-26TH-A30[UG].pm6 26 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Disc Introduction—DVD/VCD/CD
This system has been designed to play back the following discs: DVD, IMPORTANT: Video CD, Super Video CD (SVCD), Audio CD, CD-R, and CD-RW. Before performing any operations, make sure of the following... • This system can also play back MP3 files recorded on CD-Rs and • Check the connection with the TV. CD-RWs. For in-depth information about what MP3, see “MP3 • Turn on the TV and select the correct input on the TV to view the Introduction” on page 43. pictures or on-screen indications on the TV screen. • For DVD playback, you can change the Setup menu setting to Discs you can play: your preference. (See pages 49 to 53.) Disc Mark Video Region Code If “ ” appears on the TV screen when pressing a button, Type (Logo) Format Number* the disc cannot accept an operation you have tried to do, or information required for that operation is not recorded in the disc. NOTICE : In some cases, without showing “ ,” operations DVD 2 will not be accepted. Video ALL Disc structure—DVD, Video CD (VCD/SVCD) and Audio CD (CD) A DVD disc consists of Titles, and each title may be divided into Video some Chapters. (See Example 1.) CD NTSC For example, if a DVD disc contains some movies, each movie may PAL have its own title number, and it may be further divided into some chapters. Super On the other hand, a VCD/SVCD or CD consists of Tracks. (See Video Example 2.) CD In general, each song has its own track number. (On some discs, each track may also be divided by Indexes.) When playing back a VCD/SVCD with Playback Control (PBC) Audio COMPACT function, you can select what to view using the menu shown on the CD DIGITAL AUDIO TV screen. (While operating a Video CD using the menu, some of the functions such as Repeat and Track Search may not work.) CD-R Example 1: DVD disc CD-RW • On some DVD or VCD/SVCD discs, their actual operations may be different from what is explained in this manual. This is due to the disc programming and disc structure, but not a malfunction of this system. • DVD-R discs recorded with the DVD VIDEO format can be Example 2 : Video CD/Audio CD played back. However, some discs may not be played back because of the disc characteristics or recording conditions. Note that unfinalized disc cannot be played back. • The following discs cannot be played back: – DVD-Audio, DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, CD-ROM, CD-I, (CD-I Ready), Photo CD, etc. Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the speakers. Notes on CD-R and CD-RW * Note on Region Code User-edited CD-Rs (Recordable) and CD-RWs (Rewritable) can be DVD players and DVD Video discs have their own Region Code played back only if they are already “finalized.” numbers. This system can play back DVD discs recorded with the • The system can play back CD-Rs or CD-RWs recorded on a color system of NTSC and PAL whose Region Code numbers personal computer if they have been recorded in the audio CD include “2.” format or recorded in MP3 format (see page 43). Examples: However, they may not be played back depending on their characteristics or recording conditions. • Before playing back CD-Rs or CD-RWs, read their instructions or cautions carefully. • Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this unit If a DVD with the inadequate Region Code numbers is loaded, because of their disc characteristics, damage or stain on them, or if “REGION ERR” appears on the display and playback cannot start. the built-in lens is dirty. • CD-RWs may require a longer readout time. This is caused by the fact that the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than for regular CDs. EN27-36TH-A30[UG].pm6 27 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Basic Disc Operations To stop playback for a moment TUNER PRESET
Press 3/8. STANDBY/ON While pausing, the elapsed playing time flashes AUDIO on the display. • To resume play, press 3/8 again. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL To go to another chapter or track AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME Press ¢ or 4 repeatedly during playback. VCR • ¢ : Skips to the beginning of the next or succeeding chapter or DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL track. TUNER PRESET 4 ¢ • 4 : While a DVD, a VCD with PBC or MP3 is played backDOWN UP Goes back to the beginning of the previous chapter or track. REW FF 7 VCR CHANNEL TUNING 3/8 While a CD or a VCD without PBC is played back B.SEARCH F.SEARCH Goes back to the beginning of the current or previous track. ENTER To go to another title (only possible on a DVD) or track (only possible on a CD and VCD) SVCD can be operated by using the VCD operation directly using the number buttons procedure. Pressing the number buttons before or during play allows you to start playing the title/track number you want. (If your TV is turned on, the on-screen bar is pulled down automatically on the TV screen.)To start playback • To select number 1 to 9, press the corresponding number button
TUNER PRESET Press 3/8. (then press ENTER or wait for 5 seconds). The source is automatically changed to the • To select number 15, press 1, 5. DVD player. • To select number 23, press 2, 3. “WAIT” appears on the display for a while, then the detected disc type appears—DVD, VCD, CD, or MP3. (If To stop during playback your TV is turned on, the mark corresponding to the detected disc Press 7. TUNER PRESET type appears on the TV screen.) (If your TV is turned on, “ STOP” appears • When a disc is not loaded, “NO DISC” appears on the display. on the TV screen.) • When an MP3 disc is played back, playback Disc play starts from the first chapter or track of the selected disc. stops completely. • If a menu appears while playing a DVD or VCD with PBC • This system can memorize the end point even when you press 7. function, see “Disc Menu-Driven Playback” (for DVD) on page 31 When you start playback again by pressing 3/8, playback begins or “Disc Menu-Driven Playback (Only for VCD)” on page 38. from where it has been stopped—Resume play. • To stop completely, press 7 twice. (“7 STOP” appears on the TV Note: screen.) The disc type appears on the display. If “WRONG PARENTAL LEVEL” appears on the TV screen, Parental The DVD player goes on working for 3 minutes after playback Lock is in use. You cannot play back a DVD containing violent scenes stops. or those not suitable for your family members. To play back such a disc, cancel the Parental Lock. (See page 52.) To remove the disc Press 0 on the front panel.Playback information on the display The disc tray comes out.
To close the disc tray, press 0 again. DVD • If you do not press the button, the disc tray closes automatically 3 minutes after. Title No. Chapter No. Elapsed playing time VCD/CD Track No. Elapsed playing time MP3 Track No. Elapsed playing time EN27-36TH-A30[UG].pm6 28 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,DVD Playback Showing the On-Screen Bar
You can show the following information on the TV screen while a STANDBY/ON disc is loaded.AUDIO
TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE From the remote control ONLY: DISPLAY DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL Press DISPLAY. DISPLAY AUDIO/ SUBTITLE • Each time you press the button, the following on-FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME AUDIO/ screen bar appears in sequence. FM MODE VCR DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP1234REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH56789ENTER On-screen bar goes off. VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING SOUND 1 : Disc type123SETTING DVD VCD SVCD CD MP3456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST 2 : Current title and total number of the titles on the ANGLE ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE disc REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM • Ex.: 1st title is playing out of 3 titles recorded. CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP 3 : Current chapter and total number of the chapters in the current title • Ex.: 1st chapter is playing out of 5 chapters recorded. 4 : Elapsed playing time or remaining time You can change the play time indication by pressing REMAIN. See page 31 for more details. Some DVDs contain several audio languages, subtitles, and multi- angle views. 5 : Subtitle language indication When you find the following marks on the DVD or its package, you • Ex.: When no subtitle is recorded on the disc. can select these elements recorded on the DVD. See page 30 for more details. 6 : Audio language indication • Ex.: Original sound (default) is selected out of 3 audio Subtitles are recorded on the disc. The number languages recorded. See page 30 for more details. 3 inside the mark indicates the total number of the recorded subtitles. 7 : Signal format indicator • Signal format type—Linear PCM (stereo), Dolby Digital, Several audio languages are recorded on the disc. 3 and DTS Digital Surround—will be indicated.The number inside the mark indicates the total Ex.: When the disc is encoded with Dolby Digital. number of the recorded audio languages. Multi-angle views are recorded on the disc. The 8 : Repeat mode indicator number inside the mark indicates the total number • Ex.: When repeat mode is turned off.3 of the recorded multi-angle views. See page 33 for more details. 9 : Multi-angle view indicator If you cannot find out whether your disc contains these features • Ex.: When only a single angle-view is recorded on the listed above, you can check it by showing the on-screen bar. disc. See page 30 for more details. For basic disc operations such as inserting a disc, starting playback, and moving to another chapters, see “Basic DVD Operations” on pages 11, 12, and “Basic Disc Operations” on page 28. EN27-36TH-A30[UG].pm6 29 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Selecting the Subtitles Selecting the Multi-Angle Views
While playing back a DVD containing subtitles in different While playing back a DVD containing multi-angle views, you can languages, you can select the subtitle to be displayed on the TV view the same scene at different angles. screen. • When you play back the DVD containing multi-angle views, • You can set your favorite subtitle language as the initial language appears on the TV screen. shown on the screen. (See page 49.) From the remote control ONLY: From the remote control ONLY: Press ANGLE. ANGLESUBTITLE Press SUBTITLE. • Each time you press the button, the view angle changes. The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen for a while. • Each time you press the button, the subtitle language changes as follows: ANGLE 1 ANGLE 2 OFF /3 DEF 1/3 1/1 OFF /3 ENG 1/3 ANGLE 3 SPA 3/3 FRE 2/3 Ex.: When the disc has 3 selections—English, French, Spanish and no subtitle (OFF) Ex.: When the disc has 3 multi-angle views Note: When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Multi angle view indication also changes as follows:Selecting the Audio Languages 1/3 2/3
While playing back a DVD containing audio languages (sound track), you can select the language (sound track) to listen to. 3/3 • You can set your favorite audio language as the initial audio language. (See page 49.) Press AUDIO/FM MODE. AUDIO/FM MODE The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen for a while. • Each time you press the button, the audio language changes as follows: ENG 1/3 ENG 1/3 1/1 ENG 1/3 FRE 2/3 SPA 3/3 Ex.: When the disc has 3 selections—English, French, and Spanish EN27-36TH-A30[UG].pm6 30 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,DVD Playback Disc Menu-Driven Playback
STANDBY/ON Disc menu-driven playback is possible while playing back a DVD AUDIO with menu (menu may be still pictures or moving pictures depending on the disc). TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE • When operating a disc using the disc menu, refer also to the DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL instructions supplied for the disc. AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME DVD discs generally have their own menus or title lists. A menuVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL usually contains various information about the disc and playback selections. On the other hand, a title list usually contains titles of TUNER PRESET DOWN UP movies and songs recorded. REW FF 1 VCR CHANNELTUNING ¡ From the remote control ONLY: B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 3/2/5/∞ 1 Press MENU or TOP ENTER MENU. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING ENTER A menu or title list will appear on the screen. “MENU” appears on the display. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING VOLUME • On some DVDs, a menu will TOP MENU TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING MENU automatically appear on the screen after playback starts. Number SOUND123buttons SETTING456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST 2 Select a desired item on the ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE menu or on the title list, using REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM 3/2/5/∞ and ENTER. CLEAR CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP REMAIN The unit starts playback of the selected ENTER item. SEARCH • On some discs, you can also select items by pressing the number buttons corresponding to the item numbers listed.Checking the Remaining Time
While playing back a DVD, you can check the remaining time to be played back. From the remote control ONLY: Press REMAIN. REMAIN The on-screen bar and the current play time indication appear on the TV screen for a while. • Each time you press the button, the following indication appears on the screen: REMAIN TIME:TITLE CHAPTER TIME TITLE TIME REMAIN TIME:CHAPTER REMAIN TIME:TITLE : Select this to show the remaining time of the current title. CHAPTER TIME : Select this to show the elapsed playing time of the current chapter. REMAIN TIME:CHAPTER : Select this to show the remaining time of the current chapter. TITLE TIME : Select this to show the elapsed playing time of the current title. EN27-36TH-A30[UG].pm6 31 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Moving to a Particular Portion Directly Searching for a Particular Point
You can move to another title, chapter, or particular scene in the You can search for a particular point while playing a disc—Variable chapter directly. Speed Forward/Reverse Search. • No sound comes out during Variable Speed Forward/Reverse From the remote control ONLY: Search. 1 Press SEARCH during playback or pause. SEARCH To fast-forward the chapter—Variable Speed • Each time you press the button, the following indication appears on the screen: Forward Search From the remote control ONLY: TITLE – – CHAPTER – – – Press ¡ during playback or pause. • Each time you press the button, the search speed F.SEARCH Canceled TIME – – : – – : – – changes as follows: TITLE – – : Select this to move to another title. x2 x4 CHAPTER – – – : Select this to move to another chapter. TIME – – : – – : – – : Select this to move to a particular scene. PLAY (Normal play) x8 2 Press the number buttons to123To reverse the chapter—Variable Speed Reverse select a desired title, chapter, Search456or playing time. From the remote control ONLY: The unit starts playback of the selected789Press 1 during playback or pause. item. (The on-screen bar appears for a • Each time you press the button, the search speed B.SEARCH while.) 0 changes as follows: x2 x4 PLAY (Back play) x8 How to input the title and chapter number TUNER PRESET Press the number buttons corresponding to the number, then wait To resume normal play for about 5 seconds or press ENTER to start playback. Press 3/8. • To select number 5, press 5, then ENTER. • To select number 12, press 1, 2, then ENTER. • To select number 22, press 2, 2, then ENTER. How to input the playing time Press the number buttons to input the playing time, then wait for about 5 seconds or press ENTER to start playback at the selected elapsed playing time. • To input time “00:45:23,” press 4, 5, 2, 3. • To input time “01:23:45,” press 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. • To cancel a mis-entry, press CLEAR. Each time you press the button, the last entry will be erased. Note: When you want to move to another title directly, you can move to it by simply pressing the corresponding number buttons (without pressing SEARCH in step 1). EN27-36TH-A30[UG].pm6 32 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,DVD Playback
7 A–B Repeat STANDBY/ON While playing, you can also select a portion you want to repeat. AUDIO • A–B repeat is not performed between different titles. • An interval of more than 5 seconds is required between point A TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE and point B. DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME Example:VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET 7 DOWN UP 3/8 REPEAT:A– REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH23REPEAT:A–BENTER ENTER
From the remote control ONLY: VOLUME 1 Press A–B REPEAT to select the start A-B REPEAT TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING point. “RPT A–” appears on the display and “REPEAT:A–”SOUND
123appears on the TV screen.SETTING
456PRO LOGIC 2 Press A–B REPEAT again to select the A-B REPEAT789SLOW SETUP TEST 0 end point. ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE “RPT A–” changes to “RPT A–B” and REPEAT REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM PROGRAM “REPEAT:A–” changes to “REPEAT:A–B,” CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP A-B REPEAT then A–B repeat begins. The unit automatically locates point A and starts repeated playback between points A and B.To cancel A–B Repeat Repeating Playback Press A–B REPEAT again. A-B REPEAT
“RPT OFF” appears on the display and “REPEAT OFF” Repeat play cannot be used in the following cases: appears on the TV screen. • When you enjoy program play 7 Repeat Play Note: From the remote control ONLY: When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Repeat mode Press REPEAT repeatedly. REPEAT indication also changes as follows: The indication corresponding to the selected mode appears on your TV. • Each time you press the button, Repeat mode changes as follows: REPEAT:CHAPTER REPEAT:TITLE On some DVDs, A–B Repeat may not be used even within the same title. This is due to their disc structures, and not a REPEAT OFF malfunction of the unit. REPEAT:CHAPTER : Current chapter will be repeated. REPEAT:TITLE : Current title will be repeated. REPEAT OFF : Repeat play is canceled. (Normal play is resumed.) Note: When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Repeat mode indication also changes as follows: REPEAT:CHAPTER REPEAT:TITLE REPEAT OFF EN27-36TH-A30[UG].pm6 33 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Programming the Playing Order of the Chapters—Program Play 5 Press 3 or 2 to select a chapter number, then ENTER. You can arrange the chapter playback order before you start playing. • 3 : Increases the number. You can program up to 20 steps. • 2 : Decreases the number.
• Before making a program, make sure that the TV is turned on • You can also select a chapter number using the number buttons. and the correct input is selected on the TV. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTERFrom the remote control ONLY: TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPT
1 Load a disc. 1286– – – – 2 – – – – 7 – – – – • If the current playing source is not the DVD player, press 3 – – – – 8 – – – – 4 – – – – 9 – – – – 3/8, then 7 before going to the next step. 5 – – – – 10 – – – – PREVIOUS NEXT 2 Press PROGRAM. PROGRAM PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMThe PROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV
screen. • To select all chapters in the selected title as one program • “PROGRAM” appears on the display. step, simply press ENTER without selecting any number. “ALL” appears on the chapter number position. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER 6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 to program other chapters TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPT you want. 1 – – – – 6 – – – – 2 – – – – 7 – – – – • After 10 steps are programed, “NEXT «” is selected 3 – – – – 8 – – – – (highlighted). If you want to program more steps, press 4 – – – – 9 – – – – 5 – – – – 10 – – – – ENTER. PREVIOUS NEXT PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAM 7 Press / . TUNER PRESET3 8The chapters are played in the order you
3 Press ENTER. have programed and the PROGRAM indicator lights up. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER After all the chapters you programed are played back, the TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPT ENTER PROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV screen again. 1 – – – – 6 – – – – 2 – – – – 7 – – – – 3 – – – – 8 – – – – 4 – – – – 9 – – – – TUNER PRESET 5 – – – – 10 – – – – To stop during playback CHOOSE : 1–5 PREVIOUS NEXT Press 7.The PROGRAM MENU screen appears on
PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAM the TV screen.Title numbers you can select in the next step • If you press 3/8 while this screen is shown, the unit starts
program play. 4 Press 3 or 2 to select a title number, then ENTER. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER • : Increases the number. TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPT3 ENTER128622• 2 : Decreases the number. 2157212• You can also select a title number31178194369– – – – using the number buttons. 54210 – – – – PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER PREVIOUS NEXT TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPT PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAM 1 – 2 – – 6 – – – – 2 – – – – 7 – – – – 3 – – – – 8 – – – – 4 – – – – 9 – – – – 5 – – – – 10 – – – – CHOOSE : 1–9 PREVIOUS NEXT PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMChapter numbers you can select in the
next stepTO BE CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
EN27-36TH-A30[UG].pm6 34 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,DVD Playback To erase the stored program
Press 0 to eject the disc. STANDBY/ON • If you turn off the system or change the source, theAUDIO
program is also erased. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE STEP DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL To check the program contents AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME You can check the program contents by pressing PROGRAM.VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL The PROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV screen. TUNER PRESET DOWN UP 3/8 REW FF To modify the program VCR CHANNEL TUNING You can modify the program while the PROGRAM MENU screen is B.SEARCH F.SEARCH shown on the TV screen. 3/2/5/∞ ENTER • To erase a step: Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an unwantedENTER
program step, then press CLEAR. • To modify a step: Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) a program step you want to modify, then perform steps 3 to 5 on page 34.VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING (Before entering a new number, press CLEAR repeatedly until “– –” appears on the number entry position.) SOUND • To add a step: Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an empty123SETTING program step, then perform steps 3 to 5 on page 34. 456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SLOW SETUP TEST • To move to program step 10 from program step 11, press 5 ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE ZOOM when program step 11 is selected (highlighted) so that “PREVIOUS »” is selected (highlighted). Then, press ENTER. REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM PROGRAM • To move to program step 11 from program step 10, press ∞ CLEAR CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP when program step 10 is selected (highlighted) so that “NEXT « ” is selected (highlighted). Then, press ENTER.To exit from program play
From the remote control ONLY: Press PROGRAM.PROGRAM
The PROGRAM MENU screen goes off, and the opening screen appears. (The program you made is still kept in memory.) • If you press 3/8 while this screen is shown, the unit starts normal playback. DVD/Video CD/CD PLAYER EN27-36TH-A30[UG].pm6 35 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,DVD Special Effect Playback 7 Zoom
You can zoom in on the picture while playing back a DVD. 7 Still Picture/Frame-by-Frame Playback From the remote control ONLY: You can advance the still picture frame by frame while playing a DVD. 1 Press ZOOM to zoom in. ZOOM • Each time you press the button, the picture is From the remote control ONLY: enlarged as follows: 1 Press STEP once during playback. STEP A still picture appears on the TV screen. 248PAUSE2x Zoom 4x Zoom Canceled 2 Press 3/2/5/∞ to move the enlarged portion you want to watch. 2 Press STEP repeatedly to advance the STEP ENTER picture frame by frame. • Each time you press the button, the picture advances ENTER frame by frame. 2383838383838ENTER To cancel the ZOOM To resume normal play ZOOMTUNER PRESET Press ZOOM repeatedly until the normal size picture is Press 3/8. resumed. 7 Slow Motion Playback You can enjoy slow motion playback while playing a DVD. From the remote control ONLY: Press SLOW repeatedly during playback or pause. SLOW • Each time you press the button, slow motion speed changes as follows: SLOW 1 /2 SLOW 1 /4 PLAY (Normal play) EN27-36TH-A30[UG].pm6 36 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,VCD/CD Playback
1234* 5 6 STANDBY/ON AUDIO 1/35 00:12 TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE DISPLAY DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL On-screen bar goes off. 7** AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME / * Appears only when a VCD is loaded.VCR DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL38** Appears only when a VCD is played back. TUNER PRESET 4 DOWN UP ¢ 1 : Disc type REW FF DVD VCD SVCD CD MP3 VCR CHANNEL 1 TUNING ¡ B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 2 : Current track and total number of the tracks on the discENTER
ENTER • Ex.: 1st track is playing out of 35 tracks recorded. 3 : Sound mode • Ex.: Stereo sound (Left channel and Right channel).VOLUME
MENU TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING RETURN 4 : Play Back Control (PBC) indicator • Ex.: PBC is on. (When PBC is turned off, will Number SOUND appear.) 123buttons SETTING 5 : Repeat mode indicator456PRO LOGIC • Ex.: When repeat mode is turned off. See page 39 for more789details. SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE 6 : Elapsed playing time or remaining time REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM You can change the play time indication by pressing CLEAR REMAIN. See below.CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP REMAIN 7 : Sound indication SEARCH • Indicates sound input level. (Appears only during playback VCD.) • SVCD can be operated by using the VCD operation Checking the Remaining Time procedure. • For basic disc operations such as inserting a disc, starting While playing back a VCD or CD, you can check the remaining playback, and moving to another tracks, see “Basic VCD/ time. CD Operations” on pages 13, 14, and “Basic Disc Operations” on page 28. From the remote control ONLY: Press REMAIN. REMAINShowing the On-Screen Bar The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen for a while.
• Each time you press the button, the play time indication changes as follows: You can show the following information on the TV screen while a disc is loaded. REMAIN TIME:TRACK DISC TIME From the remote control ONLY: TRACK TIME REMAIN TIME:DISC Press DISPLAY. DISPLAY • Each time you press the button, the following on-screen REMAIN TIME:TRACK bar appears in sequence. : Select this to show the remaining time of the current track. DISC TIME : Select this to show the total elapsed playing time of the disc. REMAIN TIME:DISC : Select this to show the total remaining time of the disc. TRACK TIME : Select this to show the elapsed playing time of the current track. EN37-42TH-A30[UG].pm6 37 02.8.19, 1:41 PM,Disc Menu–Driven Playback (Only for VCD) Moving to a Particular Portion Directly
The Play Back Control function (PBC) allows you to operate the You can move to a particular portion (scene) on the track directly. VCD using menus. • PBC function is canceled when you use this function. When you start playing a VCD with PBC function, a menu will automatically appear on the TV screen. (“MENU” will also appear From the remote control ONLY: on the display.) 1 Press SEARCH during playback or pause. • A menu may be a list of items, divided screens, or some moving • Each time you press the button, the following indication pictures. (See “PBC operation concept” below.) appears on the TV screen. When a menu appears, you can select a desired item on the menu. • When a list of items is displayed on the TV screen, press the TIME – – : – – TRACK TIME – – : – – number buttons to select an item. • When “3” or “SELECT” is displayed on the TV screen, press Canceled 3/8 to start playback. TIME – – : – – : Select this to move to a particular portion on the current disc. To go to the next submenu UP TRACK TIME – – : – – Press ¢. FF : Select this to move to a particular portion on the current track. To return to the previous submenuDOWN
Press 4. 2 Press number buttons to select123REW a playing time you want to456To cancel the PBC playback search for. You can cancel the menu-driven operations (PBC function): The unit starts playback at the selected7891Press 7 to stop playback. elapsed playing time. (The on-screen02Press the number buttons to select a track. bar appears for a while.) Normal playback starts from the selected track. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING • You can also turn on and off the PBC function by pressing MENU • To input time “45:23,” press 4, 5, 2, 3. on the remote control. Each time • To input time “09:45,” press 9, 4, 5, then wait for about 5 you press the button, the PBC function turns on and off. seconds (or press ENTER). • To cancel a misentry, press CLEAR. Each time you press the button, the last entry will be erased. PBC operation conceptSearching for a Particular Point
You can search for a particular point while playing a disc—Variable Speed Forward/Reverse Search. • No sound comes out during Variable Speed Forward/Reverse Search on a VCD. To fast-forward the tracks—Variable Speed Forward Search Press ¡ during playback or pause. • Each time you press the button, the search speed changes as follows: F.SEARCH Note: While operating a VCD using menu, some of the functions such as x2 x4 repeat play may not work. PLAY (Normal play) x8 To reverse the tracks—Variable Speed Reverse Search Press 1 during playback or pause. • Each time you press the button, the search speed changes as follows: B.SEARCH x2 x4 PLAY (Normal play) x8 EN37-42TH-A30[UG].pm6 38 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,VCD/CD Playback
Note: When the on-screen bar is shown on the screen, Repeat mode indication also changes as follows: STANDBY/ONAUDIO
TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE REPEAT:ONE REPEAT:DISC DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME REPEAT OFFVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET 7 A–B Repeat 7 DOWN UP 3/8 While playing, you can also select a portion you want to repeat. REW FF VCR CHANNEL • An interval of more than 5 seconds is required between point ATUNING
and point B. B.SEARCH F.SEARCH23ENTER Example:ENTER
VOLUME REPEAT:A– TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGSOUND
123REPEAT:A–BSETTING
456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE From the remote control ONLY: REPEAT PROGRAMREPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM 1 Press A–B REPEAT to select the start A-B REPEAT CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP A–B REPEAT point. “RPT A–” appears on the display and “REPEAT:A–” appears on the TV screen. 2 Press A–B REPEAT again to select the A-B REPEAT end point.Repeating Playback “RPT A–” changes to “RPT A–B” and
“REPEAT:A–” changes to “REPEAT:A–B,” Repeat play cannot be used in the following cases: then A–B repeat begins. • When you play back a VCD using the PBC function The unit automatically locates point A and starts repeated • When you enjoy program play playback between points A and B. 7 Repeat Play To cancel A–B Repeat From the remote control ONLY: Press A–B REPEAT again. A-B REPEATREPEAT Press REPEAT repeatedly. “RPT OFF” appears on the display and “REPEAT OFF” The indication corresponding to the selected mode appears appears on the TV screen. on your TV. • Each time you press the button, repeat mode changes as follows: Note: REPEAT:ONE REPEAT:DISC When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Repeat mode indication also changes as follows: REPEAT OFF REPEAT:ONE : Current track will be repeated. REPEAT:DISC : All the tracks will be repeated. REPEAT OFF : Repeat play is canceled. (Normal play is resumed.) EN37-42TH-A30[UG].pm6 39 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,Programming the Playing Order of the 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to program other tracks Tracks—Program Play you want.
• After 10 steps are programed, “NEXT «” is selectedYou can arrange the track playback order before you start playing. (highlighted). If you want to program more steps, press You can program up to 20 steps. ENTER.
• Before making a program, make sure that the TV is turned on TUNER PRESET and the correct input is selected on the TV. 6 Press 3/8.The tracks are played in the order you have From the remote control ONLY: programed and the PROGRAM indicator
1 Load a disc. lights up. • If the current playing source is not the DVD player, press 3/8, then 7 before going to the next step. After all the tracks you programed are played back, thePROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV screen again.
2 Press PROGRAM. PROGRAMThe PROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV To stop during play
screen. TUNER PRESET • “PROGRAM” appears on the display. Press 7.The PROGRAM MENU screen appears on
PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER the TV screen. TRACK TRACK • If you press 3/8 while this screen is 1 – – 6 – – shown, the system starts program play. 2 – – 7 – – 3 – – 8 – – PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER 4 – – 9 – – TRACK TRACK 5 – – 10 – – 1761267– – PREVIOUS NEXT398– – 4139– – 51110 – – PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAM PREVIOUS NEXT 3 PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMPress ENTER.To exit from program play
PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER From the remote control ONLY: TRACK TRACK Press PROGRAM. PROGRAMENTER 1 – – 6 – – The PROGRAM MENU screen goes off, and the 2 – – 7 – – 3 – – 8 – – opening screen appears. (The program you made is 4 – – 9 – – still kept in memory.) 5 – – 10 – – CHOOSE : 1–17 • If you press 3/8 while this screen is shown, the unit starts normal PREVIOUS NEXT playback. PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMTrack numbers you can select in the
next step 4 DVD/Video CD/CD PLAYER Press 3 or 2 to select a track number, then ENTER. • 3 : Increases the number. • 2 : Decreases the number. • You can also select a track number ENTER To erase the stored program using the number buttons. Press 0 to eject the disc. • If you turn off the system or change the source, the program is also erased. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER TRACK TRACK176– – To check the program contents 2 – – 7 – – PROGRAM 3 – – 8 – – You can check the program contents by pressing 4 – – 9 – – PROGRAM. The PROGRAM MENU screen appears on 5 – – 10 – – the TV screen. PREVIOUS NEXT PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMTO BE CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
EN37-42TH-A30[UG].pm6 40 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,VCD/CD Playback Selecting Playback Channel
STANDBY/ON When you play back a karaoke VCD or CD, you can only selectAUDIO
either the left channel or right channel to listen to. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE Press AUDIO/FM MODE repeatedly. AUDIO/ AUDIO/ DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL STEP FM MODEThe on-screen bar appears on the screen for a while. FM MODE AUDIO/FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME • Each time you press the button, the sound mode changes as VCR follows: DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET / AUDIO:LEFT AUDIO:RIGHTDOWN UP38REW FF AUDIO:STEREO VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 3/2/5/∞ ENTER 1/35 00:12ENTER VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGSOUND
123SETTING AUDIO:STEREO (LR) : Select this to listen to both456PRO LOGIC channel sounds. 789SLOW AUDIO:LEFT (L) : Select this to listen to the leftSLOW SETUP TEST 0 channel sounds. ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE ZOOM AUDIO:RIGHT (R) : Select this to listen to the right REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM channel sounds. CLEAR CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP REMEMBER that after playing back a karaoke VCD or CD using “AUDIO:LEFT” or “AUDIO:RIGHT,” select “AUDIO:STEREO” to restore normal stereo playback.To modify the program
You can modify the program while the PROGRAM MENU screen is shown on the TV screen. • To erase a step: press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an unwanted program step, then press CLEAR. • To modify a step: press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an program step you want to modify, then perform steps 3 and 4. (Before entering a new number, press CLEAR repeatedly until “– –” appears on number entry position.) • To add a step: press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an empty program step, then perform steps 3 and 4. • To move to program step 10 from program step 11, press 5 when program step 11 is selected (highlighted) so that “PREVIOUS » ” is selected (highlighted). Then, press ENTER. • To move to program step 11 from program step 10, press ∞ when program step 10 is selected (highlighted) so that “NEXT « ” is selected (highlighted). Then, press ENTER. EN37-42TH-A30[UG].pm6 41 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,VCD Special Effect Playback 7 Zoom
You can zoom in on the picture while playing a VCD. 7 Still Picture/Frame-by-Frame Playback From the remote control ONLY: You can advance the still picture frame by frame while playing a VCD. 1 Press ZOOM to zoom in. ZOOM • Each time you press the button, the picture is From the remote control ONLY: enlarged as follows: 1 Press STEP once during playback. STEP A still picture appears on the TV screen. 8PAUSE2x Zoom Canceled 2 Press 3/2/5/∞ to move the enlarged portion you want to 2 watch. ENTERPress STEP repeatedly to advance the STEP picture frame by frame. • Each time you press the button, the picture advances ENTER frame by frame. 2383838383838ENTER To cancel the ZOOM To resume normal play TUNER PRESET Press ZOOM again. ZOOM Press 3/8. The normal size picture is resumed. 7 Slow Motion Playback You can enjoy slow motion playback while playing a VCD. From the remote control ONLY: Press SLOW repeatedly during playback or pause. SLOW • Each time you press the button, slow motion speed changes as follows: SLOW 1 /2 SLOW 1 /4 SLOW 1 /8 PLAY (Normal play) SLOW 1 /16 EN37-42TH-A30[UG].pm6 42 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,MP3 Introduction
This system is incorporated with an MP3 decoder. You can play back MP3 tracks (files) recorded on CD-Rs and CD-RWs. • Notice that “files” and “tracks” are used interchangeably. STANDBY/ONAUDIO What is MP3?
TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE MP3 is an abbreviation of Motion Picture Experts Group (or MPEG) Audio Layer 3. MP3 is simply a file format with a data compression DISPLAY DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL ratio of 1:10 (128 Kbps*). That means, by using MP3 format, one AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME CD-R or CD-RW can contain 10 times as much data volume as aVCR
regular CD can. DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL * Bit rate is the average number of bits that one second of audio data 4 TUNER PRESET ¢ will consume. The measuring unit used is Kbps (1000 bits per DOWN UP second). REW FF 7 VCR CHANNEL To get a better audio quality, choose a higher bit rate. The most TUNING 3/8 popular bit rate for encoding (recording) is 128 Kbps. B.SEARCH F.SEARCHMP3 File Compatibility ENTER ENTER
• This system can only read MP3 files that are recorded in the format that is compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1 or Level 2. • The system can read or play MP3 files only with the extension VOLUME code—“.mp3”. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING • ID3* tags cannot be shown on the display. * An MP3 file can contain file information called “ID3 Tag” where SOUND123its album name, performer, track title, etc. are recorded. There are SETTING two versions—ID3v1 (ID3 Tag version 1) and ID3v2 (ID3 Tag456PRO LOGIC version 2). 789SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODEDisc structure—How are MP3 files recorded
and played back? REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP “MP3 files (tracks)” can be recorded in “directories (or folders),” in PC terminology. During recording, the files and directories can be arranged in a way similar to arranging files and folder/directories of computer data. “Root” is similar to the root of a tree. Every file and directory can be linked to the root. In compliance with ISO 9660, the maximum allowable depth of For in-depth information about a disc to be played back, see nested directories—so-called “hierarchy”—is eight (inclusive of the “Disc Introduction—DVD/VCD/CD” on page 27. root). Playback order, files search order, and directory search order of the MP3 files recorded on a disc are determined by the writing (or encoding) application; therefore, playback order may be different from the one you have intended while recording the folders/ directories and the files. Note on MP3 discs MP3 discs (either CD-R or CD-RW) require a longer readout time. (It differs due to the complexity of the directory/file configuration.) EN43-46TH-A30[UG].pm6 43 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,MP3 Playback Starting Playback The on-screen bar
12345It is recommended to turn on your TV when playing back an MP3 disc. 1/35 128 00:22/03:48 1 Press 0 to load a disc. 1 : Disc type DVD VCD SVCD CD MP3 2 Press 3/8. TUNER PRESET After detecting the disc, playback starts. 2 : Current track (file) and total number of the tracks • The on-screen bar and the contents on the disc recorded on the MP3 disc will be shown • Ex.: 1st track is playing out of 35 tracks recorded. on the TV if it is turned on. 3 : Bit rate • Ex.: Bit rate used for recording the loaded disc is 5/135 ? ? 128 Kbps. (See the previous page.) 4 : Repeat mode indicator • Ex.: When repeat mode is turned off. SPRING See page 46 for more details.SUMMER
FALL 5 : Elapsed playing time and the total playing time ofWINTER
LIAR.MP3 the current track LOVE.MP3 6 : Sound indication • Indicates sound input level. (Only appears during playback.) 5/135 ? ?To go to another track SPRING
Press ¢ or 4 during playback. SPRING1.MP3 SPRING2.MP3 • ¢ : Skip to the beginning of the next track. UP SPRING3.MP3 SPRING4.MP3 FF SPRING5.MP3 • 4 : Skip to the beginning of the previous track. DOWNREW
Note: If the loaded disc is not recorded in the audio CD format or MP3 format, “WRONG DISC FORMAT” appears on the TV screen. To stop playback for a moment TUNER PRESET Press 3/8. To resume play, press 3/8 again or ENTER.To stop during playback TUNER PRESET
Press 7.To remove the disc
Press 0 on the front panel. The disc tray comes out. To close the disc tray, press 0 again. EN43-46TH-A30[UG].pm6 44 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,MP3 Playback Operations Using the On-Screen Display
STANDBY/ON AUDIO It is recommended to turn on your TV when playing back an MP3 disc. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVEWhen the loaded MP3 disc is recognized, the following on-screen
DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL display appears on the TV screen. (The contents of this on-screen AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME display varies according to the disc—the way MP3 tracks wereVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX recorded on the disc.)CONTROL • Only the first 8 letters of the titles appear on the TV screen. TUNER PRESET DOWN UPFrom the remote control ONLY:
REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH ButtonTo do∞ 5 ENTER
ENTER ENTER Start playback or go into a directory. ∞ / 5 Select a track or directory.VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGNumber SOUND
buttons123SETTING456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODEREPEAT
REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAMSEARCH CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP
5/135 ? ? MP3 On-Screen Display OperationsSPRING SUMMER FALL WINTER
LIAR.MP3 LOVE.MP3ENTER
5 ∞ 5 and ENTERSPRING
SPRING ENTER SUMMER SPRING1.MP3 ENTER FALL SPRING2.MP3 WINTER SPRING3.MP3 LIAR.MP3 SPRING4.MP3 LOVE.MP3 To “SUMMER” SPRING5.MP3 Start playing “SPRING1.MP3” 5 ∞ 5 ∞SPRING
SPRING ENTER SUMMER SPRING1.MP3 ENTER FALL SPRING2.MP3 WINTER SPRING3.MP3 LIAR.MP3 SPRING4.MP3 LOVE.MP3 To “FALL” SPRING5.MP3 Start playing “SPRING2.MP3” 5 ∞ 5 ∞SPRING SPRING
SUMMER ENTER SPRING1.MP3 ENTER FALL SPRING2.MP3 WINTER SPRING3.MP3 LIAR.MP3 SPRING4.MP3 LOVE.MP3 Start playing SPRING5.MP3 Start playing “LIAR.MP3” “SPRING3.MP3”Note: If you press 2, the cursor moves to current playback track.
EN43-46TH-A30[UG].pm6 45 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,Moving to a Particular Track Directly Repeating Playback
You can move to a particular track on the disc directly. On an MP3 disc, A–B Repeat cannot be used. You can enjoy only Repeat play. From the remote control ONLY: 1 SEARCHPress SEARCH during playback or pause. From the remote control ONLY: “TRACK – – – – ” appears on the TV screen. To repeat playback—Repeat Play Press REPEAT repeatedly. 2 REPEATPress the number buttons to123The indication corresponding to the selected mode appears select a track number you on the TV screen. 456want. • Each time you press the button, repeat mode changes as The system starts playback from the789follows: selected track. 0 REPEAT:RANDOM REPEAT:ONE • To select number 5, press 5 (then ENTER). REPEAT OFF REPEAT:DISC REPEAT:DIR • To select number 10, press 1, 0 (then ENTER). • To select number 23, press 2, 3 (then ENTER). • To select number 123, press 1, 2, 3. REPEAT:RANDOM : All tracks recorded on the disc will be played once at Note: random (random play), and random play will be repeated. REPEAT:ONE When you want to move to another file (track) directly, you can move to it simply by pressing the number buttons (without pressing : Current track will be repeated. SEARCH in step 1). REPEAT:DIR : Tracks in the current directory will be repeated. REPEAT:DISC : All tracks on the disc will be repeated. REPEAT OFF : Repeat play is canceled. (Normal play is resumed.) Note: When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Repeat mode indication also changes as follows: REPEAT:RANDOM REPEAT:ONE REPEAT OFF REPEAT:DISC REPEAT:DIR EN43-46TH-A30[UG].pm6 46 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,Tuner Operations Tuning in Stations
STANDBY/ON From the remote control:AUDIO
1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select the FM/AM TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE band. DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. AUDIO/ • Each time you press the button, the band alternates FM MODE AUDIO/FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME FM/AM between FM and AM.VCR
TUNER DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNERPRESET
TUNER PRESET PRESET DOWN DOWN UP UP 2 Press and hold TUNING + or – until you find TUNING – REW FF TUNING + the frequency you want. VCR CHANNELVCR CHANNEL TUNING TUNING• TUNING + : Increases the B.SEARCH F.SEARCH frequency. B.SEARCH F.SEARCH • TUNING – : Decreases the ENTER frequency. The system starts searching for stations and stops when a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in.VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING On the front panel: SOUND 1 Press SOURCE repeatedly until the123SOURCE SETTING desired band appears on the display. 456PRO LOGIC The last received station of the selected band is tuned789SLOW SETUP TEST in. 0 • Each time you press the button, the source changes as follows: ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM PROGRAMDVD player* AUX IN
CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEPAM FM
* “WAIT” appears on the display. 2 Press 7 so that “MANUAL” appears on the For basic tuner operations, see “Basic Tuner Operations” on page display. 15. • Each time you press the button, the operation mode of ¢ and 4 buttons alternates between “PRESET” and “MANUAL.”Setting the AM Tuner Interval Spacing PRESET : Select this for using ¢ and 4 as the
buttons to select the preset station. Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart, and other countries use MANUAL : Select this for using ¢ and 4 as the 10 kHz spacing. buttons to change the frequency manually. • 9 kHz interval spacing is the initial setting. • Each time you do the following procedure, the AM tuner interval spacing alternates between 9 kHz and 10 kHz. 3 Press and hold ¢ or 4 until 1 you find the frequency you want.Select AM as the band. • ¢ : Increases the frequency. • 4 : Decreases the frequency. 2 Press 9, 1, and 0 on the remote control. The new setting for the interval spacing appears on the display, and the band changes into FM. Notes: • When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the 3 Press FM/AM on the remote control to select AM indicator lights up on the display. as the band again. • When an FM stereo program is received, the indicator also lights up. • When you press the button repeatedly, the frequency changes step by step. EN47-48TH-A30[UG].pm6 47 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,Using Preset Tuning To tune in a preset station
From the remote control: Once a station is assigned to a channel number, the station can be 1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select the FM/AM quickly tuned. You can preset up to 15 FM and 15 AM stations. band. The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. To store the preset stations • Each time you press the button, the band alternates From the remote control ONLY: between FM and AM. 1 Tune in the station you want to preset (see “Tuning in Stations”). 2 Press TUNER PRESET UP or DOWN until the desired preset station TUNER PRESET appears on the DOWN UP display. REW FF 2 Press PROGRAM. PROGRAM • TUNER PRESET UP : Increases the preset number. The preset number appears on the display and the • TUNER PRESET DOWN : Decreases the preset number. PROGRAM indicator lights up. On the front panel: 1 Press SOURCE repeatedly until the SOURCE desired band appears on the display. Preset number 2 Press 7 so that “PRESET” appears on the 3 Press TUNER PRESET UP or DOWN to select a display. preset number. • Each time you press the button, the operation mode ofTUNER PRESET DOWN UP ¢ and 4 buttons alternates between “PRESET” and “MANUAL.” REW FF PRESET : Select this for using ¢ and 4 as the buttons to select the preset station. • TUNER PRESET UP : Increases the preset number. MANUAL : Select this for using ¢ and 4 as the • TUNER PRESET DOWN : Decreases the preset number. buttons to change the frequency manually. 4 Press PROGRAM to store the preset 3 Press ¢ or 4 repeatedly untilPROGRAM the desired preset station appears station. on the display. The PROGRAM indicator goes off, and the station is assigned to the selected preset number. • ¢ : Increases the preset number. • 4 : Decreases the preset number. 5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 until you store all the stations you want. Selecting the FM Reception Mode When an stereo FM program tuned currently is noisy, you can To erase a stored preset station change the FM reception mode to improve the reception. Storing a new station on a used number erases the previously stored one. Press AUDIO/FM MODE. AUDIO/FM MODE The indicator goes off from the display and the program loses the stereo effect. To resume the stereo effect, press AUDIO/FM MODE again. The stereo effect resumes. Note: The FM reception mode will also resume in the following case: • When you change the frequency or the preset number EN47-48TH-A30[UG].pm6 48 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,Setting up the DVD Preferences Setting the Initial Languages
STANDBY/ON You can select your favorite language you listen to or read on the TVAUDIO
screen. When you operate this system or watch a DVD, you will be able to TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE operate the system or to enjoy a DVD in the language you have DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL selected and stored. AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME On the language selection menu, you can select the following:VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET LANGUAGES SYSTEM DOWN UP REW FF OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH VCR CHANNEL TUNING AUDIO ENGLISH B.SEARCH F.SEARCH SUBTITLE ENGLISH ∞ 5 MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISHENTER ENTER
» « | \ : Move Setup : ExitVOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING RETURN OSD LANGUAGE : Select the indication language shown on the TV screen while operating the SOUND system. (ex. PLAY, STOP, PAUSE, etc.) 123SETTING AUDIO : Select the language you listen to while456PRO LOGIC watching a DVD. 789SLOW SETUP TEST SETUP 0 SUBTITLE : Select the subtitle language you read ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE while watching a DVD. REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM MENU LANGUAGE : Select the menu language recorded on a CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP DVD which you use while operating the DVD’s own menu.Languages you can select on this menu
On the Setup menu, you can do the two main important settings— You can select the following languages separately for each listed language selection (LANGUAGES) menu and system setting item on the menu. (SYSTEM) menu. • For “OSD LANGUAGE”: • Setup menu can only be displayed while a disc is not playing. English, Chinese, Spanish, French, German, Japanese, and (The DVD player must be selected as the source.) Korean. • You can only use the remote control for Setup menu operations. • For “AUDIO,” “SUBTITLE,” and “MENU LANGUAGE”: English, Chinese, French, German, Japanese, Russian, Spanish, Portuguese, Korean and Original*. * Available only for “AUDIO” and “SUBTITLE.” When you want to operate the disc or enjoy its playback in the originally recorded (default) language, select “ORIGINAL.” Note: The original language will be selected as the initial language regardless of your setting in the following cases: • If the language you have selected is not recorded on the disc. • If the disc is programed to be played back in the original language. EN49-53TH-A30[UG].pm6 49 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,Basic language selecting procedure Introducing the DVD Preference (System)
Ex. : To select the desired language as the initial language for “AUDIO.” You can set the DVD preference to match it to your usage and From the remote control ONLY: operating circumstances. 1 Press SETUP. SETUP On the system setting menu, you can set the following: Language selection menu of the Setup menu appears on LANGUAGES SYSTEM the TV screen. LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB RATING LEVEL OFF OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH AUDIO ENGLISH SUBTITLE ENGLISH MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISH » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit TV SCREEN: Select the TV screen size for playing back a DVD 2 recorded with 16:9 wide screen video signal.Press ∞ (or 5) to select • 4:3 LB : Select “4:3 LB (Letter Box)” (highlight) one of the language when the aspect ratio of your TV items. is 4:3. While viewing a wideENTER
LANGUAGES SYSTEM screen picture, the black bars appear on the top and the bottom OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH of the screen. AUDIO ENGLISH SUBTITLE ENGLISH • 4:3 PS : Select “4:3 PS (Pan-Scan)” when MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISH the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3. While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit appear, however, the left and right edge sides of the pictures will not 3 Press ENTER. be shown on the screen. Pop-up window appears (where the • 16:9 : Select “16:9” when the language names are listed). aspect ratio of the TV is ENTER 16:9. (Set the screen size to “ ” indicates the current full on your TV.) setting. LANGUAGES SYSTEM RATING LEVEL :You can select this to restrict playback of DVDs OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH containing violent scenes and those not suitable AUDIO EENNGGLILSIHSH for your family members. (See page 52 for SUBTITLE ECNHGLINISEHSE FRENCH detailed operations.)MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISHGERMAN JAPANESE RUSSIAN
» « | \ : Move Setup : Exit indicates that more languages are listed, but not shown. 4 Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) the language you want, then press ENTER.ENTER
The setting is stored (and the pop-up window goes off). • When you want to cancel the setting you have just made, press RETURN without pressing ENTER. (Pop-up menu also goes off.) 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to select the other language items listed.To erase the Setup menu SETUP
Press SETUP. EN49-53TH-A30[UG].pm6 50 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,Setting up the DVD Preferences
3 Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) one of the system STANDBY/ON AUDIO setting items listed on the menu. ENTER TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE LANGUAGES SYSTEM DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME RATING LEVEL OFFVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 3/2/5/∞ 4 Press ENTER.ENTER Pop-up window appears (where the ENTER
selectable settings are listed). ENTER indicates the current setting.VOLUME
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING RETURN TV SCREEN 4:43 :L 3B LBNumber SOUND RATING LEVEL O4F F: 3 PS
buttons12316 : 9SETTING
456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST SETUP ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM 5 Press ∞ (or 5) to select CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP (highlight) the proper setting, then press ENTER.The setting is stored (and the pop-up ENTER
window goes off).Setting the TV screen size • When you want to cancel the setting
you have just made, press RETURN without pressing ENTER. (Pop-upFrom the remote control ONLY:
SETUP menu also goes off.)1 Press SETUP.Language selection menu of the setup menu appears on • Even if “4:3 PS” is selected, the screen size may become
the TV screen. “4:3 LB” while playing some DVDs. This depends on how LANGUAGES SYSTEM the DVD is programed and recorded. • If a disc (or some portions of the disc) is recorded with OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH the video signals of 4:3 aspect ratio, this setting does not AUDIO ENGLISH take effect. The pictures are displayed with full 4:3 aspect SUBTITLE ENGLISH MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISH ratio or with 4:3 Letter Box. » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit To erase the Setup menu 2 Press ENTER (or 3/2) to Press SETUP. SETUP select (highlight) the system setting menu.ENTER
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB RATING LEVEL OFF » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit EN49-53TH-A30[UG].pm6 51 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,Setting the Parental (Rating) Level 5 Press the number buttons to enter the password
(4 digits).Using this function, you can restrict playback of DVD containing • When shipped from the factory, password is “7890.”
violent scenes and those not suitable for your family members. • If you enter a wrong password, your setting will be canceled.Nobody can play such a disc unless this function is canceled.
(“WRONG PARENTAL LEVEL” appears on the TV screen if you LANGUAGES SYSTEM try to play back such a disc.) TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB • This setting takes effect only for the DVDs containing the rating ENTER PASSWORD *** level information—Level 1 (most restrictive) to Level 8 (least DIGITAL OUTPUT restrictive).From the remote control ONLY:
1 » « | \ : Move Setup : ExitPress SETUP. SETUPLanguage selection menu of the setup menu appears on
the TV screen. 2 Press ENTER (or 3/2) to select (highlight) the system LANGUAGES SYSTEM setting menu. TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB ENTER RATING LEVEL OFOFF BILTESVTERLE 1AM LANGUAGES SYSTEM LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB LEVEL 4 RATING LEVEL OFF LEVEL 5 » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit 6 Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) the level you want, 3 Press ∞ (or 5) to select then press ENTER.ENTER
(highlight) “RATING LEVEL.”ENTER
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB RATING LEVEL OFFTo erase the Setup menu SETUP
» « | \ : Move Setup : ExitPress SETUP again.
4 Press ENTER. “RATING LEVEL” now changes to “ENTER PASSWORD” on the menu.ENTER
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB ENTER PASSWORD » « | \ : Move Setup : ExitTO BE CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
EN49-53TH-A30[UG].pm6 52 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,Setting up the DVD Preferences
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB STANDBY/ON RATING LEVEL OLFEFVEL 4 AUDIO BILTESVTERLE 5AM LEVEL 6 TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE LEVEL 7 LEVEL 8 DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL NEW PASSWORD » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUMEVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
LANGUAGES SYSTEM B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 5/∞ TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LBENTER NEW PASSWORD - ENTER VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING » « | \ : Move Setup : ExitNumber SOUND
123• If “NEW PASSWORD” is the last item listed on the pop-up buttons SETTING window and is not shown, pressing ∞ repeatedly will show it456PRO LOGIC in the pop-up window. 789SLOW SETUP TEST SETUP ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE 3 Press the number buttons to REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM enter a new password, then CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP ENTER.Your new password is now stored. ENTER SETUP To change the password To erase the Setup menu Press SETUP again.
1 Repeat steps 1 to 5 of “Setting the Parental (Rating) Level” procedure. To reset the passwordYou can reset the password to the initial setting “7890.”
2 Press ∞ (or 5) to select REMEMBER all the other preset settings such as the speaker (highlight) “NEW settings, preset stations, Sleep Timer, DVD setup menu settings are also reset to the factory settings.PASSWORD,” then ENTER. ENTER While the source is DVD player and playback stops, press and
hold 7 on the front panel until the “INITIAL” appears on the display. EN49-53TH-A30[UG].pm6 53 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,Operating JVC’s Components You can use the remote control to operate not only this unit but also other JVC products.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied for the other products. — This remote control can operate a VCR whose remote control code is set to A code. • To operate the other products, aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on the target product. ❏ To operate a JVC’s TVYou can perform the following operations on the TV.
STANDBY/ON AUDIO TV : Turn on or off the TV.TV VOLUME +/– : Adjust the volume. TV TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE TV/VIDEO TV/VIDEO : Set the input mode (either TV or
DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNELTV CHANNEL TV VOLUME VIDEO).
AUDIO/ +/– FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME +/– TV CHANNEL +/– : Change the channels.VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF ❏ To operate a JVC’s VCRAfter pressing VCR CONTROL on the remote VCR CONTROL
control, you can perform the following operations STANDBY/ON AUDIO on the VCR.VCR TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE STEP DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL VCR : Turn on or off the VCR.
AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME VCR CHANNEL +/– : Change the channels.VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL VCR CONTROL 1 – 9, 0 : Select TV channel on the VCR. TUNER PRESET 3/8 : Start playback.4 DOWN UP ¢ 7 : Stop playback. REW FFVCR CHANNEL VCR CHANNELTUNING VCR CHANNEL STEP : Pause playback. To release it,
– +B.SEARCH F.SEARCH press 3/8. 7 3/8 FF (¢) : Fast-wind a tape. ENTER REW (4) : Rewind a tape. VOLUME After operating the VCR, press DVD FM/AM TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING DVD or FM/AM.Number SOUND
123buttons SETTING456IMPORTANT: PRO LOGIC789When you press VCR CONTROL, some buttons on the SLOW SETUP TEST 0 remote control cannot work for operating this unit. ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODETo operate this unit, press DVD or FM/AM.
REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP EN54-58TH-A30[UG].pm6 54 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,Operating Other Manufacturers’ TV
❏ To change the transmittable signals for operating a You can use the remote control to operate other TV manufactures’ TV. • Refer also to the manuals supplied for the other products. 1. Press and hold TV . • To operate the other products, aim the remote control 2. Enter manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9, and 0. directly at the remote sensor on the target product. 3. Release TV . Now, you can perform the following operations on the TV. TV : Turn on or off the TV. STANDBY/ON TV VOLUME +/– : Adjust the volume.AUDIO
TV/VIDEO : Set the input mode (either TV or TV TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE TV/VIDEO VIDEO) DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL TV VOLUME TV CHANNEL +/– : Change the channels. TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME +/–+/–VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL 4. Try to operate your TV by pressing TV . When your TV turns on or off, you have entered the correct TUNER PRESET DOWN UP code. REW FF VCR CHANNEL TUNING If there are more than one code listed for your brand of TV, B.SEARCH F.SEARCH try each one until the correct one is entered. ENTER Manufacturers’ codes for TV Manufacturer Codes JVC 01VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING Hitachi 10 Magnavox 04 Number SOUND Mitsubishi 13 buttons123Panasonic 12, 24SETTING
456RCA 07, 29 PRO LOGIC789Samsung 11 SLOW SETUP TEST 0 Sanyo 05, 20 ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE Sharp 02, 16, 22 REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM Sony 03 CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP Toshiba 09 Zenith 17 Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment. EN54-58TH-A30[UG].pm6 55 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,Maintenance
To get the best performance of the unit, keep your discs and mechanism clean. General Notes Cleaning the unit In general, you will have the best performance by keeping your • Stains on the unit discs, and the mechanism clean. Should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the unit is heavily stained, • Store discs in their cases, and keep them in cabinets or on shelves. wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-diluted neutral detergent and • Keep the disc tray closed when not in use. wrung well, then wipe clean with a dry cloth. • Since the unit may deteriorate in quality, become damaged or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following. — DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth. Handling Discs — DO NOT wipe it strong. — DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine. — DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides to it. • Remove the disc from its case by — DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact with holding it at the edge while it for a long time. pressing the center hole lightly. • Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc. • Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping. • Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc when placing it back in its case. • Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes, and moisture. To clean the disc Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge. DO NOT use any solvent—such as conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner, or benzine—to clean the disc. EN54-58TH-A30[UG].pm6 56 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,Troubleshooting
Use this chart to help you solve daily operational problems. If there is any problem you cannot solve, contact your JVC service center. PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION Power does not come on. The power cord is not connected correctly. Insert the plug into the socket. The remote control does not work. • It is too far from the center unit, or is not • Come close to the center unit. facing the center unit. • There is something obstructing the remote • Avoid any obstacles. sensor. • The VCR CONTROL button has been • Press DVD or FM/AM to operate the pressed. system. (See page 54.) • The battery is flat. • Replace the battery. • The battery has been inserted the wrong • Insert the battery correctly. way round (+/–). • Sunlight is falling directly on the detector. • Shade the remote control from direct sunlight. No sound. • There is a short in the speaker cord. • Reconnect the speaker cord. • The audio cord is not connected properly. • Connect the cord properly. (See page 9.) • An incorrect source has been selected. • Select the correct source. (See pages 11 to 16.) • Muting is on. • Press MUTING to cancel muting. • The disc is copy–protected CD. • Replace the disc. Sound is emitted from only one speaker. • The speaker cord is not connected correctly. • Connect the cord properly. (See page 8.) • Left-right balance is incorrect. • Adjust balance. (See pages 22 to 26.) No video. • The video cord is not connected properly. • Connect the cord properly. (See page 10.) • TV input selection is incorrect. • Select the correct input. No picture is displayed on the TV screen, the • The color system of the disc does not match • Change the color system, or replace the picture is blurred, or the picture is divided the system. disc.(See page 17.) into two parts. • The scanning mode is set to “P–SCAN • Change the scanning mode to “I–SCAN MODE” though the system is connected to MODE.” (See page 17.) the TV which does not support the progressive video input such as a conventional TV. A disc cannot be played. • The system and disc region code numbers • Replace the disc. (See page 27.) are incompatible. • The disc causes the parental (rating) error. • Enter password to change the parental (rating) level. (See page 52.) “WRONG DISC FORMAT” appears on the • The CD–R/CD–RW does not contain any • Replace the disc. TV screen. MP3 files. Pictures and sounds are distorted. • The disc is dirty. • Clean the disc. • A VCR is connected between the center unit • Connect the center unit and TV directly. and the TV. Pictures are distorted when progressive mode • “Progressive Mode ” may not be set • Change “Progressive Mode” is selected. appropriately for the current disc. (See page 16.) The edge is missing on the picture image. • Initial setup (TV screen size) was incorrect. • Set TV screen size correctly. (See pages 50 and 51.) Continuous static during FM broadcasts. • The received signal is too weak. • Connect an external FM antenna (see page 6), or contact your dealer. • The station is too far away. • Select another station. • The antenna is not connected correctly. • Check the connection. (See page 6.) The system does not work correctly. • Lightning or electronic noise interferes with • Switch power off, and remove and re-insert operation of the microcomputer. the power plug in the socket. • Immediately after heating the room, the unit • Turn off the power, plug off and leave the was moved to a cold location causing unit a few hours before switching power on condensation to form inside. again. The VCR cannot be operated using this • The remote control is not set for VCR • Press VCR CONTROL to operate the VCR. remote control. operations. (See page 54.) • The VCR is not a JVC’s product. • This remote control can operate a JVC’s VCR whose remote control code is set to A code. EN54-58TH-A30[UG].pm6 57 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,Specifications
Center unit (XV-THA30) Subwoofer (SP-WA30) Amplifier section Speaker: 20 cm Front/Center/Rear: Bass-reflex, Magnetically Shielded 25 watts per channel, min. RMS at 6 ohms as 1 kHz, Power Handling Capacity: 110 W with no more than 10 % total harmonic distortion. Impedance: 4 Ω (min) Subwoofer: Frequency Range: 25 Hz to 200 Hz 110 watts, min. RMS at 4 ohms as 100 Hz, Dimensions (W × H × D): 249 mm × 404 mm × 335 mm with no more than 10 % total harmonic distortion. Mass: 6.5 kg (except cords) Audio section Audio input sensitivity/Impedance (at 1 kHz) Satellite Speakers (SP-XA30) AUX IN: 500 mV/47 kΩ Speakers: 8 cm Bass-reflex, Magnetically Shielded Video section Power Handling Capacity: 35 W Color System: NTSC/PAL Impedance: 6 Ω (min) For NTSC discs, the scanning mode can be selected between Frequency Range: 90 Hz to 20 kHz interaced scanning and progressive scanning. For PAL discs, Length of cords: 6 m only interaced scanning mode is available. Dimensions (W × H × D): 105 mm × 119 mm × 126 mm Horizontal Resolution: 480 lines Mass: 600 g (except cords) Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 68 dB Output Level VIDEO OUT VIDEO (Composite): 1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω Rear Satellite Speakers (SP-XSA30) S-VIDEO (Y): 1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω (C): 0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω Speakers: 8 cm COMPONENT OUT Bass-reflex, Magnetically Shielded Y: 1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω Power Handling Capacity: 35 W PB/PR: 0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω Impedance: 6 Ω (min) Frequency Range: 90 Hz to 20 kHz Tuner section Length of cords: 10 m Tuning Range FM : 87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz AM : 531 kHz – 1 602 kHz Dimensions (W × H × D): 105 mm × 119 mm × 126 mm (at 9 kHz intervals) Mass: 600 g (except cords) 530 kHz – 1 600 kHz (at 10 kHz intervals) Usable Sensitivity FM: 8.0 dBf (0.9 µV/75 Ω) Designs & specifications are subject to change without notice. AM loop antenna: 650 µV/m General Readable discs: DVD VIDEO, Video CD, Super Video CD, Audio CD, CD–R/RW (Audio CD, Video CD, Super Video CD, MP3 disc), DVD–R (Video format) Power Requirements: AC 110 V – 127 V/220 V – 240 V , adjustable with the voltage selector, 50 Hz/60 Hz Power Consumption: 120 W (at operation) 2 W (in standby mode) Dimensions (W × H × D): 350 mm × 80 mm × 365mm Mass: 6.5 kg EN54-58TH-A30[UG].pm6 58 02.8.19, 1:42 PM,Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A., Canada, Australia and U.K.)
COMPONENT OUT PR PB Y MIN MIN 4 MIN MIN CAUTION for mains (AC) line BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your mains (AC) line voltage corresponds with the position of the voltage selector switch provided on the outside of this equipment and, if different, reset the voltage selector switch, to prevent from a damage or risk of fire/electric shock. VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED EN, AR JVC 0802KSMMDWSAM TH-A30[UG]cover.pm6 2 02.8.19, 11:01 AM,DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30 Consists of XV-THA30, SP-XA30, SP-XSA30 and SP-WA30
STANDBY/ONAUDIO
TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUMEVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCHENTER VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGSTANDBY
AUDIO/FM MODE STANDBY/ON DSP VOLUME SOURCE DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30DIGITALRM-STHA30U DVD CINEMA SYSTEMINSTRUCTIONS
For Customer Use: Enter below the Model No. and Serial No. which are located either on the rear, bottom or side of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference. Model No. Serial No.LVT0945-009A
[A] TH-A30[A]cover.pm6 1 02.8.8, 7:03 PM,Warnings, Cautions and Others
Caution –– STANDBY/ON switch! Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely. The STANDBY/ON switch in any position does not disconnect the mains line. The power can be remote controlled.CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.: 1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet. 2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.CAUTION
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes. (If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.) • Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted candles, on the apparatus. • When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be considered and local rules or laws governing the disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly. • Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus. Caution: Proper Ventilation To avoid risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from damage. Locate the apparatus as follows: Front: No obstructions open spacing. Sides: No obstructions in 10 cm from the sides. Top: No obstructions in 10 cm from the top. Back: No obstructions in 15 cm from the back Bottom: No obstructions, place on the level surface. In addition, maintain the best possible air circulation as illustrated. Spacing 15 cm or more XV-THA30 Wall or obstructions Front Stand height 15 cm or more FloorG-1
TH-A30[A]safety.pm6 1 02.8.19, 1:25 PM,IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
REPRODUCTION OF LABELS 1 CLASSIFICATION LABEL, PLACED ON EXTERIOR 2 WARNING LABEL, PLACED INSIDE THE UNITSURFACE
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASER LAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1 1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT 2. CAUTION: Invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam. 3. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.G-2
TH-A30[A]safety.pm6 2 02.8.19, 1:25 PM,Table of Contents
Parts Identification ... 2 DVD Playback ... 29 Center Unit ... 2 Showing the On-Screen Bar ... 29 Remote Control ... 3 Selecting the Subtitles ... 30 Getting Started... 5 Selecting the Audio Languages ... 30 Selecting the Multi-Angle Views ... 30 Before Installation ... 5 Checking the Remaining Time ... 31 Checking the Supplied Accessories ... 5 Disc Menu-Driven Playback ... 31 Putting Batteries in the Remote Control ... 5 Moving to a Particular Portion Directly ... 32 Connecting the FM and AM Antennas ... 6 Searching for a Particular Point ... 32 Speaker Layout Diagram ... 7 Repeating Playback ... 33 Connecting the Speakers ... 8 7 Repeat Play ... 33 Connecting Audio/Video Component ... 9 7 A–B Repeat ... 33 Basic DVD Operations ... 11 Programming the Playing Order of the Chapters 1 Turn On the Power ... 11 —Program Play ... 34 2 Select the source ... 11 DVD Special Effect Playback ... 36 3 Load a DVD ... 11 7 Still Picture/Frame-by-Frame Playback ... 36 4 Start Playback ... 11 7 Slow Motion Playback ... 36 5 Adjust the Volume ... 11 7 Zoom ... 36 6 Select an Appropriate Progressive Mode ... 12 VCD/CD Playback... 37 7 Activate Surround or DSP Mode ... 12 Showing the On-Screen Bar ... 37 8 Stop Playback ... 12 Checking the Remaining Time ... 37 Basic VCD/CD Operations ... 13 Disc Menu-Driven Playback (Only for VCD) ... 38 Moving to a Particular Portion Directly ... 38 1 Turn On the Power ... 13 Searching for a Particular Point ... 38 2 Select the source ... 13 Repeating Playback ... 39 3 Load a VCD/CD ... 13 7 Repeat Play ... 39 4 Start Playback ... 13 7 A–B Repeat ... 39 5 Adjust the Volume ... 14 Programming the Playing Order of the Tracks 6 Activate DSP Mode ... 14 —Program Play ... 40 7 Stop Playback ... 14 Selecting Playback Channel ... 41 Basic Tuner Operations ... 15 VCD Special Effect Playback ... 42 1 Turn On the Power ... 15 7 Still Picture/Frame-by-Frame Playback ... 42 2 Select the Band ... 15 7 Slow Motion Playback ... 42 3 Adjust the Volume ... 15 7 Zoom ... 42 4 Tune in to a Station ... 15 MP3 Introduction ... 43 Other Basic Operations ... 16 MP3 Playback ... 44 Enjoying Sounds from the External Component ... 16 Starting Playback ... 44 Selecting an Appropriate Progressive Mode ... 16 Operations Using the On-Screen Display ... 45 Turning Off the Power with the Timer ... 16 Moving to a Particular Track Directly ... 46 Repeating Playback ... 46 TV Settings... 17 Changing the Color System ... 17 Tuner Operations ... 47 Changing the Scanning Mode ... 17 Tuning in Stations ... 47 Using Preset Tuning ... 48 Speaker Settings... 18 Selecting the FM Reception Mode ... 48 Setting the Delay Time ... 18 Setting up the DVD Preferences ... 49 Creating Realistic Sound Fields ... 20 Setting the Initial Languages ... 49 7 Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround... 20 Introducing the DVD Preference (System) ... 50 7 Dolby Surround ... 20 Setting the Parental (Rating) Level ... 52 7 DSP (Digital Signal Processor) Modes ... 21 Adjusting Stereo Sound ... 22 Operating JVC’s Components ... 54 Adjusting Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround ... 23 Operating Other Manufacturers’ TV ... 55 Activating Dynamic Range Compression ... 24 Maintenance ... 56 Adjusting Dolby Surround ... 24 Adjusting DSP Modes ... 25 Troubleshooting ... 57 Disc Introduction—DVD/VCD/CD ... 27 Specifications... 58 Basic Disc Operations ... 28 EN01-10TH-A30[A].pm6 1 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Parts Identification Center Unit Front Panel
12345678STANDBY
AUDIO/FM MODE STANDBY/ON DSP VOLUME SOURCE DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30DIGITAL9pqwSee pages in the parentheses for details.Front Panel
1 STANDBY/ON button and STANDBY lamp (11 – 15) 7 Remote sensor 2 AUDIO/FM MODE button (30, 41, 48) 8 3/8 (play/pause) button (11 – 14, 28, 44) 3 Multi operation buttons • Pressing this button also turns on the power and • 4, ¢, and 7 changes the source to the DVD player. 4 Disc tray (11, 13) 9 DSP button (12, 14, 22, 25) 5 0 (open/close) button (11 – 14, 35, 40, 44) p VOLUME + and – buttons (11, 14, 15) • Pressing this button also turns on the power and q SOURCE button (15, 16, 47, 48) changes the source to the DVD player. w Illumination lamp (11 – 15) 6 Display windowDisplay Window
1234567TUNED ST PROGRAM PBC MHz TITLE DSP kHz LINEAR PCMLCRLFE
LS S RS89See pages in the parentheses for details.Display Window
1 Sound signal indicators (12, 14, 16, 20) 5 DSP indicator (21, 25) • PRO LOGIC, DOLBY DIGITAL, DTS, 6 PBC (Play Back Control) indicator (37) and LINEAR PCM 7 Frequency unit indicators 2 TITLE indicator (28) • MHz (for FM station) and kHz (for AM station) 3 Tuner mode indicators (15, 47, 48) 8 Audio channel indicators • TUNED and ST (stereo) • Indicates audio channels currently being played back. 4 PROGRAM indicator (34, 40, 48) 9 Main display EN01-10TH-A30[A].pm6 2 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Parts Identification Remote Control
See pages in the parentheses for details.Remote Cotrol Remote Control
1 STANDBY/ON AUDIO button (11 – 15) 2 VCR button (54) 3 TV button (11, 13, 54, 55) STANDBY/ON 4 STEP button (36, 42, 54) 1 AUDIO 5 DISPLAY button (29, 37) 6 AUDIO/FM MODE button (30, 41, 48) 2t7SUBTITLE button (30) TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE3y8Source selecting buttons (11, 13, 15, 16, 24, 47) • DVD, FM/AM, AUX 4 DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL u • Pressing one of these buttons also turns on the power. 5 AUDIO/ 9 4, 7, 3/8, and ¢ buttons FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME6iTUNER PRESET UP and DOWN buttons (48) 7 VCR FF (Fast-forward) and REW (Rewind) buttonsDVD FM/AM AUX CONTROLopVCR CHANNEL + and – buttons (54)8 TUNING + and – buttons (15, 47) TUNER PRESET DOWN UP ¡ F. (Forward) SEARCH and 1 B. (Back) SEARCH 9 buttonsREW FF q Menu operation buttons VCR CHANNELTUNING
p • 3, 2, 5, and ∞ buttons • ENTER button B.SEARCH F.SEARCH w VOLUME + and – buttons (11, 14, 15) e TOP MENU button (31) r MENU button (31, 38) q ENTER t TV/VIDEO button (11, 13, 54, 55) y PROGRESSIVE button (12, 16, 17) u TV CHANNEL + and – buttons (54, 55) i TV VOLUME + and – buttons (54, 55) w VOLUME o VCR CONTROL button (54) TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING e ; IMPORTANT: If you press VCR CONTROL , this remote control will workraONLY for the JVC’s VCR. When you want to operate the system again, press DVD or FM/AM. ; MUTING button (11, 14) a RETURN button (38, 50, 51) RM-STHA30U DVD CINEMA SYSTEM EN01-10TH-A30[A].pm6 3 02.8.19, 1:18 PM, nInside the Cover Inside the Cover
1 Number buttons (32, 38, 46, 54, 55) 2 SLOW button (36, 42) TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING 3 ZOOM button (36, 42) 4 ANGLE button (30) 5 REPEAT button (33, 39, 46) SOUND 6 A–B REPEAT button (33, 39) 12397CLEAR button (32, 38, 41) SETTING 8 SEARCH button (32, 38, 46) 1456p9SOUND button (22 – 26) PRO LOGICqpSETTING button (18, 19)789qPRO LOGIC button (16, 19, 22, 24) 2 SLOW SETUP TESTwwSETUP button (50 – 53) 0e3eTEST button (21)ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODErrD.R.C button (24) 4ttDSP MODE button (12, 14, 22, 25) REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM5yPROGRAM button (34, 35, 40, 48)y6uSLEEP button (16)CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEPuiREMAIN button (31, 37) 8 iTo open the cover of the remote control, push here then
slide downward.VOLUME
D E FM/A TM V VOLUAMTUE X
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING UNERCPONVTCRES RRE OT L B.SE VA CR RCH T CU HN AIN NG NEL ENT F.E SR EARCH TOP MENUVMOE LN UU MERETURN
1 MUTING42753SLO SW86OUND ANGL +E 10 9SETTING
RE NP Z TSC SEP
T RE OA O LT OM /PA L UPOGIC
CL A RE TEAT
T ST TONGPDE
O ROSTPO GRA MM ODE REM EA FI FN ECTSLEEP
D RV MD -C SIN TE HM AA 3 0S UYSTEM RM-STHA30U DVD CINEMA SYSTEM EN01-10TH-A30[A].pm6 4 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Getting Started Before Installation Putting Batteries in the Remote Control
General Precautions Before using the remote control, put two supplied batteries first. • DO NOT insert any metal object into the center unit. • When using the remote control, aim the remote control directly at • DO NOT disassemble the center unit or remove screws, covers, or the remote sensor on the center unit. cabinet. • DO NOT expose the center unit to rain or moisture. 1. On the back of the remote control, remove the battery cover. Locations • Install the center unit in a location that is level and protected from moisture. • The temperature around the center unit must be between 5˚C and 35˚C. • Make sure there is good ventilation around the center unit. Poor ventilation could cause overheating and damage the center unit. Handling the center unit • DO NOT touch the power cord with wet hands. 2. Insert batteries. Make sure to match the polarity: • DO NOT pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When (+) to (+) and (–) to (–). unplugging the cord, always grasp the plug so as not to damage the cord. • Keep the power cord away from the connecting cords and the antenna. The power cord may cause noise or screen interference. It is recommended to use a coaxial cable for antenna connection, since it is well-shielded against interference. • When a power failure occurs, or when you unplug the power cord, the preset settings such as preset FM/AM channels and sound adjustments may be erased in a few days. 3. Replace the cover.Checking the Supplied Accessories
Check to be sure you have all of the following supplied accessories. The number in the parentheses indicates the quantity of the pieces supplied. • Remote Control (1) • Batteries (2) • AM loop antenna (1) If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases, replace • FM antenna (1) the batteries. Use two UM-4“AAA”/IEC “R03” type dry-cell • Video cord (1) batteries. If anything is missing, contact your dealer immediately. CAUTION: Follow these precautions to avoid leaking or cracking cells: • Place batteries in the remote control so they match the polarity: (+) to (+) and (–) to (–). • Use the correct type of batteries. Batteries that look similar may differ in voltage. • Always replace both batteries at the same time. • Do not expose batteries to heat or flame. EN01-10TH-A30[A].pm6 5 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Connecting the FM and AM Antennas
If AM reception is poor, connect single vinyl-covered wire (not supplied). 123AM loop antenna (supplied) If FM reception is poor, connect outdoor FM antenna (not supplied). Snap the tabs on the loop into FM antenna (supplied) the slots of the base to assemble the AM loop antenna. COMPONENT OUT PR PB Y MIN MIN4 MIN MIN Center unit Cooling fan (See “About the cooling fan” below.) FM antenna connection AM antenna connection Connect the supplied FM antenna to the FM 75 Ω COAXIAL Connect the supplied AM loop antenna to the AM and H terminals. terminal as temporary measure. Turn the loop until you have the best reception. Extend the supplied FM antenna horizontally. • If reception is poor, connect an outdoor single vinyl-covered wire • If reception is poor, connect an outdoor antenna. Before attaching to the AM terminal. (Keep the AM loop antenna connected.) a 75 Ω coaxial cable (with a standard type connector), disconnect the supplied FM antenna. Note: If the AM loop antenna wire is covered with vinyl, remove the vinyl by twisting it as shown in the diagram. About the cooling fan A cooling fan is mounted on the rear panel of the center unit to For safety, observe the following carefully. prevent abnormal temperature inside the center unit, thus assuring • Make sure there is good ventilation around the center unit. Poor normal operation of the unit. The cooling fan automatically starts ventilation could overheat and damage the center unit. rotating to supply external cool air to the inside of the center unit • DO NOT block the cooling fan and the ventilation openings or when the internal temperature goes up. holes. (If they are blocked by a newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.) • DO NOT touch the speaker cords to the cooling fan. EN01-10TH-A30[A].pm6 6 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Getting Started Speaker Layout Diagram Center unit STANDBY
AUDIO/FM MODE STANDBY/ONDIGITALDSP VOLUME SOURCESURROUNDDVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-A30DIGITALRight front Subwoofer
speakerLeft front
speakerCenter speaker Left rear Right rear
speaker speaker COMPONENT OUT PR PB Y MIN MIN 4 MIN MINTo right rear To center speaker To left front speaker
speakerTo left rear To subwoofer To right front speaker
speaker EN01-10TH-A30[A].pm6 7 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Connecting the Speakers When setting the speakers
To obtain the best possible sound from this system, you need to Connect the satellite speakers and subwoofer to the terminals on the place all the speakers except the subwoofer at the same distance rear panel using speaker cords supplied. from the listening position with each front faced toward the listener. Labels are attached to the speaker cords to indicate the terminals to Since bass sound is non-directional, you can place a subwoofer be connected. wherever you like. Normally place it in front of you. • Connect the red cord to the red (+) terminal, and the black cord to Left front Center speaker Right front speaker speaker the black (–) terminal respectively. CAUTION: Subwoofer Use speakers with the SPEAKER IMPEDANCE indicated by the speaker terminals.Connecting speaker cords to the terminals
123Left rear Right rear speaker speaker If your speakers cannot be placed at the same distance from the listening position You can adjust the delay time of the center speaker and rear speakers. For in-depth information about adjusting the delay time, see “Setting the Delay Time” on page 18 and 19. 1 Press and hold the terminal clamp. Note: 2 Insert the speaker cord. You can change the phase of subwoofer sounds by connecting the speaker cords to the terminals inversely—the red cord to the black 3 Release the finger from the clamp. terminal, and the black cord to the red terminal. You may get the more effective bass sounds by changing the phase. Notes: • If the speaker cord is covered with vinyl, remove the CAUTION: vinyl by twisting it as shown in the diagram. • Make sure the core wire of speaker cords do not expose • When attaching the satellite speakers on the wall, have them to out of the terminals.This could cause short-circuit. attached to the wall by a qualified person. DO NOT attach the satellite speakers on the wall by yourself to avoid an unexpected damage of their falling from the wall, caused by incorrect attachment or weakness in the wall. • Care is required in selecting a location for attaching speakers to the wall. Injury to personnel, or damage to equipment, may result if the speakers are attached in a location which interferes with daily activities. EN01-10TH-A30[A].pm6 8 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Getting Started Connecting Audio/Video Component
Turn the power off to all components before connections. Audio component connection Connect another component to the center unit with the Illustrations of the input/output terminals below are typical audio cords. examples. Use the cords supplied with another component or purchase When you connect another component, refer also to its them at an electric appliance store. manuals since the terminal name actually printed on the rear vary among the components. Audio cord (not supplied) If you connect a sound-enhancing device such as a graphic equalizer between the source component and the center unit, the sound output through this system may be distorted. DBS Tuner Center unit COMPONENT OUT PR PB Y MD RecorderMIN
Cassette DeckAUDIO LEFT RIGHT VCR OUT TV
EN01-10TH-A30[A].pm6 9 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,TV connection
The S-video cord and the component video cord are not supplied with this system. Use the cords supplied with another components or purchase them at an electric appliance store.A Composite video cord (supplied) C Component video cord (not supplied)
Red BlueB
S-video cord (not supplied) Green You can select one of three connection types— A , B , and C . Illustrations below are typical examples. • If your TV has S-video (Y/C-separation) and/or component video When you connect the TV, refer also to its manual since the (Y, PR, PB) jacks, connect them using an S-video cord (not terminal names actually printed on the rear vary among the supplied) B and/or component video cord (not supplied) C . components. By using these jacks, you can get a better picture quality—in the order : Component video > S-video > Composite video. • If your TV supports the progressive video input, you can enjoy a high quality picture by making the progressive scanning mode active (see page 17.)A B Center unit TV
CONPONENT OUT PR PB Y MIN MIN MIN MIN CONPONENT OUT PR PB Y Green YC
Red Green Blue PB/CB PR/CR Blue RedNow, you can plug the power cord of the center unit into the AC outlet.
Note: Keep the power cord away from the connecting cords and the antenna cables. The power cord may cause noise or screen interference. EN01-10TH-A30[A].pm6 10 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Basic DVD Operations
This manual mainly explains operations using the buttons on 2 Select the Source the remote control. You can also use the buttons on the center DVD unit if they have the similar names (or marks) as those on the Press DVD. remote control. The source changes to DVD. If operations using the center unit are different from those using the remote control, they are then explained. 1 3 Load a DVDSTANDBY/ON AUDIO STANDBY/ON AUDIO On the front panel ONLY: Press 0 to open the disc tray, then place a DVD correctly TV TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE 6 PROGRESSIVE with its label side up. DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL TV/VIDEO AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME 2 DVD VCR DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL 8 TUNER PRESET7 DOWN UP 4 3/8 CORRECT INCORRECT REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH ENTER 4 Start Playback TUNER PRESET 5 VOLUME – 5 VOLUME + Press 3/8. VOLUME The disc tray closes. “LOADING” appears for TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING MUTING a while. • You can also start playback by closing theSOUND
123disc tray using 0 on the front panel.SETTING
456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST07DSP MODE 5 Adjust the VolumeANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM To increase the volume, press and hold VOLUME +. CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP To decrease the volume, press and hold VOLUME –.VOLUME
• Before playing the disc, select the color system to match the your TV. See “Changing the Color System” on page 17. CAUTION: • For in-depth information about DVD operations, see Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any source. If pages 27 to 36. the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound energy can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin your speakers. 1 Turn On the Power Notes: Before turning on the system, turn on your TV and select the correct • By pressing VOLUME + or – repeatedly, you can adjust the volume video input. (See the manual supplied with your TV.) level step by step. • When you use a JVC’s TV, you can turn on your TV by pressing • The volume level can be adjusted within 51 steps—“MIN (minimum),” TV on the remote control, and select the video input by 01 to 49, and “MAX (maximum).” pressing TV/VIDEO. (If your TV is not a JVC’s, see “Operating Other Manufacturers’ TV” on page 55.) To turn off the sounds temporarily • For changing the OSD messages—the information on the TV screen—into the desired language, see “Setting the Initial From the remote control ONLY: Languages” on pages 49 and 50. Press MUTING. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON To restore the sound, press STANDBY/ON on the front panel). AUDIO MUTING again. The STANDBY lamp goes off and the illumination • Pressing VOLUME + or – also restores the sound. lamp on the center unit lights up. The source indication selected previously appears on the display. EN11-19TH-A30[A].pm6 11 02.8.19, 1:18 PM, ns 6 Select an Appropriate Progressive Mode To activate DSP modes Press DSP MODE (or DSP on the front panel). DSP MODE You can select the progressive mode according to the picture type The DSP indicator lights up and the current DSP mode (film or video source). appears on the display for a while. • Each time you press the button, DSP mode changes Press PROGRESSIVE repeatedly until the PROGRESSIVE as follows: progressive mode you want appears. • Each time you press the button, the progressive THEATER HALL LIVE CLUB mode changes as follows: Normal VIDEO MODE FILM MODE indication DANCE CLUB (canceled) AUTO MODE — For in-depth information about DSP modes, see “Creating Realistic Sound Fields” on pages 21, 25, and 26. Notes: • This mode is available only when progressive scanning mode is selected. Note: • For in-depth information about each progressive mode, see page 16. Before activating surround or DSP mode, adjust the speaker setting to bring out the best performance from this system. 7 For in-depth information about adjusting the speaker setting, see Activate Surround or DSP Mode “Speaker Settings” on pages 18 and 19. You can enjoy two kinds of surround—Digital Multichannel Surround (Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround) and DSP modes. 8 Stop Playback Digital Multichannel Surround—Dolby Digital Press 7 twice. TUNER PRESET and DTS Digital Surround Playback stops completely and “DVD” appears on the display. (The DVD player goes on Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround takes effect only when you working for 3 minutes after playback stops.) enjoy a disc encoded with its signals—the DOLBY DIGITAL or • This system can memorize the end point even DTS indicator lights up on the display. when you press 7 once. When you start playback again by pressing 3/8, playback begins from where it has been stopped— Sound signal Resume play. indicators on the display To remove the loaded disc Press 0. “OPEN” appears on the display and the disc tray comes out. To activate Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround To close the disc tray, press 0 again. When a disc encoded with the Dolby Digital or DTS Digital • If you do not press the button, the disc tray closes Surround is loaded, the system detects it and starts playing the disc automatically after 3 minutes. automatically with Multichannel Surround activated. – For in-depth information about surround modes, see “Creating Realistic Sound Fields” on pages 20 and 23 . To turn off the power (into standby) STANDBY/ON Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (orAUDIO
DSP modes—THEATER, HALL, LIVE CLUB, STANDBY/ON on the front panel). DANCE CLUB The illumination lamp goes off and the STANDBY lamp lights up. DSP modes take effect only when you enjoy a disc recorded using • If you press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON Linear PCM—the LINEAR PCM indicator lights up on the display. on the front panel) while the disc tray is kept open, the disc tray closes automatically, then the system is turned off. • A small amount of power is consumed even in standby mode. To Sound signal turn the power off completely, unplug the AC power cord. indicators on the display EN11-19TH-A30[A].pm6 12 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Basic VCD/CD Operations
2 Select the Source 1 STANDBY/ON AUDIO STANDBY/ON DVD AUDIO Press DVD. TV TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL TV/VIDEO 3 Load a VCD/CD AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME 2 VCR DVD DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL On the front panel ONLY: 7 Press 0 to open the disc tray, then place a disc correctly7 TUNER PRESETDOWN UP 4 3/8 with its label side up. REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCHENTER
CORRECT INCORRECT 5 VOLUME – 5 VOLUME +VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING MUTING • When using a CD single (8 cm), place it on the inner circle of the SOUND disc tray. 123SETTING • Continued use of irregular shape CDs (heart-shape, octagonal, 456PRO LOGIC etc.) can damage the center unit. 789SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE 6 DSP MODE REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM 4 Start Playback CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP Press 3/8. TUNER PRESET The disc tray closes. “LOADING” appears for a while. • You can also start playback by closing the • Before playing the disc, select the color system to disc tray using 0 on the front panel. match the your TV. See “Changing the Color System” on page 17. • SVCD can be operated by using the VCD operation procedure. • For in-depth information about VCD/CD operations, see pages 27, 28, and 37 to 42. 1 Turn On the Power Before turning on the system, turn on your TV if necessary and select the correct video input. (See the manual supplied with your TV.) • When you use a JVC’s TV, you can turn on your TV by pressing TV on the remote control, and select the video input by pressing TV/VIDEO. (If your TV is not a JVC’s, see “Operating Other Manufacturers’ TV” on page 55.) • For changing the OSD messages—the information on the TV screen—into the desired language, see “Setting the Initial Languages” on pages 49 and 50. Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON STANDBY/ON on the front panel). AUDIO The STANDBY lamp goes off and the illumination lamp on the center unit lights up. The source indication selected previously appears on the display. EN11-19TH-A30[A].pm6 13 02.8.19, 1:18 PM, 5 Note: Adjust the Volume Before activating DSP mode, adjust the speaker setting to bring out the best performance from this system. To increase the volume, press and hold VOLUME +. For in-depth information about adjusting the speaker setting, see To decrease the volume, press and hold VOLUME –. “Speaker Settings” on pages 18 and 19. VOLUME 7 Stop Playback CAUTION: Press 7 twice. TUNER PRESET Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any source. If Playback stops completely and “VCD” or “CD” the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound energy appears on the display. (The DVD player goes can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin your speakers. on working for 3 minutes after playback stops.) • This system can memorize the end point even when you press 7 Notes: once. When you start playback again by pressing 3/8, playback begins from where it has been stopped—Resume play. • By pressing VOLUME + or – repeatedly, you can adjust the volume level step by step. • The volume level can be adjusted within 51 steps—“MIN (minimum),” To remove the loaded disc 01 to 49, and “MAX (maximum).” Press 0. “OPEN” appears on the display and the disc tray comes out. To turn off the sounds temporarily To close the disc tray, press 0 again. From the remote control ONLY: • If you do not press the button, the disc tray closes Press MUTING. automatically after 3 minutes.TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING To restore the sound, press MUTING again. To turn off the power (into standby) • Pressing VOLUME + or – also restores the sound. Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON STANDBY/ON on the front panel). AUDIO 6 The illumination lamp goes off and the STANDBYActivate DSP Mode lamp lights up. You can enjoy DSP modes. • If you press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) while the disc tray is kept open, the disc tray DSP modes—THEATER, HALL, LIVE CLUB, closes automatically, then the system is turned off. DANCE CLUB • A small amount of power is consumed even in standby mode. To turn the power off completely, unplug the AC power cord. DSP modes take effect only when you enjoy a disc recorded using Linear PCM—the LINEAR PCM indicator lights up on the display. Sound signal indicators on the display To activate DSP modes Press DSP MODE (or DSP on the front panel). DSP MODE The DSP indicator lights up and the current DSP mode appears on the display for a while. • Each time you press the button, DSP mode changes as follows: THEATER HALL LIVE CLUB Normal indication DANCE CLUB (canceled) — For in-depth information about DSP modes, see “Creating Realistic Sound Fields” on pages 21, 25, and 26. EN11-19TH-A30[A].pm6 14 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Basic Tuner Operations
1 3 Adjust the VolumeSTANDBY/ON AUDIO STANDBY/ON To increase the volume, press and hold VOLUME +.AUDIO
To decrease the volume, press and hold VOLUME –. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVEVOLUME
DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME 2 FM/AM VCR CAUTION:DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any source. If TUNER PRESET DOWN UP the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound energy44can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin your speakers.TUNING – REW FFVCR CHANNEL TUNING +TUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH Notes: • By pressing VOLUME + or – repeatedly, you can adjust the volume level step by step.ENTER
• The volume level can be adjusted within 51 steps—“MIN (minimum),” 3 3 01 to 49, and “MAX (maximum).”VOLUME – VOLUME + • You can turn off the sounds temporarily by pressing MUTING.VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING MUTING 4 Tune in to a Station From the remote control: Press and hold TUNING + • For in-depth information about tuner operations, see VCR CHANNELor – until the station TUNING “Tuner Operations” on pages 47 and 48. frequency starts changing B.SEARCH F.SEARCH continuously on the display. The system starts searching for a station. On the front panel: 1 Turn On the Power 1) Press 7 so that “MANUAL” appears on the display. 2) Press and hold ¢ or 4 until the station frequency starts Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or changing continuously on the display. STANDBY/ON on the front panel). STANDBY/ON The system starts searching for a station.AUDIO
The STANDBY lamp goes off and the illumination lamp lights up on the center unit. Notes: The source indication selected previously appears • When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the system on the display. stops searching, and the indicator lights up on the display. • When an FM stereo program is received, the indicator also 2 lights up. Select the Band • When you press the button repeatedly, the frequency changes step by step. From the remote control: Press FM/AM. To turn off the power (into standby) FM/AM The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. Press STANDBY/ON AUDIO (or STANDBY/ON • Each time you press the button, the band alternates STANDBY/ON on the front panel) again. AUDIO between FM and AM. The illumination lamp goes off and the STANDBY lamp lights up. On the front panel: • A small amount of power is consumed even in Press SOURCE repeatedly until the desired band (FM or AM) standby mode. To turn the power off completely, unplug the AC appears on the display. SOURCE power cord. The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. • Each time you press the button, the source changes as follows:DVD player* AUX IN AM FM
* “WAIT” appears on the display. EN11-19TH-A30[A].pm6 15 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Other Basic Operations
• When Dolby Surround activates, the PRO LOGIC indicator TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE PROGRESSIVE lights up on the display. DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL – For in-depth information about Pro Logic modes, see “Creating AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME Realistic Sound Fields” on pages 20 and 24.VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL AUX TUNER PRESET Selecting an Appropriate Progressive Mode DOWN UP REW FF You can select an appropriate progressive mode according to the VCR CHANNEL TUNING picture type (film or video source). B.SEARCH F.SEARCH From the remote control ONLY: Press PROGRESSIVE repeatedly during playback PROGRESSIVEENTER
until the progressive mode you want appears. • Each time you press the button, the progressive mode changes as follows:VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING VIDEO MODE FILM MODESOUND
123AUTO MODESETTING
456PRO LOGIC VIDEO MODE : Suitable for playing back a video source disc.PRO LOGIC789FILM MODE : Suitable for playing back a film or progressive SLOW SETUP TEST 0 source disc. ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE AUTO MODE : Normally select this. Used to play a disc REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM containing both video and film source CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP SLEEP materials. This system recognizes the picture type (film or video source) of the current chapter.Enjoying Sounds from the External • If the playback picture is unclear or noisy, or the oblique lines of Component the picture are rough, try to change to other modes.
You can enjoy sounds from the external component connected to the Notes: AUX IN jacks on the rear panel of the center unit. • This mode is available only when progressive scanning mode is selected (see page 17). 1 • For VCD/SVCD playback, VIDEO MODE is selected automatically Select AUX as the source. and cannot be changed. From the remote control: Press AUX. AUX Turning Off the Power with the Timer Source changes to the external component connected to the AUX IN jacks. You can fall asleep while listening to music—Sleep Timer. On the front panel: From the remote control ONLY: Press SOURCE repeatedly until “AUX IN” Press SLEEP.SOURCE SLEEP appears on the display. • Each time you press the button, the shut-off time • Each time you press the button, the source changes as follows: changes as follows:DVD player* AUX IN 10 20 30 60 AM FM OFF 150 120 90
(Canceled) * “WAIT” appears on the display. When the shut-off time comes, the system turns off automatically. 2 Start playback on the external component. • For in-depth information about the external equipment, see the manual supplied for it. To check or change the time remaining until the shut-off time When you listen to analog sounds encoded with Dolby Press SLEEP once. Surround, you can enjoy Dolby Surround. SLEEPThe remaining time (in minutes) appears on the display. To activate Dolby Surround, go to step 3. • By pressing SLEEP, you can change the shut-off time. 3 Press PRO LOGIC to activate Dolby PRO LOGICSurround. To cancel the Sleep Timer
• Each time you press the button, Dolby Surround Press SLEEP repeatedly until “OFF” appears on the mode changes as follows: SLEEPdisplay.PRO LOGIC 3 STEREO • Turning off the power also cancels the Sleep Timer. STEREO
(canceled) 16 EN11-19TH-A30[A].pm6 16 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,TV Settings Changing the Color System Notes
• Progressive scanning mode is available only when color system of NTSC is selected. This system is compatible with the PAL and NTSC systems. Select • Some progressive TVs and High-Definition TVs are not fully the color sytem to match the color system of your TV. Make sure compatible with this system, resulting in the unnatural picture when that the color system of a DVD, Video CD, or SVCD disc labeled on playing back a DVD in the progressive scanning mode. the package matches your TV. In such a case, change the scanning mode to “I–SCAN MODE.” • You can change the color system only when the unit is on To check the compatibility of your TV, contact your local JVC standby. customer service center. • All JVC progressive TVs and High-Definition TVs are fully compatible with this system. On the front panel ONLY: 1 Press and hold ¢ for a while. • During holding the button, the color system To select an appropriate progressive mode for playback pictures, see alternates between “NTSC” and “PAL.” “Selecting an Appropriate Progressive Mode” on page 16. 2 Release ¢ to select the color system you want. About scanning system The conventional scanning method to display video signals on the TV screen is called “Interlaced scanning.” With this method,Changing the Scanning Mode only half of the horizontal lines (called a “field”) are displayed at
a time. So two fields complete a single picture (frame); i.e., the This system supports the progressive scanning system (525p*) as first field, containing all the odd-numbered lines, is followed by well as the conventional interlaced scanning system (525i*). the second field, containing all the even-numbered lines. If your TV equipped with component video jacks supports the On the other hand, the Progressive scanning system scans all progressive video input, you can enjoy a high quality picture by horizontal lines at a time, so you can double the number of activating the progressive scanning mode. scanning lines displayed at a time, resulting in a flicker-free, • Refer also to the instruction manuals supplied with your TV. high-density picture. • If your TV equipped with component video jacks does not support To enjoy the progressive scanned picture, a monitor (or TV or the progressive video input, do not change the scanning mode to projector) connected to the system must support the progressive the progressive scanning mode (P–SCAN MODE.) video inputs. Depending on the material source format, DVD video can be * 525p and 525i indicate the number of scanning lines and scanning classified into two types; film source and video source (note that format of a video signal. some DVD video contain both film source and video source). • 525p indicates 525 scanning lines with progressive format. Film sources are recorded as 24-frame-per-second data, while • 525i indicates 525 scanning lines with interlaced format. (NTSC) video sources are recorded as 30-frame-per-second (60- field-per-second interlaced). From the remote control ONLY: When this system plays back a film source data, uninterlaced progressive output signals are created using the original data. 1 Press DVD. When a video source is played back, the unit interleaves linesDVD between the interlaced lines to create the pseudo uninterlaced You can change the scanning mode only when DVD is selected as the source and playback stops. picture and outputs as the progressive signals. If a disc is no loaded, go to step 3. 2 Press TUNER PRESET7. Playback stops. 3 Press and hold PROGRESSIVE for a PROGRESSIVE while. • Each time you press and hold the button, the scanning mode alternates between “I–SCAN MODE” and “P–SCAN MODE”. I (Interlace)–SCAN MODE : Select this if your TV equipped with component video jacks does not support the progressive video input (conventional TV). P (Progressive)–SCAN MODE : Select this if your TV equipped with component video jacks supports the progressive video input. EN11-19TH-A30[A].pm6 17 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Speaker Settings Setting the Delay Time
Adjust the delay time of the sounds from the center speaker and the STANDBY/ON AUDIO rear speakers, comparing to that of the sounds from the front speakers. If the distance to the center speaker* and/or the rear TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE speakers** from your listening point is almost the same as from the DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL front speakers, select “00 MS (msec).” * You can adjust the delay time only when the DOLBY DIGITAL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME or DTS indicator is lit on the display.VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL ** You can adjust the delay time only when the DOLBY DIGITAL, DTS, or PRO LOGIC indicator is lit on the display. TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF VCR CHANNEL TUNING For Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround: B.SEARCH F.SEARCH Before you start, remember... 2 3 There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is ENTER canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again. 1 Select and play a DVD encoded with Dolby VOLUME Digital or DTS Digital Surround. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGSOUND
123SETTING 2 Press SETTING repeatedly until one of SETTINGSETTING
456delay time indications (with the current PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC789setting*) appears on the display. SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP • Each time you press the button, the indication in the main display changes as follows:C–DLY R–DLY Normal indication
(canceled) C–DLY (Center delay) : To register delay time for center speaker—from 0 msec to 5 msec R–DLY (Rear delay) : To register delay time for rear speakers—from 0 msec to 15 msec * The initial setting for the center speaker is “00 MS.” The initial setting for the rear speakers is “00 MS.” If you have already changed the setting, a different value will be shown. 3 Press 3 or 2 to adjust delay time. • 3 : Increases delay time. • 2 : Decreases delay time. ENTER • 1 msec increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to 30 cm increase (or decrease) in distance. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other delay time. EN11-19TH-A30[A].pm6 18 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Speaker Settings
For Dolby Pro Logic: Left front Center speaker Right front Before you start, remember... speaker speaker There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is Subwoofer canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again. 1 Press AUX to select the external AUX 3.0 m component as the source. 2.7 m 2.4m2Start playing a source encoded with Dolby 2.1 mSurround.
3 Press PRO LOGIC repeatedly on the PRO LOGIC remote control to select Dolby Pro Left rear Right rearspeaker speakerLogic.
4 Press SETTING repeatedly until one of SETTING delay time indications (with the current 1 msec increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to setting*) appears on the display. 30 cm increase (or decrease) in distance. Ex. : In this case, set C–DLY to “01 MS” and R–DLY to “03 MS” • Each time you press the button, the indication in the main display changes as follows: R–DLY Normal indication(canceled) R–DLY (Rear delay) : To register delay time for rear speakers—from 15 msec to 30 msec. * The initial setting for the rear speakers is “15 MS.” If you have already changed the setting, a different value will be shown. 5 Press 3 or 2 to adjust delay time. • 3 : Increases delay time. • 2 : Decreases delay time. ENTER • 1 msec increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to 30 cm increase (or decrease) in distance. EN11-19TH-A30[A].pm6 19 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Creating Realistic Sound Fields
You can use the following surround to reproduce a realistic sound Dolby Pro Logic and Dolby 3 Stereo field. Dolby Surround encoding format records the left front channel, • Digital Multichannel Surround—Dolby Digital and DTS Digital right front channel, center channel, and rear channel signals (total 4 Surround channels) into 2 channels. • Dolby Surround The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built in this system decodes these 2 • DSP (Digital Signal Processor) modes channel signals into original 4 channel signals—matrix-based multichannel reproduction, and allows you to enjoy a realistic stereo sound in your listening room. Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround To enjoy surround effectively, all the speakers need to be When one of Dolby Surround is selected, the PRO LOGIC indicator connected and activated. lights up on the display. Dolby Digital* Used to reproduce multichannel sound tracks of the software Indications on the display for each surround encoded with Dolby Digital ( ). • Dolby Digital Dolby Digital encoding method (so-called discrete 5.1 channel digital audio format) records and digitally compresses the left front channel, right front channel, center channel, left rear channel, right rear channel, and LFE channel signals (total 6 channels, but LFE channel is counted as 0.1 channel. Therefore, called 5.1 channel). Since each channel is completely independent from the other • DTS Digital Surround channel signals to avoid interference, you can obtain much better sound quality with much stereo and surround effects. In addition, Dolby Digital enables stereo rear sounds, and sets the cutoff frequency of the rear treble at 20 kHz, compared to 7 kHz for Dolby Pro Logic. These facts enhance the sound movement and being-there feelings much more than Dolby Pro Logic. • Dolby Pro Logic When the system detects Dolby Digital signals, the DOLBY DIGITAL indicator lights up on the display. DTS Digital Surround** • Dolby 3 Stereo Used to reproduce multichannel sound tracks of the software encoded with DTS Digital Surround ( ). DTS Digital Surround is another discrete 5.1 channel digital audio format available on CD, LD, and DVD software. Compared to Dolby Digital, audio compression rate is relatively low. • DSP* This fact allows DTS Digital Surround format to add breadth and depth to the reproduced sounds. As a result, DTS Digital Surround features natural, solid and clear sound. When the system detects DTS Digital Surround signals, the DTS indicator lights up on the display. * When you select FM/AM or AUX as the source, the Linear PCM indicator ( ) does not light up. — According to the speaker settings, some audio channel indicators do not light up. In this case, set the speaker setting appropriately. Dolby Surround* Used to reproduce sound tracks of the VCR tapes encoded with Dolby Surround ( DOLBY SURROUND ). This is only used for the sound sources coming through the AUX IN jacks. * Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro **Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Logic,” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992–1997 Dolby pending. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of Laboratories. All rights reserved. Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ©1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. EN20-26TH-A30[A].pm6 20 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Creating Realistic Sound Fields
DSP (Digital Signal Processor) Modes To check the speaker connections and settings using the test DSP modes have been designed to create important acoustic tone surround elements. 1. Select and play a DVD encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS The sound heard in a theater, a hall, a live club, or a dance club Digital Surround. consists of direct sound and indirect sound—early reflections and 2. Press TEST on the remote control. TEST reflections from behind. Direct sounds reach the listener directly The test tone comes out from the speakers (except without any reflection. On the other hand, indirect sounds are the subwoofer) in the order. delayed by the distances of the ceiling and walls. • If there is a speaker from which no sounds comes out, check These indirect sounds are important elements of the acoustic the speaker’s connection (see pages 7 and 8). surround effects. 3. Press TEST again to stop the test tone. The following DSP modes are provided with this unit. THEATER : Gives the feeling of a theater. HALL : Gives clear vocal and the feeling of a concert hall. LIVE CLUB : Gives the feeling of a live music club with a low ceiling. DANCE CLUB : Gives a throbbing bass beat. These DSP modes can be used to add the acoustic surround effects while reproducing stereo analog software or Linear PCM digital software, and can give you a real “being there” feeling. When one of the DSP modes is selected, the DSP indicator lights up on the display. Available surround according to the input signal format : Possible : Impossible Pro Logic* DSP (canceled) Surround Multichannel Surround Pro Logic 3 Stereo THEATER HALL LIVE CLUB DANCE CLUB STEREO Analog Linear PCM Dolby Digital Multichannel Dolby Surround DTS Digital Surround * You can use Pro Logic mode for all 2 channel sources, but surround effect does not work sufficiently except Dolby Surround encoded source. EN20-26TH-A30[A].pm6 21 02.8.19, 1:18 PM Input Signal format, 3 To adjust the output balance for the front REW FF speakers VCR CHANNEL TUNING 1) Press SOUND repeatedly until the SOUND B.SEARCH F.SEARCH adjustment indication for the front23speakers appears on the display. ENTER • Each time you press the button, the adjustment indication on the display changes as follows: 00 F 00 00 R 00 CENVOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING Normal indication SW REAR SOUND SOUND (canceled) 123SETTING
456PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the789SLOW SETUP TEST output balance. DSP MODE 3 : Decreases the left speakerANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE output, or restores the right ENTER REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM speaker output. CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP 2 : Decreases the right speaker output, or restores the left speaker output. • The output balance changes from OFF (silence), –06 (most reduction) to 00 (no reduction). • “00 F 00” is the initial setting (the output balance is at theAdjusting Stereo Sound center position). If you have already changed the setting,
another value will appear. You can adjust the following settings. It is recommended that you make adjustments from your actual 4 To adjust the output level for the subwoofer listening point while listening to reproduced sounds. 1) Press SOUND repeatedly to select SOUND – Output balance for the front speakers “SW.” – Output level for the subwoofer • Each time you press the button, the adjustment Once you adjust these items, the adjustments take effect for all the indication on the display changes as follows: surround modes. 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN Before you start, remember... Normal indication • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is SW REAR(canceled) canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again. 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the 1 Select and play any source except Dolby Digital output level. or DTS Digital Surround. 3 : Increases the output level. 2 : Decreases the output level. 2 Cancel Dolby Surround or DSP modes if they are • The output level changes from ENTER activated. –6 to +6. For deactivating Dolby Surround: • “SW 0dB” is the initial setting. If PRO LOGIC Press PRO LOGIC on the remote control until you have already changed the “STEREO” appears on the display. settings, another value will appear. For deactivating DSP modes: DSP MODE Press DSP MODE (or DSP on the front panel) until the DSP indicator goes off from the display. Now, you are ready to start adjustments. • To adjust the output balance for the front speakers, go to the next step. • To adjust the output level for the subwoofer, go to step 4. EN20-26TH-A30[A].pm6 22 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Creating Realistic Sound Fields
• Each time you press the button, the adjustment indicationVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL AUX on the display changes as follows: TUNER PRESET 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN DOWN UP REW FF VCR CHANNEL Normal indication TUNING SW REAR (canceled) B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 00 F (Front) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the front23ENTER speakers. 00 R (Rear) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the rear speakers.VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING • “00 F 00” and “00 R 00” are the initial setting (the output balances are at the center position). If you have already SOUND SOUND changed the setting, another value will appear. 123SETTING
456PRO LOGIC 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust thePRO LOGIC789output balance. SLOW SETUP TEST D.R.C ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE DSP MODE 3 : Decreases the left speaker output, or restores the right ENTER REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM speaker output. CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP 2 : Decreases the right speaker output, or restores the left speaker output. • Each output balance changes fromAdjusting Dolby Digital and OFF (silence), –06 (most reduction) to 00 (no reduction). DTS Digital Surround
3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the other speaker. You can adjust the following settings while activating Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround. 3 To adjust the output levels for the center speaker, It is recommended that you make adjustments from your actual the rear speakers, and the subwoofer listening point while listening to reproduced sounds. 1) Press SOUND repeatedly to select the – Output balance for the front speakers “CEN,” “REAR,” or “SW.” SOUND – Output balance for the rear speakers • Each time you press the button, the adjustment – Output level for the center speaker* indication on the display changes as follows: – Output level for the rear speakers* – Output level for the subwoofer* 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN * The adjustment is separately memorized for Digital Multichannel Surround (Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround), and for Normal indication SW REAR (canceled) Dolby Pro Logic. Before you start, remember... CEN (Center) : To adjust the output level for center • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is speaker (from –6 dB to +6 dB). canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again. REAR : To adjust the output level for rear speakers (from –6 dB to +6 dB). 1 Select and play a DVD encoded with Dolby SW (Subwoofer) : To adjust the output level for subwooferDigital or DTS Digital Surround. (from –6 dB to +6 dB).
Now, you are ready to start adjustments. • “CEN 0dB,” “REAR 0dB,” and “SW 0dB” are the initial • To adjust the output balance for the front speakers and the rear settings. If you have already changed the settings, another speakers, go to the next step. value will appear. • To adjust the output level for the center speaker, the rear speakers, and the subwoofer, go to step 3. 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the output level. 2 3 : Increases the output level.To adjust the output balance for the front ENTER2 : Decreases the output level. speakers and the rear speakers 1) Press SOUND repeatedly until one of SOUND 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the following adjustment indications the other speakers. appears on the display. EN20-26TH-A30[A].pm6 23 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Activating Dynamic Range Compression 4 To adjust the output balance for the front
speakers and the rear speakers You can enjoy a powerful sound even at a low volume level by 1) Press SOUND repeatedly until one of SOUND compressing the dynamic range (difference between the maximum the following adjustment indications and minimum sounds). appears on the display. • This function takes effect only when Dolby Digital is activated. • Each time you press the button, the adjustment indication From the remote control ONLY: on the display changes as follows: Press D.R.C. D.R.C 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN • Each time you press the button, the dynamic range compression mode alternates between on and off. Normal indication SW REAR Select “DRC ON” while watching the DVD at night. (You can (canceled) obtain a powerful sound at a low volume.) 00 F (Front) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the front speakers. 00 R (Rear) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the rearAdjusting Dolby Surround speakers.
You can adjust the following settings while activating Dolby • When selecting “3 STEREO,” you cannot adjust the output Surround. balance for the rear speakers. It is recommended that you make adjustments from your actual • “00 F 00” and “00 R 00” are the initial settings (the output listening point while listening to reproduced sounds. balances are at the center position). If you have already – Output balance for the front speakers changed the setting, another value will appear. – Output balance for the rear speakers – Output level for the center speaker* 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the – Output level for the rear speakers* output balance. – Output level for the subwoofer* 3 : Decreases the left speaker • When Dolby 3 Stereo is activated, you cannot adjust the rear output, or restores the right ENTER speakers. speaker output. * The adjustment is separately memorized for Digital Multichannel 2 : Decreases the right speaker Surround (Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround), and for output, or restores the left Dolby Pro Logic. speaker output. • Dolby Surround cannot be used with DSP modes. Once one of • Each output balance changes from Dolby Surround is activated, DSP modes in use will be canceled. OFF (silence), –06 (most reduction) to 00 (no reduction). Before you start, remember... • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the other speakers. canceled before you finish, start from step 3 again. 1 Press AUX to select the external AUX component as the source. 2 Start playing a source encoded with DolbySurround.
3 Press PRO LOGIC repeatedly on the PRO LOGIC remote control to select Dolby ProLogic or Dolby 3 Stereo.
The PRO LOGIC indicator lights up on the display. • Each time you press the button, the indication changes as follows: PRO LOGIC 3 STEREOSTEREO
(canceled) Now, you are ready to start adjustments. • To adjust the output balance for the front speakers and the rear speakers, go to the next step. • To adjust the output level for the center speaker, the rear speakers, and the subwoofer, go to step 5 on the next page. TO BE CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE EN20-26TH-A30[A].pm6 24 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Creating Realistic Sound Fields Adjusting DSP Modes
REW FF VCR CHANNEL You can adjust the following settings while activating DSP modes.TUNING
It is recommended that you make adjustments from your actual B.SEARCH F.SEARCH listening point while listening to reproduced sounds. 2 3 – Output balance for the front speakers ENTER – Output balance for the rear speakers – Output level for the rear speakers* – Output level for the subwoofer*VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING * The adjustment is separately memorized for DSP modes. • DSP modes cannot be used with Dolby Surround. Once one of SOUND SOUND123DSP modes is activated, Dolby Surround in use will be canceled. SETTING • When you play back a DVD encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS456PRO LOGIC Digital Surround, DSP MODE button (or DSP button on the center789SLOW SETUP TEST unit) does not work. 0 DSP MODE ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE Before you start, remember... REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM • There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again. 1 Select and play any source except Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround. 5 To adjust the output level for the center speaker, 2 Press DSP MODE (or DSP on the front DSP MODE the rear speakers, and the subwoofer panel) repeatedly to select the desired 1) Press SOUND repeatedly to select the SOUND DSP mode. “CEN,” “REAR,” or “SW.” The DSP indicator lights up on the display while the DSP modes • Each time you press the button, the adjustment are activated. indication on the display changes as follows: • Each time you press the button, DSP mode changes as follows: THEATER HALL LIVE CLUB 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN Normal Normal indication indication DANCE CLUBSW REAR (canceled) (canceled) Now, you are ready to start the adjustment. • To adjust the output balance for the front speakers and the rear CEN (Center) : To adjust the output level for center speakers, go to the next step. speaker (from –6 dB to +6 dB). • To adjust the output level for the rear speakers and the subwoofer, REAR : To adjust the output level for rear go to step 4 on the next page. speakers (from –6 dB to +6 dB). SW (Subwoofer) : To adjust the output level for subwoofer (from –6 dB to +6 dB). • When selecting “3 STEREO,” you cannot adjust the output levels for the rear speakers. • “CEN 0dB,” “REAR 0dB,” and “SW 0dB” are the initial settings. If you have already changed the settings, another value will appear. 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the output level. 3 : Increases the output level. ENTER 2 : Decreases the output level. 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the other speakers. EN20-26TH-A30[A].pm6 25 02.8.19, 1:18 PM, 3 To adjust the output balance for the front 4 To adjust the output level for the rear speakers speakers and the rear speakers and the subwoofer 1) Press SOUND repeatedly until one of 1) Press SOUND repeatedly to select the SOUNDSOUND the following adjustment indications “REAR” or “SW.” appears on the display. • Each time you press the button, the adjustment • Each time you press the button, the adjustment indication indication on the display changes as follows: on the display changes as follows: 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN 00 F 00 00 R 00 CEN Normal indication SW REAR Normal indication (canceled)SW REAR (canceled) 00 F (Front) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the front REAR : To adjust the output level for rear speakers. speakers (from –6 dB to +6 dB). 00 R (Rear) 00 : To adjust the output balance for the rear SW (Subwoofer) : To adjust the output level for subwoofer speakers. (from –6 dB to +6 dB). • “00 F 00” and “00 R 00” are the initial setting (the output • “REAR 0dB” and “SW 0dB” are the initial settings. If balances are at the center position). If you have already you have already changed the settings, another value will changed the setting, another value will appear. appear. 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the 2) Press 3 or 2 to adjust the output balance. output level. 3 : Decreases the left speaker output, or restores the right 3 : Increases the output level.ENTER speaker output. 2 : Decreases the output level.ENTER
2 : Decreases the right speaker output, or restores the left speaker output. 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting • Each output balance changes from the other speaker. OFF (silence), –06 (most reduction) to 00 (no reduction). 3) Repeat 1) and 2) for setting the other speaker. EN20-26TH-A30[A].pm6 26 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Disc Introduction—DVD/VCD/CD
This system has been designed to play back the following discs: DVD, IMPORTANT: Video CD, Super Video CD (SVCD), Audio CD, CD-R, and CD-RW. Before performing any operations, make sure of the following... • This system can also play back MP3 files recorded on CD-Rs and • Check the connection with the TV. CD-RWs. For in-depth information about what MP3, see “MP3 • Turn on the TV and select the correct input on the TV to view the Introduction” on page 43. pictures or on-screen indications on the TV screen. • For DVD playback, you can change the Setup menu setting to Discs you can play: your preference. (See pages 49 to 53.) Disc Mark Video Region Code Type (Logo) Format Number* If “ ” appears on the TV screen when pressing a button, the disc cannot accept an operation you have tried to do, or DVD 4 information required for that operation is not recorded in the disc. Video ALL NOTICE : In some cases, without showing “ ,” operations will not be accepted. Video NTSC Disc structure—DVD, Video CD (VCD/SVCD) and Audio CD (CD)CD PAL A DVD disc consists of Titles, and each title may be divided into some Chapters. (See Example 1.) For example, if a DVD disc contains some movies, each movie may Super have its own title number, and it may be further divided into some Video chapters. CD On the other hand, a VCD/SVCD or CD consists of Tracks. (See Example 2.) In general, each song has its own track number. (On some discs, Audio COMPACT each track may also be divided by Indexes.) CD DIGITAL AUDIO When playing back a VCD/SVCD with Playback Control (PBC) function, you can select what to view using the menu shown on the CD-R TV screen. (While operating a Video CD using the menu, some of the functions such as Repeat and Track Search may not work.) CD-RW Example 1: DVD disc • On some DVD or VCD/SVCD discs, their actual operations may be different from what is explained in this manual. This is due to the disc programming and disc structure, but not a malfunction of this system. • DVD-R discs recorded with the DVD VIDEO format can be played back. However, some discs may not be played back because of the disc characteristics or recording conditions. Example 2 : Video CD/Audio CD Note that unfinalized disc cannot be played back. • The following discs cannot be played back: – DVD-Audio, DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, CD-ROM, CD-I, (CD-I Ready), Photo CD, etc. Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the speakers. * Note on Region Code DVD players and DVD Video discs have their own Region Code Notes on CD-R and CD-RW numbers. This system can play back DVD discs recorded with the User-edited CD-Rs (Recordable) and CD-RWs (Rewritable) can be color system of NTSC and PAL whose Region Code numbers played back only if they are already “finalized.” include “4.” • The system can play back CD-Rs or CD-RWs recorded on a Examples: personal computer if they have been recorded in the audio CD format or recorded in MP3 format (see page 43). However, they may not be played back depending on their characteristics or recording conditions. • Before playing back CD-Rs or CD-RWs, read their instructions or If a DVD with the inadequate Region Code numbers is loaded, cautions carefully. “REGION ERR” appears on the display and playback cannot start. • Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this unit because of their disc characteristics, damage or stain on them, or if the built-in lens is dirty. • CD-RWs may require a longer readout time. This is caused by the fact that the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than for regular CDs. EN27-36TH-A30[A].pm6 27 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Basic Disc Operations To stop playback for a moment TUNER PRESET
Press 3/8. STANDBY/ON While pausing, the elapsed playing time flashes AUDIO on the display. • To resume play, press 3/8 again. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL To go to another chapter or track AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME Press ¢ or 4 repeatedly during playback. VCR • ¢ : Skips to the beginning of the next or succeeding chapter or DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL track. TUNER PRESET 4 ¢ • 4 : While a DVD, a VCD with PBC or MP3 is played backDOWN UP Goes back to the beginning of the previous chapter or track. REW FF 7 VCR CHANNEL TUNING 3/8 While a CD or a VCD without PBC is played back B.SEARCH F.SEARCH Goes back to the beginning of the current or previous track. ENTER To go to another title (only possible on a DVD) or track (only possible on a CD and VCD) SVCD can be operated by using the VCD operation directly using the number buttons procedure. Pressing the number buttons before or during play allows you to start playing the title/track number you want. (If your TV is turned on, the on-screen bar is pulled down automatically on the TV screen.)To start playback • To select number 1 to 9, press the corresponding number button
TUNER PRESET Press 3/8. (then press ENTER or wait for 5 seconds). The source is automatically changed to the • To select number 15, press 1, 5. DVD player. • To select number 23, press 2, 3. “WAIT” appears on the display for a while, then the detected disc type appears—DVD, VCD, CD, or MP3. (If To stop during playback your TV is turned on, the mark corresponding to the detected disc Press 7. TUNER PRESET type appears on the TV screen.) (If your TV is turned on, “ STOP” appears • When a disc is not loaded, “NO DISC” appears on the display. on the TV screen.) • When an MP3 disc is played back, playback Disc play starts from the first chapter or track of the selected disc. stops completely. • If a menu appears while playing a DVD or VCD with PBC • This system can memorize the end point even when you press 7. function, see “Disc Menu-Driven Playback” (for DVD) on page 31 When you start playback again by pressing 3/8, playback begins or “Disc Menu-Driven Playback (Only for VCD)” on page 38. from where it has been stopped—Resume play. • To stop completely, press 7 twice. (“7 STOP” appears on the TV Note: screen.) The disc type appears on the display. If “WRONG PARENTAL LEVEL” appears on the TV screen, Parental The DVD player goes on working for 3 minutes after playback Lock is in use. You cannot play back a DVD containing violent scenes stops. or those not suitable for your family members. To play back such a disc, cancel the Parental Lock. (See page 52.) To remove the disc Press 0 on the front panel.Playback information on the display The disc tray comes out.
To close the disc tray, press 0 again. DVD • If you do not press the button, the disc tray closes automatically 3 minutes after. Title No. Chapter No. Elapsed playing time VCD/CD Track No. Elapsed playing time MP3 Track No. Elapsed playing time EN27-36TH-A30[A].pm6 28 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,DVD Playback Showing the On-Screen Bar
You can show the following information on the TV screen while a STANDBY/ON disc is loaded.AUDIO
TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE From the remote control ONLY: DISPLAY DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL Press DISPLAY. DISPLAY AUDIO/ SUBTITLE • Each time you press the button, the following on-FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME AUDIO/ screen bar appears in sequence. FM MODE VCR DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP1234REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH56789ENTER On-screen bar goes off. VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING SOUND 1 : Disc type123SETTING DVD VCD SVCD CD MP3456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST 2 : Current title and total number of the titles on the ANGLE ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE disc REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM • Ex.: 1st title is playing out of 3 titles recorded. CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP 3 : Current chapter and total number of the chapters in the current title • Ex.: 1st chapter is playing out of 5 chapters recorded. 4 : Elapsed playing time or remaining time You can change the play time indication by pressing REMAIN. See page 31 for more details. Some DVDs contain several audio languages, subtitles, and multi- angle views. 5 : Subtitle language indication When you find the following marks on the DVD or its package, you • Ex.: When no subtitle is recorded on the disc. can select these elements recorded on the DVD. See page 30 for more details. 6 : Audio language indication • Ex.: Original sound (default) is selected out of 3 audio Subtitles are recorded on the disc. The number languages recorded. See page 30 for more details. 3 inside the mark indicates the total number of the recorded subtitles. 7 : Signal format indicator • Signal format type—Linear PCM (stereo), Dolby Digital, Several audio languages are recorded on the disc. 3 and DTS Digital Surround—will be indicated.The number inside the mark indicates the total Ex.: When the disc is encoded with Dolby Digital. number of the recorded audio languages. Multi-angle views are recorded on the disc. The 8 : Repeat mode indicator 3 number inside the mark indicates the total number • Ex.: When repeat mode is turned off. of the recorded multi-angle views. See page 33 for more details. 9 : Multi-angle view indicator If you cannot find out whether your disc contains these features • Ex.: When only a single angle-view is recorded on the listed above, you can check it by showing the on-screen bar. disc. See page 30 for more details. For basic disc operations such as inserting a disc, starting playback, and moving to another chapters, see “Basic DVD Operations” on pages 11, 12, and “Basic Disc Operations” on page 28. EN27-36TH-A30[A].pm6 29 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Selecting the Subtitles Selecting the Multi-Angle Views
While playing back a DVD containing subtitles in different While playing back a DVD containing multi-angle views, you can languages, you can select the subtitle to be displayed on the TV view the same scene at different angles. screen. • When you play back the DVD containing multi-angle views, • You can set your favorite subtitle language as the initial language appears on the TV screen. shown on the screen. (See page 49.) From the remote control ONLY: From the remote control ONLY: Press ANGLE. ANGLESUBTITLE Press SUBTITLE. • Each time you press the button, the view angle changes. The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen for a while. • Each time you press the button, the subtitle language changes as follows: ANGLE 1 ANGLE 2 OFF /3 DEF 1/3 1/1 OFF /3 ENG 1/3 ANGLE 3 SPA 3/3 FRE 2/3 Ex.: When the disc has 3 selections—English, French, Spanish and no subtitle (OFF) Ex.: When the disc has 3 multi-angle views Note: When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Multi angle view indication also changes as follows:Selecting the Audio Languages 1/3 2/3
While playing back a DVD containing audio languages (sound track), you can select the language (sound track) to listen to. 3/3 • You can set your favorite audio language as the initial audio language. (See page 49.) Press AUDIO/FM MODE. AUDIO/FM MODE The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen for a while. • Each time you press the button, the audio language changes as follows: ENG 1/3 ENG 1/3 1/1 ENG 1/3 FRE 2/3 SPA 3/3 Ex.: When the disc has 3 selections—English, French, and Spanish EN27-36TH-A30[A].pm6 30 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,DVD Playback Disc Menu-Driven Playback
STANDBY/ON Disc menu-driven playback is possible while playing back a DVD AUDIO with menu (menu may be still pictures or moving pictures depending on the disc). TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE • When operating a disc using the disc menu, refer also to the DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL instructions supplied for the disc. AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME DVD discs generally have their own menus or title lists. A menuVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL usually contains various information about the disc and playback selections. On the other hand, a title list usually contains titles of TUNER PRESET DOWN UP movies and songs recorded. REW FF 1 VCR CHANNELTUNING ¡ From the remote control ONLY: B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 3/2/5/∞ 1 Press MENU or TOP ENTER MENU. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING ENTER A menu or title list will appear on the screen. “MENU” appears on the display. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING VOLUME • On some DVDs, a menu will TOP MENU TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING MENU automatically appear on the screen after playback starts. Number SOUND123buttons SETTING456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST 2 Select a desired item on the ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE menu or on the title list, using REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM 3/2/5/∞ and ENTER. CLEAR CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP REMAIN The unit starts playback of the selected ENTER item. SEARCH • On some discs, you can also select items by pressing the number buttons corresponding to the item numbers listed.Checking the Remaining Time
While playing back a DVD, you can check the remaining time to be played back. From the remote control ONLY: Press REMAIN. REMAIN The on-screen bar and the current play time indication appear on the TV screen for a while. • Each time you press the button, the following indication appears on the screen: REMAIN TIME:TITLE CHAPTER TIME TITLE TIME REMAIN TIME:CHAPTER REMAIN TIME:TITLE : Select this to show the remaining time of the current title. CHAPTER TIME : Select this to show the elapsed playing time of the current chapter. REMAIN TIME:CHAPTER : Select this to show the remaining time of the current chapter. TITLE TIME : Select this to show the elapsed playing time of the current title. EN27-36TH-A30[A].pm6 31 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Moving to a Particular Portion Directly Searching for a Particular Point
You can move to another title, chapter, or particular scene in the You can search for a particular point while playing a disc—Variable chapter directly. Speed Forward/Reverse Search. • No sound comes out during Variable Speed Forward/Reverse From the remote control ONLY: Search. 1 Press SEARCH during playback or pause. SEARCH To fast-forward the chapter—Variable Speed • Each time you press the button, the following indication appears on the screen: Forward Search From the remote control ONLY: TITLE – – CHAPTER – – – Press ¡ during playback or pause. • Each time you press the button, the search speed F.SEARCH Canceled TIME – – : – – : – – changes as follows: TITLE – – : Select this to move to another title. x2 x4 CHAPTER – – – : Select this to move to another chapter. TIME – – : – – : – – : Select this to move to a particular scene. PLAY (Normal play) x8 2 Press the number buttons to123To reverse the chapter—Variable Speed Reverse select a desired title, chapter, Search456or playing time. From the remote control ONLY: The unit starts playback of the selected789Press 1 during playback or pause. item. (The on-screen bar appears fora0• Each time you press the button, the search speed B.SEARCHwhile.) changes as follows: x2 x4 PLAY (Back play) x8 How to input the title and chapter number Press the number buttons corresponding to the number, then wait To resume normal play TUNER PRESET for about 5 seconds or press ENTER to start playback. Press 3/8. • To select number 5, press 5, then ENTER. • To select number 12, press 1, 2, then ENTER. • To select number 22, press 2, 2, then ENTER. How to input the playing time Press the number buttons to input the playing time, then wait for about 5 seconds or press ENTER to start playback at the selected elapsed playing time. • To input time “00:45:23,” press 4, 5, 2, 3. • To input time “01:23:45,” press 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. • To cancel a mis-entry, press CLEAR. Each time you press the button, the last entry will be erased. Note: When you want to move to another title directly, you can move to it by simply pressing the corresponding number buttons (without pressing SEARCH in step 1). EN27-36TH-A30[A].pm6 32 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,DVD Playback
7 A–B Repeat STANDBY/ON While playing, you can also select a portion you want to repeat. AUDIO • A–B repeat is not performed between different titles. • An interval of more than 5 seconds is required between point A TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE and point B. DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME Example:VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET 7 DOWN UP 3/8 REPEAT:A– REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH23REPEAT:A–BENTER ENTER
From the remote control ONLY: VOLUME 1 Press A–B REPEAT to select the start A-B REPEAT TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING point. “RPT A–” appears on the display and “REPEAT:A–”SOUND
123appears on the TV screen.SETTING
456PRO LOGIC 2 Press A–B REPEAT again to select the A-B REPEAT789SLOW SETUP TEST 0 end point. ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE “RPT A–” changes to “RPT A–B” and REPEAT REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM PROGRAM “REPEAT:A–” changes to “REPEAT:A–B,” CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP A-B REPEAT then A–B repeat begins. The unit automatically locates point A and starts repeated playback between points A and B.To cancel A–B Repeat Repeating Playback Press A–B REPEAT again. A-B REPEAT
“RPT OFF” appears on the display and “REPEAT OFF” Repeat play cannot be used in the following cases: appears on the TV screen. • When you enjoy program play 7 Repeat Play Note: From the remote control ONLY: When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Repeat mode Press REPEAT repeatedly. REPEAT indication also changes as follows: The indication corresponding to the selected mode appears on your TV. • Each time you press the button, Repeat mode changes as follows: REPEAT:CHAPTER REPEAT:TITLE On some DVDs, A–B Repeat may not be used even within the same title. This is due to their disc structures, and not a REPEAT OFF malfunction of the unit. REPEAT:CHAPTER : Current chapter will be repeated. REPEAT:TITLE : Current title will be repeated. REPEAT OFF : Repeat play is canceled. (Normal play is resumed.) Note: When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Repeat mode indication also changes as follows: REPEAT:CHAPTER REPEAT:TITLE REPEAT OFF EN27-36TH-A30[A].pm6 33 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,Programming the Playing Order of the Chapters—Program Play 5 Press 3 or 2 to select a chapter number, then ENTER. You can arrange the chapter playback order before you start playing. • 3 : Increases the number. You can program up to 20 steps. • 2 : Decreases the number.
• Before making a program, make sure that the TV is turned on • You can also select a chapter number using the number buttons. and the correct input is selected on the TV. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTERFrom the remote control ONLY: TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPT
1 Load a disc. 1286– – – – 2 – – – – 7 – – – – • If the current playing source is not the DVD player, press 3 – – – – 8 – – – – 4 – – – – 9 – – – – 3/8, then 7 before going to the next step. 5 – – – – 10 – – – – PREVIOUS NEXT 2 Press PROGRAM. PROGRAM PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMThe PROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV
screen. • To select all chapters in the selected title as one program • “PROGRAM” appears on the display. step, simply press ENTER without selecting any number. “ALL” appears on the chapter number position. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER 6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 to program other chapters TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPT you want. 1 – – – – 6 – – – – 2 – – – – 7 – – – – • After 10 steps are programed, “NEXT «” is selected 3 – – – – 8 – – – – (highlighted). If you want to program more steps, press 4 – – – – 9 – – – – 5 – – – – 10 – – – – ENTER. PREVIOUS NEXT PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAM 7 Press / . TUNER PRESET3 8The chapters are played in the order you
3 Press ENTER. have programed and the PROGRAM indicator lights up. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER After all the chapters you programed are played back, the TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPT ENTER PROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV screen again. 1 – – – – 6 – – – – 2 – – – – 7 – – – – 3 – – – – 8 – – – – 4 – – – – 9 – – – – TUNER PRESET 5 – – – – 10 – – – – To stop during playback CHOOSE : 1–5 PREVIOUS NEXT Press 7.The PROGRAM MENU screen appears on
PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAM the TV screen.Title numbers you can select in the next step • If you press 3/8 while this screen is shown, the unit starts
program play. 4 Press 3 or 2 to select a title number, then ENTER. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER • 3 : Increases the number. TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPTENTER
• 2 : Decreases the number. 1286222157212• You can also select a title number3117819using the number buttons. 4369– – – – 54210 – – – – PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER PREVIOUS NEXT TITLE CHAPT TITLE CHAPT PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAM 1 – 2 – – 6 – – – – 2 – – – – 7 – – – – 3 – – – – 8 – – – – 4 – – – – 9 – – – – 5 – – – – 10 – – – – CHOOSE : 1–9 PREVIOUS NEXT PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMChapter numbers you can select in the
next stepTO BE CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
EN27-36TH-A30[A].pm6 34 02.8.19, 1:18 PM,DVD Playback To erase the stored program
Press 0 to eject the disc. STANDBY/ON • If you turn off the system or change the source, the AUDIO program is also erased. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE STEP DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL To check the program contents AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME You can check the program contents by pressing PROGRAM. VCR The PROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV screen. DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP 3/8To modify the program
REW FF VCR CHANNEL TUNING You can modify the program while the PROGRAM MENU screen is B.SEARCH F.SEARCH shown on the TV screen. 3/2/5/∞ ENTER • To erase a step: Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an unwanted ENTER program step, then press CLEAR. • To modify a step: Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) a program step you want to modify, then perform steps 3 to 5 on page 34. VOLUME (Before entering a new number, press CLEAR repeatedly until TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING “– –” appears on the number entry position.) SOUND • To add a step: Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an empty123program step, then perform steps 3 to 5 on page 34.SETTING
456PRO LOGIC789SLOW • To move to program step 10 from program step 11, press 5SLOW SETUP TEST ZOOM when program step 11 is selected (highlighted) so thatANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE “PREVIOUS »” is selected (highlighted). Then, press ENTER. REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM PROGRAM • To move to program step 11 from program step 10, press ∞ CLEAR CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP when program step 10 is selected (highlighted) so that “NEXT « ” is selected (highlighted). Then, press ENTER.To exit from program play
From the remote control ONLY: Press PROGRAM.PROGRAM
The PROGRAM MENU screen goes off, and the opening screen appears. (The program you made is still kept in memory.) • If you press 3/8 while this screen is shown, the unit starts normal playback. DVD/Video CD/CD PLAYER EN27-36TH-A30[A].pm6 35 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,DVD Special Effect Playback 7 Zoom
You can zoom in on the picture while playing back a DVD. 7 Still Picture/Frame-by-Frame Playback From the remote control ONLY: You can advance the still picture frame by frame while playing a DVD. 1 Press ZOOM to zoom in. ZOOM • Each time you press the button, the picture is From the remote control ONLY: enlarged as follows: 1 Press STEP once during playback. STEP A still picture appears on the TV screen. 248PAUSE2x Zoom 4x Zoom Canceled 2 Press 3/2/5/∞ to move the enlarged portion you want to watch. 2 Press STEP repeatedly to advance the STEP ENTER picture frame by frame. • Each time you press the button, the picture advances ENTER frame by frame. 2383838383838ENTER To cancel the ZOOM To resume normal play ZOOMTUNER PRESET Press ZOOM repeatedly until the normal size picture is Press 3/8. resumed. 7 Slow Motion Playback You can enjoy slow motion playback while playing a DVD. From the remote control ONLY: Press SLOW repeatedly during playback or pause. SLOW • Each time you press the button, slow motion speed changes as follows: SLOW 1 /2 SLOW 1 /4 PLAY (Normal play) EN27-36TH-A30[A].pm6 36 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,VCD/CD Playback
1234* 5 6 STANDBY/ON AUDIO 1/35 00:12 TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE DISPLAY DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL On-screen bar goes off. 7** AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME * Appears only when a VCD is loaded.VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL 3/8 ** Appears only when a VCD is played back. TUNER PRESET 4 DOWN UP ¢ 1 : Disc type REW FF DVD VCD SVCD CD MP3 VCR CHANNEL 1 TUNING ¡ B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 2 : Current track and total number of the tracks on the discENTER
ENTER • Ex.: 1st track is playing out of 35 tracks recorded. 3 : Sound mode • Ex.: Stereo sound (Left channel and Right channel).VOLUME
MENU TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING RETURN 4 : Play Back Control (PBC) indicator • Ex.: PBC is on. (When PBC is turned off, will Number SOUND appear.) 123buttons SETTING 5 : Repeat mode indicator456PRO LOGIC • Ex.: When repeat mode is turned off. See page 39 for more789details. SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE 6 : Elapsed playing time or remaining time REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM You can change the play time indication by pressing CLEAR REMAIN. See below.CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP REMAIN 7 : Sound indication SEARCH • Indicates sound input level. (Appears only during playback VCD.) • SVCD can be operated by using the VCD operation Checking the Remaining Time procedure. • For basic disc operations such as inserting a disc, starting While playing back a VCD or CD, you can check the remaining playback, and moving to another tracks, see “Basic VCD/ time. CD Operations” on pages 13, 14, and “Basic Disc Operations” on page 28. From the remote control ONLY: Press REMAIN. REMAINShowing the On-Screen Bar The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen for a while.
• Each time you press the button, the play time indication changes as follows: You can show the following information on the TV screen while a disc is loaded. REMAIN TIME:TRACK DISC TIME From the remote control ONLY: TRACK TIME REMAIN TIME:DISC Press DISPLAY. DISPLAY • Each time you press the button, the following on-screen REMAIN TIME:TRACK bar appears in sequence. : Select this to show the remaining time of the current track. DISC TIME : Select this to show the total elapsed playing time of the disc. REMAIN TIME:DISC : Select this to show the total remaining time of the disc. TRACK TIME : Select this to show the elapsed playing time of the current track. EN37-42TH-A30[A].pm6 37 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,Disc Menu–Driven Playback (Only for VCD) Moving to a Particular Portion Directly
The Play Back Control function (PBC) allows you to operate the You can move to a particular portion (scene) on the track directly. VCD using menus. • PBC function is canceled when you use this function. When you start playing a VCD with PBC function, a menu will automatically appear on the TV screen. (“MENU” will also appear From the remote control ONLY: on the display.) 1 Press SEARCH during playback or pause. • A menu may be a list of items, divided screens, or some moving • Each time you press the button, the following indication pictures. (See “PBC operation concept” below.) appears on the TV screen. When a menu appears, you can select a desired item on the menu. • When a list of items is displayed on the TV screen, press the TIME – – : – – TRACK TIME – – : – – number buttons to select an item. • When “3” or “SELECT” is displayed on the TV screen, press Canceled 3/8 to start playback. TIME – – : – – : Select this to move to a particular portion on the current disc. To go to the next submenu UP TRACK TIME – – : – – Press ¢. FF : Select this to move to a particular portion on the current track. To return to the previous submenuDOWN
123Press 4. 2 Press number buttons to select REW a playing time you want to456To cancel the PBC playback search for. You can cancel the menu-driven operations (PBC function): The unit starts playback at the selected7891Press 7 to stop playback. elapsed playing time. (The on-screen02Press the number buttons to select a track. bar appears for a while.) Normal playback starts from the selected track. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING • You can also turn on and off the PBC function by pressing MENU • To input time “45:23,” press 4, 5, 2, 3. on the remote control. Each time • To input time “09:45,” press 9, 4, 5, then wait for about 5 you press the button, the PBC function turns on and off. seconds (or press ENTER). • To cancel a misentry, press CLEAR. Each time you press the button, the last entry will be erased. PBC operation conceptSearching for a Particular Point
You can search for a particular point while playing a disc—Variable Speed Forward/Reverse Search. • No sound comes out during Variable Speed Forward/Reverse Search on a VCD. To fast-forward the tracks—Variable Speed Forward Search Press ¡ during playback or pause. • Each time you press the button, the search speed changes as follows: F.SEARCH Note: While operating a VCD using menu, some of the functions such as x2 x4 repeat play may not work. PLAY (Normal play) x8 To reverse the tracks—Variable Speed Reverse Search Press 1 during playback or pause. • Each time you press the button, the search speed changes as follows: B.SEARCH x2 x4 PLAY (Normal play) x8 EN37-42TH-A30[A].pm6 38 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,VCD/CD Playback
Note: When the on-screen bar is shown on the screen, Repeat mode indication also changes as follows: STANDBY/ONAUDIO
TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE REPEAT:ONE REPEAT:DISC DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME REPEAT OFFVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET 7 A–B Repeat 7 DOWN UP 3/8 While playing, you can also select a portion you want to repeat. REW FF VCR CHANNEL • An interval of more than 5 seconds is required between point ATUNING
and point B. B.SEARCH F.SEARCH23ENTER Example:ENTER
VOLUME REPEAT:A– TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGSOUND
123REPEAT:A–BSETTING
456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE From the remote control ONLY: REPEAT PROGRAMREPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM 1 Press A–B REPEAT to select the start A-B REPEAT CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP A–B REPEAT point. “RPT A–” appears on the display and “REPEAT:A–” appears on the TV screen. 2 Press A–B REPEAT again to select the A-B REPEAT end point.Repeating Playback “RPT A–” changes to “RPT A–B” and
“REPEAT:A–” changes to “REPEAT:A–B,” Repeat play cannot be used in the following cases: then A–B repeat begins. • When you play back a VCD using the PBC function The unit automatically locates point A and starts repeated • When you enjoy program play playback between points A and B. 7 Repeat Play To cancel A–B Repeat From the remote control ONLY: Press A–B REPEAT again. A-B REPEATREPEAT Press REPEAT repeatedly. “RPT OFF” appears on the display and “REPEAT OFF” The indication corresponding to the selected mode appears appears on the TV screen. on your TV. • Each time you press the button, repeat mode changes as follows: Note: REPEAT:ONE REPEAT:DISC When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Repeat mode indication also changes as follows: REPEAT OFF REPEAT:ONE : Current track will be repeated. REPEAT:DISC : All the tracks will be repeated. REPEAT OFF : Repeat play is canceled. (Normal play is resumed.) EN37-42TH-A30[A].pm6 39 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,Programming the Playing Order of the 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to program other tracks Tracks—Program Play you want.
• After 10 steps are programed, “NEXT «” is selectedYou can arrange the track playback order before you start playing. (highlighted). If you want to program more steps, press You can program up to 20 steps. ENTER.
• Before making a program, make sure that the TV is turned on TUNER PRESET and the correct input is selected on the TV. 6 Press 3/8.The tracks are played in the order you have From the remote control ONLY: programed and the PROGRAM indicator
1 Load a disc. lights up. • If the current playing source is not the DVD player, press 3/8, then 7 before going to the next step. After all the tracks you programed are played back, thePROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV screen again.
2 Press PROGRAM. PROGRAMThe PROGRAM MENU screen appears on the TV To stop during play
screen. TUNER PRESET • “PROGRAM” appears on the display. Press 7.The PROGRAM MENU screen appears on
PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER the TV screen. TRACK TRACK • If you press 3/8 while this screen is 1 – – 6 – – shown, the system starts program play. 2 – – 7 – – 3 – – 8 – – PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER 4 – – 9 – – 5 – – 10 – – TRACK TRACK1761PREVIOUS NEXT267– – 398– – 4139– – 51110 – – PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAM PREVIOUS NEXT 3 Press ENTER. PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMTo exit from program play
PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER From the remote control ONLY: TRACK TRACK Press PROGRAM. PROGRAMENTER 1 – – 6 – – The PROGRAM MENU screen goes off, and the 2 – – 7 – – 3 – – 8 – – opening screen appears. (The program you made is 4 – – 9 – – still kept in memory.) 5 – – 10 – – CHOOSE : 1–17 • If you press 3/8 while this screen is shown, the unit starts normal PREVIOUS NEXT playback. PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMTrack numbers you can select in the
next step DVD/Video CD/CD PLAYER 4 Press 3 or 2 to select a track number, then ENTER. • 3 : Increases the number. • 2 : Decreases the number. • You can also select a track number ENTER To erase the stored program using the number buttons. Press 0 to eject the disc. • If you turn off the system or change the source, the program is also erased. PROGRAM MENU SELECT: ENTER TRACK TRACK176– – To check the program contents 2 – – 7 – – 3 – – 8 – – You can check the program contents by pressing PROGRAM 4 – – 9 – – PROGRAM. The PROGRAM MENU screen appears on 5 – – 10 – – the TV screen. PREVIOUS NEXT PLAY: 3 FINISH: PROGRAMTO BE CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
EN37-42TH-A30[A].pm6 40 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,VCD/CD Playback Selecting Playback Channel
STANDBY/ON When you play back a karaoke VCD or CD, you can only selectAUDIO
either the left channel or right channel to listen to. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE Press AUDIO/FM MODE repeatedly. AUDIO/ AUDIO/ DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL STEP FM MODEThe on-screen bar appears on the screen for a while. FM MODE AUDIO/FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME • Each time you press the button, the sound mode changes as VCR follows: DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET / AUDIO:LEFT AUDIO:RIGHTDOWN UP38REW FF AUDIO:STEREO VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 3/2/5/∞ ENTER 1/35 00:12ENTER VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGSOUND
123SETTING AUDIO:STEREO (LR) : Select this to listen to both456PRO LOGIC channel sounds. 789SLOW AUDIO:LEFT (L) : Select this to listen to the leftSLOW SETUP TEST 0 channel sounds. ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE ZOOM AUDIO:RIGHT (R) : Select this to listen to the right REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM channel sounds. CLEAR CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP REMEMBER that after playing back a karaoke VCD or CD using “AUDIO:LEFT” or “AUDIO:RIGHT,” select “AUDIO:STEREO” to restore normal stereo playback.To modify the program
You can modify the program while the PROGRAM MENU screen is shown on the TV screen. • To erase a step: press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an unwanted program step, then press CLEAR. • To modify a step: press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an program step you want to modify, then perform steps 3 and 4. (Before entering a new number, press CLEAR repeatedly until “– –” appears on number entry position.) • To add a step: press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) an empty program step, then perform steps 3 and 4. • To move to program step 10 from program step 11, press 5 when program step 11 is selected (highlighted) so that “PREVIOUS » ” is selected (highlighted). Then, press ENTER. • To move to program step 11 from program step 10, press ∞ when program step 10 is selected (highlighted) so that “NEXT « ” is selected (highlighted). Then, press ENTER. EN37-42TH-A30[A].pm6 41 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,VCD Special Effect Playback 7 Zoom
You can zoom in on the picture while playing a VCD. 7 Still Picture/Frame-by-Frame Playback From the remote control ONLY: You can advance the still picture frame by frame while playing a VCD. 1 Press ZOOM to zoom in. ZOOM • Each time you press the button, the picture is From the remote control ONLY: enlarged as follows: 1 Press STEP once during playback. STEP A still picture appears on the TV screen. 8PAUSE2x Zoom Canceled 2 Press 3/2/5/∞ to move the enlarged portion you want to 2 watch. ENTERPress STEP repeatedly to advance the STEP picture frame by frame. • Each time you press the button, the picture advances ENTER frame by frame. 2383838383838ENTER To cancel the ZOOM To resume normal play TUNER PRESET Press ZOOM again. ZOOM Press 3/8. The normal size picture is resumed. 7 Slow Motion Playback You can enjoy slow motion playback while playing a VCD. From the remote control ONLY: Press SLOW repeatedly during playback or pause. SLOW • Each time you press the button, slow motion speed changes as follows: SLOW 1 /2 SLOW 1 /4 SLOW 1 /8 PLAY (Normal play) SLOW 1 /16 EN37-42TH-A30[A].pm6 42 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,MP3 Introduction
This system is incorporated with an MP3 decoder. You can play back MP3 tracks (files) recorded on CD-Rs and CD-RWs. • Notice that “files” and “tracks” are used interchangeably. STANDBY/ONAUDIO What is MP3?
TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE MP3 is an abbreviation of Motion Picture Experts Group (or MPEG) Audio Layer 3. MP3 is simply a file format with a data compression DISPLAY DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL ratio of 1:10 (128 Kbps*). That means, by using MP3 format, one AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME CD-R or CD-RW can contain 10 times as much data volume as aVCR
regular CD can. DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL * Bit rate is the average number of bits that one second of audio data 4 TUNER PRESET ¢ will consume. The measuring unit used is Kbps (1000 bits per DOWN UP second). REW FF 7 VCR CHANNEL To get a better audio quality, choose a higher bit rate. The most TUNING 3/8 popular bit rate for encoding (recording) is 128 Kbps. B.SEARCH F.SEARCHMP3 File Compatibility ENTER ENTER
• This system can only read MP3 files that are recorded in the format that is compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1 or Level 2. • The system can read or play MP3 files only with the extension VOLUME code—“.mp3”. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING • ID3* tags cannot be shown on the display. * An MP3 file can contain file information called “ID3 Tag” where SOUND123its album name, performer, track title, etc. are recorded. There are SETTING two versions—ID3v1 (ID3 Tag version 1) and ID3v2 (ID3 Tag456PRO LOGIC version 2). 789SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODEDisc structure—How are MP3 files recorded
and played back? REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP “MP3 files (tracks)” can be recorded in “directories (or folders),” in PC terminology. During recording, the files and directories can be arranged in a way similar to arranging files and folder/directories of computer data. “Root” is similar to the root of a tree. Every file and directory can be linked to the root. In compliance with ISO 9660, the maximum allowable depth of For in-depth information about a disc to be played back, see nested directories—so-called “hierarchy”—is eight (inclusive of the “Disc Introduction—DVD/VCD/CD” on page 27. root). Playback order, files search order, and directory search order of the MP3 files recorded on a disc are determined by the writing (or encoding) application; therefore, playback order may be different from the one you have intended while recording the folders/ directories and the files. Note on MP3 discs MP3 discs (either CD-R or CD-RW) require a longer readout time. (It differs due to the complexity of the directory/file configuration.) EN43-46TH-A30[A].pm6 43 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,MP3 Playback Starting Playback The on-screen bar
12345It is recommended to turn on your TV when playing back an MP3 disc. 1/35 128 00:22/03:48 1 Press 0 to load a disc. 1 : Disc type DVD VCD SVCD CD MP3 2 Press 3/8. TUNER PRESET After detecting the disc, playback starts. 2 : Current track (file) and total number of the tracks • The on-screen bar and the contents on the disc recorded on the MP3 disc will be shown • Ex.: 1st track is playing out of 35 tracks recorded. on the TV if it is turned on. 3 : Bit rate • Ex.: Bit rate used for recording the loaded disc is 5/135 ? ? 128 Kbps. (See the previous page.) 4 : Repeat mode indicator • Ex.: When repeat mode is turned off. SPRING See page 46 for more details.SUMMER
FALL 5 : Elapsed playing time and the total playing time ofWINTER
LIAR.MP3 the current track LOVE.MP3 6 : Sound indication • Indicates sound input level. (Only appears during playback.) 5/135 ? ?To go to another track SPRING
Press ¢ or 4 during playback. SPRING1.MP3 SPRING2.MP3 • ¢ : Skip to the beginning of the next track. UP SPRING3.MP3 SPRING4.MP3 FF SPRING5.MP3 • 4 : Skip to the beginning of the previous track. DOWNREW
Note: If the loaded disc is not recorded in the audio CD format or MP3 format, “WRONG DISC FORMAT” appears on the TV screen. To stop playback for a moment TUNER PRESET Press 3/8. To resume play, press 3/8 again or ENTER.To stop during playback TUNER PRESET
Press 7.To remove the disc
Press 0 on the front panel. The disc tray comes out. To close the disc tray, press 0 again. EN43-46TH-A30[A].pm6 44 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,MP3 Playback Operations Using the On-Screen Display
STANDBY/ON AUDIO It is recommended to turn on your TV when playing back an MP3 disc. TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVEWhen the loaded MP3 disc is recognized, the following on-screen
DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL display appears on the TV screen. (The contents of this on-screen AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME display varies according to the disc—the way MP3 tracks wereVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX recorded on the disc.)CONTROL • Only the first 8 letters of the titles appear on the TV screen. TUNER PRESET DOWN UPFrom the remote control ONLY:
REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH ButtonTo do∞ 5 ENTER
ENTER ENTER Start playback or go into a directory. ∞ / 5 Select a track or directory.VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTINGNumber SOUND
buttons123SETTING456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODEREPEAT
REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAMSEARCH CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP
5/135 ? ? MP3 On-Screen Display OperationsSPRING SUMMER FALL WINTER
LIAR.MP3 LOVE.MP3ENTER
5 ∞ 5 and ENTERSPRING
SPRING ENTER SUMMER SPRING1.MP3 ENTER FALL SPRING2.MP3 WINTER SPRING3.MP3 LIAR.MP3 SPRING4.MP3 LOVE.MP3 To “SUMMER” SPRING5.MP3 Start playing “SPRING1.MP3” 5 ∞ 5 ∞SPRING
SPRING ENTER SUMMER SPRING1.MP3 ENTER FALL SPRING2.MP3 WINTER SPRING3.MP3 LIAR.MP3 SPRING4.MP3 LOVE.MP3 To “FALL” SPRING5.MP3 Start playing “SPRING2.MP3” 5 ∞ 5 ∞SPRING SPRING
SUMMER ENTER SPRING1.MP3 ENTER FALL SPRING2.MP3 WINTER SPRING3.MP3 LIAR.MP3 SPRING4.MP3 LOVE.MP3 Start playing SPRING5.MP3 Start playing “LIAR.MP3” “SPRING3.MP3”Note: If you press 2, the cursor moves to current playback track.
EN43-46TH-A30[A].pm6 45 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,Moving to a Particular Track Directly Repeating Playback
You can move to a particular track on the disc directly. On an MP3 disc, A–B Repeat cannot be used. You can enjoy only Repeat play. From the remote control ONLY: 1 SEARCHPress SEARCH during playback or pause. From the remote control ONLY: “TRACK – – – – ” appears on the TV screen. To repeat playback—Repeat Play Press REPEAT repeatedly. 2 REPEATPress the number buttons to123The indication corresponding to the selected mode appears select a track number you on the TV screen. 456want. • Each time you press the button, repeat mode changes as The system starts playback from the789follows: selected track. 0 REPEAT:RANDOM REPEAT:ONE • To select number 5, press 5 (then ENTER). REPEAT OFF REPEAT:DISC REPEAT:DIR • To select number 10, press 1, 0 (then ENTER). • To select number 23, press 2, 3 (then ENTER). • To select number 123, press 1, 2, 3. REPEAT:RANDOM : All tracks recorded on the disc will be played once at Note: random (random play), and random play will be repeated. REPEAT:ONE When you want to move to another file (track) directly, you can move to it simply by pressing the number buttons (without pressing : Current track will be repeated. SEARCH in step 1). REPEAT:DIR : Tracks in the current directory will be repeated. REPEAT:DISC : All tracks on the disc will be repeated. REPEAT OFF : Repeat play is canceled. (Normal play is resumed.) Note: When the on-screen bar is shown on the TV screen, Repeat mode indication also changes as follows: REPEAT:RANDOM REPEAT:ONE REPEAT OFF REPEAT:DISC REPEAT:DIR EN43-46TH-A30[A].pm6 46 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,Tuner Operations
On the front panel: 1 Press SOURCE repeatedly until the SOURCE STANDBY/ON desired band appears on the display.AUDIO
The last received station of the selected band is tuned TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE in. • Each time you press the button, the source changes as follows: DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE AUDIO/ FM/AM DVD player* AUX INFM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUMEVCR
TUNER DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER AM FMPRESET
TUNER PRESET PRESET DOWN * “WAIT” appears on the display.DOWN UP UP TUNING – REW FF VCR CHANNEL TUNING + 2 Press 7 so that “MANUAL” appears on theTUNING
display. B.SEARCH F.SEARCH • Each time you press the button, the operation mode of ¢ and 4 buttons alternates between “PRESET” andENTER
“MANUAL.” PRESET : Select this for using ¢ and 4 as the VOLUME buttons to select the preset station. TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING MANUAL : Select this for using ¢ and 4 as the buttons to change the frequency manually.SOUND
123SETTING
456PRO LOGIC 3 Press and hold ¢ or 4 until789SLOW SETUP TEST you find the frequency you want. ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE • ¢ : Increases the frequency. REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM PROGRAM • 4 : Decreases the frequency. CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP Notes: • When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the indicator lights up on the display. • When an FM stereo program is received, the indicator also For basic tuner operations, see “Basic Tuner Operations” on page lights up. 15. • When you press the button repeatedly, the frequency changes step by step.Tuning in Stations
From the remote control: 1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select the FM/AM band. The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. • Each time you press the button, the band alternates between FM and AM. 2 Press and hold TUNING + or – until you find the frequency you want. VCR CHANNEL • TUNING + : Increases TUNING the frequency. • TUNING – : DecreasesB.SEARCH F.SEARCH the frequency. The system starts searching for stations and stops when a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in. EN47-48TH-A30[A].pm6 47 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,Using Preset Tuning To tune in a preset station
From the remote control: Once a station is assigned to a channel number, the station can be 1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select the FM/AM quickly tuned. You can preset up to 15 FM and 15 AM stations. band. The last received station of the selected band is tuned in. To store the preset stations • Each time you press the button, the band alternates From the remote control ONLY: between FM and AM. 1 Tune in the station you want to preset (see “Tuning in Stations”). 2 Press TUNER PRESET UP or DOWN until the desired preset station TUNER PRESET appears on the DOWN UP display. REW FF 2 Press PROGRAM. PROGRAM • TUNER PRESET UP : Increases the preset number. The preset number appears on the display and the • TUNER PRESET DOWN : Decreases the preset number. PROGRAM indicator lights up. On the front panel: 1 Press SOURCE repeatedly until the SOURCE desired band appears on the display. Preset number 2 Press 7 so that “PRESET” appears on the 3 Press TUNER PRESET UP or DOWN to select a display. preset number. • Each time you press the button, the operation mode ofTUNER PRESET DOWN UP ¢ and 4 buttons alternates between “PRESET” and “MANUAL.” REW FF PRESET : Select this for using ¢ and 4 as the buttons to select the preset station. • TUNER PRESET UP : Increases the preset number. MANUAL : Select this for using ¢ and 4 as the • TUNER PRESET DOWN : Decreases the preset number. buttons to change the frequency manually. 4 Press PROGRAM to store the preset 3 Press ¢ or 4 repeatedly untilPROGRAM the desired preset station appears station. on the display. The PROGRAM indicator goes off, and the station is assigned to the selected preset number. • ¢ : Increases the preset number. • 4 : Decreases the preset number. 5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 until you store all the stations you want. Selecting the FM Reception Mode When an stereo FM program tuned currently is noisy, you can To erase a stored preset station change the FM reception mode to improve the reception. Storing a new station on a used number erases the previously stored one. Press AUDIO/FM MODE. AUDIO/FM MODE The indicator goes off from the display and the program loses the stereo effect. To resume the stereo effect, press AUDIO/FM MODE again. The stereo effect resumes. Note: The FM reception mode will also resume in the following case: • When you change the frequency or the preset number EN47-48TH-A30[A].pm6 48 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,Setting up the DVD Preferences Setting the Initial Languages
STANDBY/ON You can select your favorite language you listen to or read on the TVAUDIO
screen. When you operate this system or watch a DVD, you will be able to TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE operate the system or to enjoy a DVD in the language you have DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL selected and stored. AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME On the language selection menu, you can select the following:VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET LANGUAGES SYSTEM DOWN UP REW FF OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH VCR CHANNEL TUNING AUDIO ENGLISH B.SEARCH F.SEARCH SUBTITLE ENGLISH ∞ 5 MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISHENTER ENTER
» « | \ : Move Setup : ExitVOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING RETURN OSD LANGUAGE : Select the indication language shown on the TV screen while operating the SOUND system. (ex. PLAY, STOP, PAUSE, etc.) 123SETTING AUDIO : Select the language you listen to while456PRO LOGIC watching a DVD. 789SLOW SETUP TEST SETUP 0 SUBTITLE : Select the subtitle language you read ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE while watching a DVD. REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM MENU LANGUAGE : Select the menu language recorded on a CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP DVD which you use while operating the DVD’s own menu.Languages you can select on this menu
On the Setup menu, you can do the two main important settings— You can select the following languages separately for each listed language selection (LANGUAGES) menu and system setting item on the menu. (SYSTEM) menu. • For “OSD LANGUAGE”: • Setup menu can only be displayed while a disc is not playing. English, Chinese, Spanish, French, German, Japanese, and (The DVD player must be selected as the source.) Korean. • You can only use the remote control for Setup menu operations. • For “AUDIO,” “SUBTITLE,” and “MENU LANGUAGE”: English, Chinese, French, German, Japanese, Russian, Spanish, Portuguese, Korean and Original*. * Available only for “AUDIO” and “SUBTITLE.” When you want to operate the disc or enjoy its playback in the originally recorded (default) language, select “ORIGINAL.” Note: The original language will be selected as the initial language regardless of your setting in the following cases: • If the language you have selected is not recorded on the disc. • If the disc is programed to be played back in the original language. EN49-53TH-A30[A].pm6 49 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,Basic language selecting procedure Introducing the DVD Preference (System)
Ex. : To select the desired language as the initial language for “AUDIO.” You can set the DVD preference to match it to your usage and From the remote control ONLY: operating circumstances. 1 Press SETUP. SETUP On the system setting menu, you can set the following: Language selection menu of the Setup menu appears on LANGUAGES SYSTEM the TV screen. LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB RATING LEVEL OFF OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH AUDIO ENGLISH SUBTITLE ENGLISH MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISH » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit TV SCREEN: Select the TV screen size for playing back a DVD 2 recorded with 16:9 wide screen video signal.Press ∞ (or 5) to select • 4:3 LB : Select “4:3 LB (Letter Box)” (highlight) one of the language when the aspect ratio of your TV items. is 4:3. While viewing a wideENTER
LANGUAGES SYSTEM screen picture, the black bars appear on the top and the bottom OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH of the screen. AUDIO ENGLISH SUBTITLE ENGLISH • 4:3 PS : Select “4:3 PS (Pan-Scan)” when MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISH the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3. While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit appear, however, the left and right edge sides of the pictures will not 3 Press ENTER. be shown on the screen. Pop-up window appears (where the • 16:9 : Select “16:9” when the language names are listed). aspect ratio of the TV is ENTER 16:9. (Set the screen size to “ ” indicates the current full on your TV.) setting. LANGUAGES SYSTEM RATING LEVEL :You can select this to restrict playback of DVDs OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH containing violent scenes and those not suitable AUDIO EENNGGLILSIHSH for your family members. (See page 52 for SUBTITLE ECNHGLINISEHSE FRENCH detailed operations.)MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISHGERMAN JAPANESE RUSSIAN
» « | \ : Move Setup : Exit indicates that more languages are listed, but not shown. 4 Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) the language you want, then press ENTER.ENTER
The setting is stored (and the pop-up window goes off). • When you want to cancel the setting you have just made, press RETURN without pressing ENTER. (Pop-up menu also goes off.) 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to select the other language items listed.To erase the Setup menu SETUP
Press SETUP. EN49-53TH-A30[A].pm6 50 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,Setting up the DVD Preferences
3 Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) one of the system STANDBY/ON AUDIO setting items listed on the menu. ENTER TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE LANGUAGES SYSTEM DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME RATING LEVEL OFFVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit VCR CHANNELTUNING
B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 3/2/5/∞ 4 Press ENTER.ENTER Pop-up window appears (where the ENTER
selectable settings are listed). ENTER indicates the current setting.VOLUME
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING RETURN TV SCREEN 4:43 :L 3B LBNumber SOUND RATING LEVEL O4F F: 3 PS
buttons12316 : 9SETTING
456PRO LOGIC789SLOW SETUP TEST SETUP ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM 5 Press ∞ (or 5) to select CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP (highlight) the proper setting, then press ENTER.The setting is stored (and the pop-up ENTER
window goes off).Setting the TV screen size • When you want to cancel the setting
you have just made, press RETURN without pressing ENTER. (Pop-upFrom the remote control ONLY:
SETUP menu also goes off.)1 Press SETUP.Language selection menu of the setup menu appears on • Even if “4:3 PS” is selected, the screen size may become
the TV screen. “4:3 LB” while playing some DVDs. This depends on how LANGUAGES SYSTEM the DVD is programed and recorded. • If a disc (or some portions of the disc) is recorded with OSD LANGUAGE ENGLISH the video signals of 4:3 aspect ratio, this setting does not AUDIO ENGLISH take effect. The pictures are displayed with full 4:3 aspect SUBTITLE ENGLISH MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISH ratio or with 4:3 Letter Box. » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit To erase the Setup menu 2 SETUPPress ENTER (or 3/2) to Press SETUP. select (highlight) the system setting menu.ENTER
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB RATING LEVEL OFF » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit EN49-53TH-A30[A].pm6 51 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,Setting the Parental (Rating) Level 5 Press the number buttons to enter the password
(4 digits).Using this function, you can restrict playback of DVD containing • When shipped from the factory, password is “7890.”
violent scenes and those not suitable for your family members. • If you enter a wrong password, your setting will be canceled.Nobody can play such a disc unless this function is canceled.
(“WRONG PARENTAL LEVEL” appears on the TV screen if you LANGUAGES SYSTEM try to play back such a disc.) TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB • This setting takes effect only for the DVDs containing the rating ENTER PASSWORD *** level information—Level 1 (most restrictive) to Level 8 (least DIGITAL OUTPUT restrictive).From the remote control ONLY:
1 » « | \ : Move Setup : ExitPress SETUP. SETUPLanguage selection menu of the setup menu appears on
the TV screen. 2 Press ENTER (or 3/2) to select (highlight) the system LANGUAGES SYSTEM setting menu. TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB ENTER RATING LEVEL OFOFF BILTESVTERLE 1AM LANGUAGES SYSTEM LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB LEVEL 4 RATING LEVEL OFF LEVEL 5 » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit 6 Press ∞ (or 5) to select (highlight) the level you want, 3 Press ∞ (or 5) to select then press ENTER.ENTER
(highlight) “RATING LEVEL.”ENTER
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB RATING LEVEL OFFTo erase the Setup menu SETUP
» « | \ : Move Setup : ExitPress SETUP again.
4 Press ENTER. “RATING LEVEL” now changes to “ENTER PASSWORD” on the menu.ENTER
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB ENTER PASSWORD » « | \ : Move Setup : ExitTO BE CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
EN49-53TH-A30[A].pm6 52 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,Setting up the DVD Preferences
LANGUAGES SYSTEM TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LB STANDBY/ON RATING LEVEL OLFEFVEL 4 AUDIO BILTESVTERLE 5AM LEVEL 6 TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE LEVEL 7 LEVEL 8 DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL NEW PASSWORD » « | \ : Move Setup : Exit AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUMEVCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF VCR CHANNELTUNING
LANGUAGES SYSTEM B.SEARCH F.SEARCH 5/∞ TV SCREEN 4 : 3 LBENTER NEW PASSWORD - ENTER VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING » « | \ : Move Setup : ExitNumber SOUND
123• If “NEW PASSWORD” is the last item listed on the pop-up buttons SETTING window and is not shown, pressing ∞ repeatedly will show it456PRO LOGIC in the pop-up window. 789SLOW SETUP TEST SETUP ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE 3 Press the number buttons to REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM enter a new password, then CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP ENTER.Your new password is now stored. ENTER SETUP To change the password To erase the Setup menu Press SETUP again.
1 Repeat steps 1 to 5 of “Setting the Parental (Rating) Level” procedure. To reset the passwordYou can reset the password to the initial setting “7890.”
2 Press ∞ (or 5) to select REMEMBER all the other preset settings such as the speaker (highlight) “NEW settings, preset stations, Sleep Timer, DVD setup menu settings are also reset to the factory settings.PASSWORD,” then ENTER. ENTER While the source is DVD player and playback stops, press and
hold 7 on the front panel until the “INITIAL” appears on the display. EN49-53TH-A30[A].pm6 53 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,Operating JVC’s Components You can use the remote control to operate not only this unit but also other JVC products.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied for the other products. — This remote control can operate a VCR whose remote control code is set to A code. • To operate the other products, aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on the target product. ❏ To operate a JVC’s TVYou can perform the following operations on the TV.
STANDBY/ON AUDIO TV : Turn on or off the TV.TV VOLUME +/– : Adjust the volume. TV TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE TV/VIDEO TV/VIDEO : Set the input mode (either TV or
DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNELTV CHANNEL TV VOLUME VIDEO).
AUDIO/ +/– FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME +/– TV CHANNEL +/– : Change the channels.VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL TUNER PRESET DOWN UP REW FF ❏ To operate a JVC’s VCRAfter pressing VCR CONTROL on the remote VCR CONTROL
control, you can perform the following operations STANDBY/ON AUDIO on the VCR.VCR TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE STEP DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL VCR : Turn on or off the VCR.
AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME VCR CHANNEL +/– : Change the channels.VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL VCR CONTROL 1 – 9, 0 : Select TV channel on the VCR. 4 TUNER PRESET 3/8 : Start playback. DOWN UP ¢ 7 : Stop playback. REW FFVCR CHANNEL VCR CHANNELTUNING VCR CHANNEL STEP : Pause playback. To release it,
– +B.SEARCH F.SEARCH press 3/8. 7 3/8 FF (¢) : Fast-wind a tape. ENTER REW (4) : Rewind a tape. VOLUME After operating the VCR, press DVD FM/AM TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING DVD or FM/AM.Number SOUND
123buttons SETTING456IMPORTANT: PRO LOGIC789When you press VCR CONTROL, some buttons on the SLOW SETUP TEST 0 remote control cannot work for operating this unit. ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODETo operate this unit, press DVD or FM/AM.
REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP EN54-58TH-A30[A].pm6 54 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,Operating Other Manufacturers’ TV
❏ To change the transmittable signals for operating a You can use the remote control to operate other TV manufactures’ TV. • Refer also to the manuals supplied for the other products. 1. Press and hold TV . • To operate the other products, aim the remote control 2. Enter manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9, and 0. directly at the remote sensor on the target product. 3. Release TV . Now, you can perform the following operations on the TV. TV : Turn on or off the TV. STANDBY/ON TV VOLUME +/– : Adjust the volume.AUDIO
TV/VIDEO : Set the input mode (either TV or TV TV VCR TV/VIDEO PROGRESSIVE TV/VIDEO VIDEO) DISPLAY STEP TV CHANNEL TV VOLUME TV CHANNEL +/– : Change the channels. TV CHANNEL AUDIO/ FM MODE SUBTITLE TV VOLUME +/–+/–VCR
DVD FM/AM AUX CONTROL 4. Try to operate your TV by pressing TV . When your TV turns on or off, you have entered the correct TUNER PRESET DOWN UP code. REW FF VCR CHANNEL TUNING If there are more than one code listed for your brand of TV, B.SEARCH F.SEARCH try each one until the correct one is entered. ENTER Manufacturers’ codes for TV Manufacturer Codes JVC 01VOLUME
TOP MENU MENU RETURN MUTING Hitachi 10 Magnavox 04 Number SOUND Mitsubishi 13 buttons123Panasonic 12, 24SETTING
456RCA 07, 29 PRO LOGIC789Samsung 11 SLOW SETUP TEST 0 Sanyo 05, 20 ANGLE ZOOM D.R.C DSP MODE Sharp 02, 16, 22 REPEAT A-B REPEAT PROGRAM Sony 03 CLEAR SEARCH REMAIN SLEEP Toshiba 09 Zenith 17 Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment. EN54-58TH-A30[A].pm6 55 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,Maintenance
To get the best performance of the unit, keep your discs and mechanism clean. General Notes Cleaning the unit In general, you will have the best performance by keeping your • Stains on the unit discs, and the mechanism clean. Should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the unit is heavily stained, • Store discs in their cases, and keep them in cabinets or on shelves. wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-diluted neutral detergent and • Keep the disc tray closed when not in use. wrung well, then wipe clean with a dry cloth. • Since the unit may deteriorate in quality, become damaged or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following. — DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth. Handling Discs — DO NOT wipe it strong. — DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine. — DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides to it. • Remove the disc from its case by — DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact with holding it at the edge while it for a long time. pressing the center hole lightly. • Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc. • Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping. • Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc when placing it back in its case. • Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes, and moisture. To clean the disc Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge. DO NOT use any solvent—such as conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner, or benzine—to clean the disc. EN54-58TH-A30[A].pm6 56 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,Troubleshooting
Use this chart to help you solve daily operational problems. If there is any problem you cannot solve, contact your JVC service center. PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION Power does not come on. The power cord is not connected correctly. Insert the plug into the socket. The remote control does not work. • It is too far from the center unit, or is not • Come close to the center unit. facing the center unit. • There is something obstructing the remote • Avoid any obstacles. sensor. • The VCR CONTROL button has been • Press DVD or FM/AM to operate the pressed. system. (See page 54.) • The battery is flat. • Replace the battery. • The battery has been inserted the wrong • Insert the battery correctly. way round (+/–). • Sunlight is falling directly on the detector. • Shade the remote control from direct sunlight. No sound. • There is a short in the speaker cord. • Reconnect the speaker cord. • The audio cord is not connected properly. • Connect the cord properly. (See page 9.) • An incorrect source has been selected. • Select the correct source. (See pages 11 to 16.) • Muting is on. • Press MUTING to cancel muting. • The disc is copy–protected CD. • Replace the disc. Sound is emitted from only one speaker. • The speaker cord is not connected correctly. • Connect the cord properly. (See page 8.) • Left-right balance is incorrect. • Adjust balance. (See pages 22 to 26.) No video. • The video cord is not connected properly. • Connect the cord properly. (See page 10.) • TV input selection is incorrect. • Select the correct input. No picture is displayed on the TV screen, the • The color system of the disc does not match • Change the color system, or replace the picture is blurred, or the picture is divided the system. disc.(See page 17.) into two parts. • The scanning mode is set to “P–SCAN • Change the scanning mode to “I–SCAN MODE” though the system is connected to MODE.” (See page 17.) the TV which does not support the progressive video input such as a conventional TV. A disc cannot be played. • The system and disc region code numbers • Replace the disc. (See page 27.) are incompatible. • The disc causes the parental (rating) error. • Enter password to change the parental (rating) level. (See page 52.) “WRONG DISC FORMAT” appears on the • The CD–R/CD–RW does not contain any • Replace the disc. TV screen. MP3 files. Pictures and sounds are distorted. • The disc is dirty. • Clean the disc. • A VCR is connected between the center unit • Connect the center unit and TV directly. and the TV. Pictures are distorted when progressive mode • “Progressive Mode ” may not be set • Change “Progressive Mode” is selected. appropriately for the current disc. (See page 16.) The edge is missing on the picture image. • Initial setup (TV screen size) was incorrect. • Set TV screen size correctly. (See pages 50 and 51.) Continuous static during FM broadcasts. • The received signal is too weak. • Connect an external FM antenna (see page 6), or contact your dealer. • The station is too far away. • Select another station. • The antenna is not connected correctly. • Check the connection. (See page 6.) The system does not work correctly. • Lightning or electronic noise interferes with • Switch power off, and remove and re-insert operation of the microcomputer. the power plug in the socket. • Immediately after heating the room, the unit • Turn off the power, plug off and leave the was moved to a cold location causing unit a few hours before switching power on condensation to form inside. again. The VCR cannot be operated using this • The remote control is not set for VCR • Press VCR CONTROL to operate the VCR. remote control. operations. (See page 54.) • The VCR is not a JVC’s product. • This remote control can operate a JVC’s VCR whose remote control code is set to A code. EN54-58TH-A30[A].pm6 57 02.8.19, 1:19 PM,Specifications
Center unit (XV-THA30) Subwoofer (SP-WA30) Amplifier section Speaker: 20 cm Front/Center/Rear: Bass-reflex, Magnetically Shielded 25 watts per channel, min. RMS at 6 ohms as 1 kHz, Power Handling Capacity: 110 W with no more than 10 % total harmonic distortion. Impedance: 4 Ω (min) Subwoofer: Frequency Range: 25 Hz to 200 Hz 110 watts, min. RMS at 4 ohms as 100 Hz, Dimensions (W × H × D): 249 mm × 404 mm × 335 mm with no more than 10 % total harmonic distortion. Mass: 6.5 kg (except cords) Audio section Audio input sensitivity/Impedance (at 1 kHz) Satellite Speakers (SP-XA30) AUX IN: 500 mV/47 kΩ Speakers: 8 cm Bass-reflex, Magnetically Shielded Video section Power Handling Capacity: 35 W Color System: NTSC/PAL Impedance: 6 Ω (min) For NTSC discs, the scanning mode can be selected between Frequency Range: 90 Hz to 20 kHz interaced scanning and progressive scanning. For PAL discs, Length of cords: 6 m only interaced scanning mode is available. Dimensions (W × H × D): 105 mm × 119 mm × 126 mm Horizontal Resolution: 480 lines Mass: 600 g (except cords) Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 68 dB Output Level VIDEO OUT VIDEO (Composite): 1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω Rear Satellite Speakers (SP-XSA30) S-VIDEO (Y): 1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω (C): 0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω Speakers: 8 cm COMPONENT OUT Bass-reflex, Magnetically Shielded Y: 1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω Power Handling Capacity: 35 W PB/PR: 0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω Impedance: 6 Ω (min) Frequency Range: 90 Hz to 20 kHz Tuner section Length of cords: 10 m Tuning Range FM : 87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz AM : 522 kHz – 1 629 kHz Dimensions (W × H × D): 105 mm × 119 mm × 126 mm Mass: 600 g (except cords) Usable Sensitivity FM: 8.0 dBf (0.9 µV/75 Ω) AM loop antenna: 650 µV/m General Designs & specifications are subject to change without notice. Readable discs: DVD VIDEO, Video CD, Super Video CD, Audio CD, CD–R/RW (Audio CD, Video CD, Super Video CD, MP3 disc), DVD–R (Video format) Power Requirements: 240 V , 50 Hz Power Consumption: 120 W (at operation) 2 W (in standby mode) Dimensions (W × H × D): 350 mm × 80 mm × 365mm Mass: 6.5 kg EN54-58TH-A30[A].pm6 58 02.8.19, 1:19 PM, VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITEDEN
© 2002 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED JVC 0802KSMMDWSAM TH-A30[A]cover.pm6 2 02.8.8, 7:03 PM]15
Similar documents

TH-V70 SERVICE MANUAL DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM TH-V70 Area Suffix UT - Taiwan This model is TH-V70_UT that is added to the preceding model,theTH-V70_US. Therefore ,this service manual is consisting of diffrence parts list with TH-V70_A.US.UB.UX. Please refer to the service manual of TH-V70_A.US.UB.

UX-Z7MD SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS MICRO COMPONENET MD SYSTEM UX-Z7MD CD-ROM No.SML200212 Area Suffix UP - Korea UF -China Contents Block diagram - 2-1 Standard schematic diagrams - 2-2 Printed circuit boards - 2-9~12 No.22003SCH COPYRIGHT 2002 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD. Dec. 2002 In regard with componen

SERVICE MANUAL CD RECEIVER KD-S735R Area Suffix E Continental Europe EX Central Europe 45Wx4 DISP MO RND78910 11 12 RDS TP PTY SCM COMPACT DIGITAL AUDIO TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Important Safety Precautions ..1-2 2 Disassembly method ..1-4 3 Adjustment method ..1-11 4 Description of major ICs ..1-15 No.4

CD RECEIVER CD-RECEIVER RECEPTEUR CD CD-RECEIVER KD-S735R 45Wx4 DISP MO RND78910 11 12 RDS TP PTY SCM COMPACT DIGITAL AUDIO For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual. Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch. Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se

KD-S735R SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS CD RECEIVER KD-S735R CD-ROM No.SML200212 45Wx4 DISP MO RND78910 11 12 RDS TP PTY SCM COMPACT DIGITAL AUDIO Area Suffix E Continental Europe EX Central Europe Contents Block diagram 2-1 Standard schematic diagrams 2-2 Printed circuit boards 2-5~6 No.49762SCH COPYRIGHT 2002

AV32X25EUS SERVICE MANUAL COLOUR TELEVISION 2511009924D AV32X25EUS/B BASIC CHASSIS MFII Supplementary The following items for the AV32X25EUS/B model was changed partly from AV32X25EUS model. Therefore, this service manual describes only the items which differ from those of the AV32X25EUS model servi

SERVICE MANUAL TV/DVD COMBO AV-20FD22 Supplementary Since some details of the AV-20FD22 service manual (No.51821, Mar. 2001) were changed, we are informing you of these changes and of the new descriptions. OUTLINE OF CHANGES About DVD DECK, only DVD ASS’Y Parts number is informed. (DK4001: X-169G000

AV2178TEE SERVICE MANUAL COLOUR TELEVISION 152200121B AV-2178TEE/C BASIC CHASSIS CH Supplementary The following items for the AV-2178TEE/C model was changed partly from AV-2178TEE model. Therefore, this service manual describes only the items which differ from those of the AV-2178TEE model service m

AV-21E3 SERVICE MANUAL COLOUR TELEVISION 52102028B AV-21E3/C BASIC CHASSIS CG Supplementary The following items for the AV-21E3/C model was changed partly from AV-21E3 model. Therefore, this service manual describes only the items which differ from those of the AV-21E3 model service manual. For deta

AV-N29703 SERVICE MANUAL COLOR TELEVISION 1250210528B AV-N29703 BASIC CHASSIS/Z GJ Supplementary The following items for the AV-N29703/Z model was changed partly from AV-N29703/S model. Therefore, this service manual describes only the items which differ from those of the AV-N29703/S model service m

SERVICE MANUAL COLOUR TELEVISION BASIC CHASSIS CH AV-29W83 /BKAV- 29W83B /VT AV-29W93 /BK AV-29W83 /VT AV-29W93B /BK MUTING POWER MUTING POWER MUTING BASS POWER MUTING BASS POWER MUTING POWER SYSTEM CINEMA SYSTEM CINEMA COLOUR SOUND SURROUND COLOUR SOUND SURROUND SYSTEM CINEMA SYSTEM CINEMA SYSTEM C

Contents COLOUR TELEVISION Safety precautions 2 Preparation 3 INSTRUCTIONS 1 Confirm which remote control you have ... 32 Insert the batteries into the remote control ... 3 Thank you for buying this JVC 3 Connecting the aerial and VCR ... 4 colour television. 4 Connecting other devices ... 5 To make

AV-29W83 AV-29W93B AV-29W93 AV-29W83B SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS COLOUR TELEVISION BASIC CHASSIS CH AV-29W83 /BK AV-29W83B /VT AV-29W93 /BK AV-29W83 /VT AV-29W93B /BK CD-ROM No. SML200211 MUTING POWER MUTING POWER MUTING BASS POWER MUTING BASS POWER MUTING POWER SYSTEM CINEMA SYSTEM CINEMA COLOUR SOUND COLO

DIGITAL CAMERA GC-A55 INSTRUCTIONS Thank you for purchasing this JVC product. Before beginning to operate this unit, please read the instruction manual carefully in order to make sure that the best possible performance is obtained. If you have any question, consult your JVC dealer. To HomePage of JV

Additional edition SERVICE MANUAL DIGITAL VIDEO CAMERA GR-DVX400EG/EK,GR-DVX407EG, GR-DVX507A/EG/EK,GR-DVX509ED Regarding service information other than these sections, refer to the service manual No. 86672 (GR-DVX407EG). Also, be sure to note important safety precautions provided in the service man

Instructions MICRO HD CAMERA DZ-VCA3U Model No. Serial No. LYT1053-001B Contents Feature Applications... 3 Precautions on installing medical electrical equipment Thank you for purchasing the (Safety and hazard prevention) ... 3 Safety precautions ... 4 DZ-VCA3U MICRO HD CAMERA. Important product saf

SERVICE MANUAL MICRO HD CAMERA DZ-VCA3U SPECIFICATIONS Camera head section L Video output L Image sensing device : 1/3-inch PS-CCD (350,000 pixels) • SXGA signal : R/G/B 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms HD/VD TTL D-Sub mini 15 pin L Shooting system : 3-CCD system • HD signal : Y 1 Vp-p Pb/Pr 0.7 Vp-p 75 ohms BNCx3

SERVICE MANUAL DIGITAL VIDEO CAMERA GR-DVL145EK, GR-DVL149EG-X Regarding service information other than these sections, refer to the service manual No. 86693 (GR-DVL145EG-X). Also, be sure to note important safety precautions provided in the service manual. SPECIFICATIONS (The specifications shown p

DIGITAL VIDEO CAMERA ENGLISH CONTENTS GR-DVL145 AUTOMATIC DEMONSTRATION 6 GETTING STARTED 7 – 13 RECORDING & PLAYBACK 14 – 22 RECORDING ... 15 – 18 Please visit our Homepage on the World Wide Web and answer our Consumer Survey (in English only): PLAYBACK ... 19 – 22 http://www.jvc-victor.co.jp/engli

SECTION 4 CHARTS AND DIAGRAMS NOTES OF SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4. Voltage measurement 1) Regulator (DC/DC CONV) circuits Safety precautions REC : Colour bar signal. The Components identified by the symbol are PB : Alignment tape (Colour bar). critical for safety. For continued safety, replace safety — : U

Yreepx~ a m . nepsbtP salrecrn~enb MnHWcTpa rpaxnaucroR aenasnn r. Cqerru~os 7 anpena 1965 r. , .MUHHCTPA rPAXaAHCKOR ABMAUWHCOK) ~ AC CP - M 330 1. B B ~ C TB HH ~ ~ ~ C T~BPHY~ K OBO&nCo TAB~OT H O3X~C~llJ ly- aTaqHH H nMJI0THpOBaHHK) CaMOJleTa f in-2 C BBYMII ABH;ra- TeJrRMH AUI-~BMPB. 2. ~PYKOBO

FIELD MANUAL *FM 44-80 No. 44-80 Headquarters Department of the Army Washington, DC, 30 September 1996 DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release. Distribution is unlimited. *This publication supersedes FM 44-80, 20 July 1993. Cover Acknowledgements FM 44-80 VISUAL AIRCRAFT RECOGNITION PR

a PrecisionInstrumentation Amplifier AD624 FEATURES FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM Low Noise: 0.2 V p-p 0.1 Hz to 10 Hz Low Gain TC: 5 ppm max (G = 1) 50 Low Nonlinearity: 0.001% max (G = 1 to 200) –INPUT High CMRR: 130 dB min (G = 500 to 1000) G = 100 AD624 Low Input Offset Voltage: 25 V, max 225.3 Low I

MicroConverter ®, Multi-Channel 12-bit ADC with Embedded FLASH MCU Errata Sheet ADuC812 A. This Errata sheet represents the known bugs, anomalies and work-arounds for the ADuC812 MicroConverter. B. The Errata listed, apply to all ADuC812 packaged material branded as follows : (Production Material) A

a Loop-Powered 4–20 mASensor Transmitter AD693 FEATURES FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM Instrumentation Amplifier Front End Loop-Powered Operation Precalibrated 30 mV or 60 mV Input Spans Independently Adjustable Output Span and Zero Precalibrated Output Spans: 4–20 mA Unipolar 0–20 mA Unipolar 1268mA Bipo

BOARD TEST ROUTINE Equipment required: • Test ADuC824 Evaluation Board • PC Running Windows 95, 98, NT or 2000 with the hyperterminal program on it. • Power Supply or 9V Battery • Serial port cable • A pin-to-pin connector Board Configuration: Before starting the routine test ensure that the followi